JP7355141B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2009-261415A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that can suitably perform display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform display control.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 provides a display means having a display section,
Display control means for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a gaming machine equipped with
First mode determination information in which first mode information that determines the display mode of the first type image is set in chronological order, and second mode information that determines the display mode of the second type image is set in chronological order. and information storage means for storing in advance second mode determining information,
When simultaneously displaying the first type image and the second type image on the display section, the display control means determines a display mode of the first type image according to the first mode determination information, and displays the first type image in accordance with the first mode determination information. comprising simultaneous display control means for determining a display mode of the second type image according to information for determining two modes ;
The simultaneous display control means
When starting to display the first type image according to the first aspect determining information, start information is set in a start information storage means, and displaying the first type image according to the first aspect determining information. means for erasing the start information from the start information storage means when terminating the process;
means for displaying the second type image according to the second mode determining information when the start information is set in the start information storage means;
Equipped with
The first mode determining information is information in which the first mode information for displaying the first type image in a first variation mode is set in chronological order,
The information storage means stores in advance third mode determining information in which information for displaying the first type image in a variation mode different from the first variation mode is set in chronological order. It is characterized by

According to the present invention, display control can be suitably performed.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the symbol display device. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the display content on the display surface of a pattern display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for jackpot occurrence lottery and the like. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by audio-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process performed by audio-light side MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the table for advance notice lottery, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the table for reach lottery, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the sound-light side RAM. FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a control pattern table. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a symbol is oscillatedly displayed on a symbol display device, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a manner in which a symbol is fixedly displayed on a symbol display device. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining various parts tables. (a1) to (a3), (b1) to (b3) are explanatory diagrams for explaining variable display times determined by parts tables. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed by audio-light side MPU. (a) to (e2) are time charts showing how the effects of the game replay are executed. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by a display CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing task processing executed by a display CPU. 6(a) to 7(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a drawing list. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed in VDP. (a) to (f) are time charts showing an example of a variable display mode of symbols. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the display content on the display surface of a pattern display device. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a work RAM. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for an acceleration period, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for a first high speed period. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for a first low-speed period. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the value set to the first adjustment counter and the third adjustment counter and the type of symbol, and (b) The value set to the second adjustment counter and It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship with the type of symbol. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for an acceleration period, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for a first high speed period. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for a first low-speed period. 3 is a flowchart showing command-compatible processing executed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for normal fluctuations performed by display CPU. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a loop display effect. (a) to (d) are time charts showing the flow of loop display effects. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a work RAM. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a table for character stopping, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a table for character movement, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a table for background. 7 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for a character loop executed by a display CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing calculation processing for a background loop executed by a display CPU. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of group display effects. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining moving image data for group display. (a1) to (a3) are time charts showing the relationship between the image update cycle and the cycle in which still image data can be used, and (b) and (c) are drawings in the frame area to be drawn using the same decoded image data. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for group display effects performed by the display CPU. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the decoding process performed by a video decoder, and (b) It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for group display performed by VDP. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the validity period display effect. (a) and (b) are time charts showing comparative examples of valid period display effects. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module. (a) It is an explanatory view for explaining a band display table, and (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining a flashing display table. (a1), (b1), (a2), (b2) are time charts showing how the validity period display effect is executed using both the band display table and the flashing display table. 3 is a flowchart illustrating arithmetic processing for displaying a valid period executed by a display CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of number display performance. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing a number display effect. FIG. 3 is a front view of the inner frame showing an enlarged view of the lower region of the inner frame. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a count performed by audio-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the output setting process of the measurement command performed by the sound-light side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a measurement command corresponding process executed by a display CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing calculation processing for measurement display executed by a display CPU. (a) to (c) are time charts showing how the number display effect is executed. 7 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for increasing display executed by a display CPU. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first character image, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect image, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second character image. . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the range to be drawn in a frame area to be drawn is varied in each image data; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pseudo moving image table. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how a pseudo moving image effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for pseudo animation effects performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for round effect executed by the display CPU. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining other examples of pseudo moving image production. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a second embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by a display CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing task processing executed by a display CPU. 6(a) to 7(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a drawing list. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed in VDP. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how drawing data is created as drawing processing is executed. (a) to (c) are time charts showing how time-based effects are executed. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device during the normal period, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device during the preparation period, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device during the preparation period. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of a pattern display device. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device when the start timing of the time-based performance comes in a situation where the performance for the game round is being executed. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the time-based effects are executed in relation to the execution status of the effects for the second game. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the composition of sound-light side ROM, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data table for time-based effects. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module. It is a flowchart which shows RTC correspondence processing performed by audio-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the start of a preparation period performed by the sound-light side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing command-compatible processing executed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process during the preparation period performed by the sound-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process during a special period performed by audio-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process performed by audio-light side MPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining another example of display contents of a pattern display device in a preparation period. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the setting process for the start of a preparation period performed by the sound-light side MPU. 7 is a flowchart illustrating another example of command-compatible processing executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the setting process during the preparation period performed by the sound-light side MPU. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific contents of separate storage effects. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining comparative examples of different storage effects. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how different storage effects are performed. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific contents of separate storage effects. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for another preservation|save production performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process performed by display CPU during the operation validity period. It is a flowchart which shows the process during operation corresponding production performed by display CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a separate save display setting process executed in VDP. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a process of creating drawing data for separate storage and display, which is executed in the VDP. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific display contents of angle display effects. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module. (a) to (i) are explanatory diagrams for explaining various video data groups. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the angle display effect progresses. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for angle display effects performed by display CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing opening processing executed by a display CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing decoding processing executed in VDP. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a video correspondence table corresponding to the A angle, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a switching reference table. 12 is a flowchart showing a setting process for angle display effects executed in the VDP. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of normal moving image data, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of special moving image data. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how special video effects are executed. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for special animation use effects performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the special video use effect performed by VDP.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. Further, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

A game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame 13. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail part 25 and an outer rail part 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail part 25 and the outer rail part 26 provide a guide means. The guide rail is configured as follows. A game ball fired from a game ball firing mechanism (not shown) attached below the game board 24 in the inner frame 13 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail. The game ball firing mechanism performs a game ball firing operation when a firing operation device 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is manually operated.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings passing through it in the front and back direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special winning winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, etc. ing.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the first operating port 33 or a ball enters the second operating port 34, three prize balls are paid out. When a ball enters the general winning hole 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. executed.

Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of winning balls than the first operating port 33. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of prize balls is greater than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 has a large number of nails 24b planted therein in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are also arranged.

Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the fluid continues to flow down the gaming area PA without being discharged. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 will be used. The landing of a game ball into a ball is also expressed as winning a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in the game board 24 as a unit as an operating port device. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric utility object 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second operating hole 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the downstream direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that passes through the through gate 35 in the vertical direction, and the game ball that enters the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning the prize. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning in the through gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is held triggered by winning in the through gate 35, and a general figure display of the normal figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass through in the gaming area PA. A changing display of the picture is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a power open winning, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuating display of the general figure display section 38a is ended, the state shifts to the general electric power open state. In the general power open state, the general power accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

Note that the general figure display section 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns that are variably displayed on the general figure display section 38a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

In the general drawing unit 38, a general drawing holding display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the general drawing display section 38a. The number of game balls that have entered the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the regular game reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is held using the win at the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly displayed through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special symbol unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

Specifically regarding the special figure unit 37, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display section 37a is narrower than the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display section 37a, a changing display of symbols is performed when a jackpot lottery is held triggered by a winning at the first operating port 33 or a winning at the second operating port 34. Then, as a stop result after the fluctuating display of the symbols is performed, a display corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery is performed. Note that the special figure display section 37a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the designs displayed on the special figure display section 37a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed. Possible configurations include a configuration where .

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure pending display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the special symbol reservation display section 37b.

In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. Note that the symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may also be a dot matrix display device. It's okay.

In the symbol display device 41, when a variable display of symbols is performed on the special symbol display section 37a based on a winning to the first operating port 33 or a winning to the second operating port 34, the variable display of the symbol is performed in accordance with the variable display of the symbol. be exposed. That is, when a variable display is performed on the special symbol display section 37a, a variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly. For example, in a game round in which the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the active line set in advance on the symbol display device 41.

The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. 3(a) to 3(j) are diagrams individually showing the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 4(a) and FIG. 4(b) are diagrams showing the display surface of the symbol display device 41. It is a figure showing P.

As shown in Figures 3(a) to 3(j), the patterns, which are a type of pattern, include nine types of main patterns with numbers from "1" to "9" attached to them, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as octopuses are numbered from "1" to "9" to form the main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface P, the symbols of each of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclically scrolling manner in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), on the display surface P, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. It looks like this. Further, five effective lines are set on the display surface P, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and with a combination of symbols with the same number attached to any active line formed, all symbol rows Z1 When the fluctuation display of ~Z3 ends, a jackpot video is displayed as the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result, which will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) The main pattern corresponds to a "non-specific pattern." When a 15R probability-variable jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Further, when a normal jackpot result occurs, the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the case of an explicit 2R guaranteed variable jackpot result, which will be described later, the variable display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends with a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination formed, and then, A demonstration video is now displayed.

Note that the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, but may be arbitrary, and may include the number of symbol rows, the direction in which the symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 are not limited to the above-mentioned symbols, and for example, only numbers may be displayed in a variable manner as the symbols.

In addition, based on winning to either of the operating ports 33, 34, a variable display is started on the special figure display section 37a and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the above-mentioned variable display is stopped. corresponds to one game round.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 2, if you win a jackpot in the jackpot lottery based on winning the first operating port 33 or winning the second operating port 34, you can win the prize in the special electric winning device 32. Shifts to opening/closing execution mode. The special electric winning device 32 is equipped with a grand prize opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and is also provided with an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the grand prize opening. The opening/closing door 32a is placed in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, but if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery, it can be switched to the open state in which game balls can win prizes. It has become. Incidentally, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to which the game will transition in the event of a winning result. Note that in the closed state, it is not impossible to win a prize, but it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, a display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is executed on the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 1, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 24 configured as described above. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 has a window 42 formed therein so that almost the entire area of the gaming area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 43 is fitted therein. Although the window panel 43 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, it is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting section 44 is provided above the window section 42 . Further, a pair of left and right speaker sections 45 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the gaming state. Further, below the window portion 42, an upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47, which bulge toward the front side, are arranged vertically in parallel. An upper plate 46a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 46, and a lower plate 47a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 47. The upper tray 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls put out from the payout device provided in the back pack unit 15, and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism side while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 47a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 46a.

In the lower bulging portion 47, an area outside the lower tray 47a is provided with a production operating device 48 that includes an operating section that is manually operated by the player. The operation section of the performance operation device 48 is manually operated by the player in order to set the performance content on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 to a predetermined performance content.

A main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13. Further, the back pack unit 15 is equipped with a dispensing mechanism including a dispensing device, a dispensing control device, and a power source/firing control device. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described below.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 includes a main control board 51 that controls the main control of the game. In addition, in the main control device 50, the board box housing the main control board 51 etc. may be provided with a trace means for leaving traces of its opening, or a trace structure for leaving traces of its opening. You can also do this. Examples of such trace means include the configuration of a joint (crimped part) that connects multiple case bodies that make up a board box inseparably and requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating them, and the structure of a joint (crimped part) that requires the adhesive layer to be adhered when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that remains and leaves a trace of having been removed is pasted across the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box can be considered.

The main control board 51 is equipped with an MPU 52 . The MPU 52 includes a ROM 53 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 52, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 53. A certain RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are built in.

Note that as the ROM 53, a storage means (that is, a nonvolatile storage means) is used that allows random access when reading control programs and fixed value data, and does not require an external power supply for memory retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the memory is not limited to this, and any type of memory can be used as the ROM 53 as long as random access is possible. Furthermore, the configuration in which the control and calculation section, ROM 53, and RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and a configuration in which each function is installed as a separate chip may also be used, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It may also be configured so that it is installed.

The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power supply/launch control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power source/launch control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, operating power is supplied to the main control board 51 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 70 described later.

Note that a power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply/launch control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power outage is monitored by the power outage monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power outage is confirmed, a power outage signal is sent to the MPU 52, so that the MPU 52 executes processing in case of a power outage. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors, detection is provided one-to-one for the winning ball entry parts such as the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35. A sensor is included, and the MPU 52 performs winning determination (ball entering determination) for each ball entering portion. In addition, the MPU 52 executes a jackpot occurrence lottery and a jackpot result type lottery based on the winnings to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, and also executes a reach occurrence lottery for each game round and a lottery for determining variable display time. do.

Here, a configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the MPU 52 will be explained.

During the game, the MPU 52 uses various counter information to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display on the special symbol display section 37a, setting of symbol display on the symbol display device 41, setting of display on the regular symbol display section 38a, etc. , Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, a winning random number counter C1 used for jackpot occurrence lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining jackpot types such as 15R probability variable jackpot result and normal jackpot result, A reach random number counter C3 used for the reach random number lottery when the symbol display device 41 misses and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display device 41 A variation type counter CS is used to determine the variation display time in . Furthermore, a general electric utility object release counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the general electric utility object 34a of the second operating port 34 is to be placed in an electric role open state. Note that each of these counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is provided in the lottery counter buffer 54a.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the hold storage area 54b as an acquisition information storage means when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. is stored in

The reservation storage area 54b includes a reservation area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In addition, numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored as pending information in any of the pending areas RE1 to RE4.

In the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, if winnings to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occur multiple times in a row, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE2 Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of → third reservation area RE3 → fourth reservation area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, the winning history of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. . Note that the number that can be held and stored is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and is an area for moving each value stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, a judgment is made as to whether the execution is correct or not.

In detail about each counter, the winning random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, the winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by "1" within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and is stored in the holding storage area 54b at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

The random number value for winning the jackpot is stored in the ROM 53 as a win/fail table. As the pass/fail table, a pass/fail table for low probability mode and a pass/fail table for high probability mode are set. That is, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as lottery modes in the jackpot occurrence lottery means.

Under the gaming state in which the low probability mode win/fail table is referred to during the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is two. On the other hand, under the gaming condition in which the high probability mode win/fail table is referred to during the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 20. Note that the number of random numbers that result in a win is arbitrary, as long as the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and is stored in the holding storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plural jackpot results include (1) the mode of opening/closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the jackpot occurrence lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, (3) the opening/closing execution mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by differentiating three conditions, namely, the support mode in the general electricity accessory 34a of the second operating port 34.

The mode of opening/closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is such that the frequency of winnings on the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high or low. A frequent winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the grand prize opening is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds have elapsed or a prize is entered in the grand prize opening. This continues until the number reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the grand prize opening is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and each opening is continued until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or the number of prizes won in the grand prize opening is This continues until there are 6 pieces.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 58 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds. be done. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning hole is 0.2 seconds as described above. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning hole is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode, winning of game balls does not substantially occur.

In addition, in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the number of openings and closings of the big winning opening, the opening time limit for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. However, the value is not limited to the above value and may be any value as long as the frequency of winnings in the special electric winning device 32 increases from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, if the number of openings and closings is greater in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time limit for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, there is a configuration in which winnings to the special electric winning device 32 do not substantially occur. It is good to say. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, for one opening, the product of the game ball firing cycle and the limited number of openings is set to be shorter than the opening limit time, while in the low-frequency winning mode, for one opening, The product of the game ball firing cycle and the release limit number may be set to be longer than the release limit time. In addition, even if the firing interval of game balls and the opening time of one big prize opening are not as mentioned above, in the low-frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, it is possible to effectively Therefore, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which winnings to the special electric winning device 32 do not occur.

As for the support mode of the general utility accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, when compared with the situation where the game ball continues to be launched in the same manner to the gaming area PA, the normal function of the second operating port 34 is A low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency with which the electric utility object 34a is opened per unit time is relatively high or low.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric utility role opening lottery using the electric utility role opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5 ), however, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric utility object 34a becomes open when the electric role open state is won is set to be greater than that in the low-frequency support mode, and one more time. The opening time is set to be long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the power utility open state is won and the power utility object 34a is opened multiple times, the period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operating port 33 is higher than that in the second operating port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize is higher in the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases. When a winning occurs in the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has too much. It can be carried out.

Note that the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequently open to the electric utility role per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and may include, for example, a lottery for opening electric utility objects. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric combination open state in . In addition, the secured time that is secured after one electric accessory opening lottery is held and the next electric accessory opening lottery is held (for example, in the general map display section 38a based on winnings in the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times are prepared, it is easier to select a shorter securing time in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, or the average securing time is set to be shorter. You can leave it there. Furthermore, increasing the number of openings, lengthening the opening time, and shortening the time secured between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery (i.e. , shortening the one-time variable display time on the common map display section 38a), shortening the average time of the secured time, and increasing the winning probability, any one condition or any combination of conditions may be applied. This may increase the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode.

The destinations to which game results are distributed to the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the ROM 53 as a distribution table. As such distribution destinations, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, and a 15R probability variation jackpot result are set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode, and furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes a low probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games has reached the end standard number of times (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that causes the gaming state to shift to the normal jackpot state.

The explicit 2R definite variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. be. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the jackpot occurrence lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the state shifts to the jackpot state accordingly. In other words, the explicit 2R definite variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that causes the gaming state to shift to the explicit 2R definite variable jackpot state.

The 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the jackpot occurrence lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the state shifts to the jackpot state accordingly. In other words, the 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that causes the gaming state to shift to the 15R probability variable jackpot state.

In relation to the above gaming states, the normal gaming state refers to a state where the jackpot occurrence lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to normal jackpot results, and "10 to 14" correspond to explicit 2R definite variable jackpot results. ``15-29'' corresponds to the 15R probability-variable jackpot result.

As mentioned above, since the explicit 2R definite variable jackpot result is set as the definite variable jackpot result, the form of the definite variable jackpot result is diversified. That is, when comparing the two types of variable probability jackpot results, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 15R probability variable jackpot result, which is a high-frequency winning mode in the opening/closing execution mode and a high-frequency support mode in the support mode. In the mode, it becomes a low-frequency winning mode, but in the support mode, the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, which becomes a high-frequency support mode, is the lowest. This prevents the game from becoming monotonous and increases the level of attention to the game.

In addition, as a type of probability variable jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode remains the previous mode. It may also include an unspecified 2R probability variable jackpot result. In this case, the probability-variable jackpot results are further diversified.

Furthermore, as a type of losing result in the jackpot lottery, there is a special losing result that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode and does not switch to the jackpot lottery mode and support mode after the end of that mode. Good too. In a configuration where both the unspecified 2R definite variable jackpot result and the special winning result are set as described above, the opening/closing execution mode will shift to the low-frequency winning mode, and the support mode will remain the previous mode. However, due to the difference in the transition mode of the jackpot occurrence lottery mode, for example, if either the undisclosed 2R probability variable jackpot result or the special winning result occurs in the normal gaming state, It becomes possible for the player to predict which result this actually corresponds to.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and is stored in the holding storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected performance is set as a type of display performance on the symbol display device 41. The expected performance is equipped with a symbol display device 41 capable of displaying symbols in a fluctuating manner, and in game rounds where the opening/closing execution mode of the special electric winning device 32 is the high-frequency winning mode, the stop display result after the fluctuating display is specially displayed. In the resulting gaming machine, after the variable display of symbols on the symbol display device 41 starts and before the stop display result is derived and displayed, the player is made to think that the variable display state is likely to result in the special display result. This refers to the display state for

Two types of expected performance are set: the above-mentioned ready-to-reach performance and a preview performance for making the user expect the occurrence of a ready-to-reach performance or a special display result at a stage before the relevant ready-to-reach performance occurs.

For the reach effect, by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is created. This includes a display state in which combinations of ready-to-win symbols that have a possibility of being established are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, with the combination of ready-to-reach symbols displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background image to create a ready-to-reach effect. , includes those in which a combination of ready-to-reach symbols is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface P to perform a ready-to-reach effect.

Specifically, regarding the reach effect, as a step before ending the fluctuating display of symbols, a jackpot symbol corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is displayed on a preset active line on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying combinations of ready-to-reach symbols that are likely to form a combination, and symbols are fluctuated and displayed by a final stopped symbol sequence under the situation where the reach line is formed.

To specifically explain the display contents in FIG. 4, first, the fluctuating display of symbols is finished in the upper symbol row Z1, and then the fluctuating display of symbols is finished in the lower symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same number on lines L1 to L5, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a fluctuating display of symbols is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. By being caught, it becomes a reach performance. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbols with the same numbers as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line, so that the main symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 The fluctuating display of symbols is ended.

The preview performance is performed in a situation where the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the start of the fluctuating display of the symbols on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, or in some symbol rows. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Also included are those in which the background image is set in a predetermined form different from the previous form, and those in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set in a predetermined form different from the previous form. Such a notice effect can occur in any game round when a reach effect is performed or when a reach effect is not performed, but it is higher when a reach effect is performed than when a reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The ready-to-win effect is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-reach random number counter C3 in the game round that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, in game rounds that do not shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing refers to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53, and the reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect. Executed if On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform a preview effect is made not in the main control device 50 but in the sound emission control device 60.

The variation type counter CS is configured such that it is incremented by "1" sequentially within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 52 to determine the variation display time on the special symbol display section 37a and the variation display time of symbols on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process, which will be described later. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the special symbol display section 37a and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts the variation of the symbol. Note that when determining the variable display time, a variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

For example, the general utility goods release counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by "1" within the range of 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The common electric utility object opening counter C4 is updated regularly, and is stored in the electric role holding area 54c at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the general electric utility object 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric utility object opening counter C4.

A dispensing control device 55 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and a power supply/discharge control device 57 is also connected thereto. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55 based on the winning determination result in the winning ball entering section. The payout control device 55 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls using the payout device 56 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 50 . A launch permission command is transmitted to the power source/launch control device 57 based on the fact that the launch operating device 28 is being operated. The power supply/launch control device 57 drives the game ball launch mechanism 58 to launch the game ball toward the game area PA based on the launch permission command received from the main control device 50.

Moreover, the special figure display part 37a and the regular figure display part 38a are connected to the output side of MPU52, and the display control of these special figure display part 37a and the regular figure display part 38a is directly performed by MPU52. That is, in each game round, the MPU 52 executes display control of the special figure display section 37a. In addition, when displaying the lottery result as to whether or not to open the general electric utility object 34a, the MPU 52 executes display control of the ordinary electric figure display section 38a.

Connected to the output side of the MPU 52 are a special electric prize drive unit that opens and closes the opening/closing door of the special electric prize winning device 32, and a general electric accessory drive unit that opens and closes the ordinary electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. . That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the special electric winning drive unit so that the big winning opening is opened and closed. Further, when the open state of the general electric accessory 34a is won, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the general electric accessory drive unit so that the general electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, an audio emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and various commands for effects are transmitted to the audio emission control device 60.

Here, the processing executed by the MPU 52 will be explained. The processing of the MPU 52 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, every 4 msec).

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In step S101, a power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) has elapsed after the main process is started. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 54 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function registers of the MPU 52 are set.

Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 57 is manually operated, and in the subsequent step S105, it is determined whether the power outage flag of the RAM 54 is set to "1". Determine whether In addition, in step S106, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum, and in the subsequent step S107, it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a gaming hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process moves to step S108. Further, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not set, or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly moves to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 54 is cleared. After that, the process advances to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is not pressed, on condition that the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, step S109 is performed without executing the process of step S108. Proceed to. In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 54, such as initializing a power outage flag, is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is sent to the voice light emission control device 60 in order to make the current gaming state recognized. do.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the MPU 52 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly.

In the remaining processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing. In the subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S112, a variation counter update process is executed to update the variation type counter CS. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the RAM 54, the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the counter from which it was read is overwritten. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is permitted. After executing the process in step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec). First, in step S201, a power outage information storage process is executed. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power cutoff is received from the power outage monitoring board, and if the occurrence of a power outage is identified, a power outage process is executed.

In the following step S202, random number update processing for lottery is executed. In the random number update process for lottery, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general utility object opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general utility goods release counter C4, and a process was performed in which each of the read numerical information was incremented by 1. Afterwards, a process is executed to overwrite the reading source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S203, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step S111, and in step S204, a variation counter update process is executed as in step S112.

In the subsequent step S205, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, a game stop flag provided in the RAM 54 is set to "1".

In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes from step S207 onwards are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to output to various drive units in accordance with the output information. For example, if information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, output of a drive signal to the special electric prize winning drive unit is started, and if information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the closed state is set, the corresponding Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, if the information that should switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electric accessory drive unit is started, and the information that should switch the general electric accessory 34a to the closed state is set. is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, reading processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power outage signal and winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S209, winning detection processing is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from each winning detection sensor are read, and the presence or absence of a winning in the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and through gate 35 is determined. Execute processing to identify.

In the subsequent step S210, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 54. In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may also be a configuration.

In the following step S211, a firing control process for controlling the firing of game balls is executed. In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is fired every 0.6 sec, which is the predetermined firing cycle, as already explained.

In the following step S212, as an input state monitoring process, the disconnection of each winning detection sensor and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are checked based on the information read in the reading process of step S208.

In the subsequent step S213, a special figure special electric control process is executed to control the execution of the game round and the opening/closing execution mode. In the special figure special electric control process, when a prize is won to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 in a situation where the number of pending information stored in the pending storage area 54b is less than the upper limit number, A process is executed in which numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 at the time is stored in the pending storage area 54b in chronological order as pending information. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, on the condition that the game is not in progress or opening/closing execution mode, and the pending information is stored, the jackpot occurrence is determined to determine whether the pending information corresponds to a jackpot winning. A lottery process and, if it corresponds to a jackpot win, a distribution determination process for determining which jackpot result the pending information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control processing, not only jackpot occurrence lottery processing and distribution judgment processing, but also if the pending information does not correspond to the jackpot winning, whether or not the pending information corresponds to the reach occurrence At the same time, a process of selecting a variable display time of a game session is executed using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. In this case, the variable display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot win, the type of jackpot, and the presence or absence of reach occurrence is read from the ROM 53, and the current Determine the variable display time of game times. Then, a variation command containing information on the variation display time of the determined game round and a type command containing information on game results are transmitted to the audio emission control device 60, and the variation of the picture on the special figure display section 37a is transmitted. Start display. As a result, one game round is started, and the performance for the game round is started on the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, when the MPU 52 transmits the variation command and the type command, it starts measuring the variation display time.

In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, during the execution of one game round, when the variable display time corresponding to the game round has elapsed, the special figure display section 37a performs jackpot generation lottery processing and distribution for the current game round. The stop result corresponding to the result of the determination process is displayed, and measurement of the final display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is started. Then, the state in which the stop result is displayed on the special figure display section 37a is maintained over the final display time. When the confirmed display time has elapsed, if the current game round corresponds to a losing result, a new game round can be started on the condition that the hold information is stored in the hold storage area 54b. Execute processing. If the hold information is not stored, the process waits until the hold information is newly acquired.

On the other hand, if the current game round corresponds to the jackpot result, processing for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed. At this start, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the audio light emission control device 60. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that a round game is to be started is sent to the sound emission control device 60, and a close command indicating that the round game is to be ended is sent to the voice emission control device 60. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, when ending the opening/closing execution mode, an ending command indicating this is sent to the audio emission control device 60, and at the same time, a jackpot occurrence lottery mode and a support mode are set after the opening/closing execution mode. Execute the process. In the opening/closing execution mode, an opening period occurs over a period of, for example, 3 seconds, and during this opening period, an effect is performed that allows the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode has occurred. After that, a round game in which the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed is executed a predetermined number of times. Then, after a predetermined number of round games have been played, an ending period occurs over a period of, for example, 5 seconds, and during this ending period, an effect is performed that allows the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode ends. .

After executing the special figure special electric line control process in step S213 in the timer interrupt process, the general figure general electric line control process is executed in step S214. In the general map and general electric power control process, when a prize is won in the through gate 35, a process is executed to obtain the reservation information on the general electrician side, and when the reservation information on the general electrician side is stored. Then, a release determination is made regarding the pending information, and further, using the release determination as a trigger, a process for performing a production for a regular map is executed. Further, based on the result of the open determination, a process of opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of pending information corresponding to the special figure display section 37a on the special figure pending display section 37b. At the same time, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of pending information corresponding to the general figure display section 38a on the ordinary figure reservation display section 38b. In addition, in step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display section 37a is set, and the display content of the regular figure display section 38a is updated. Configure the output information for updating.

In the subsequent step S216, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 55 is confirmed, and a payout state receiving process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result. Further, in step S217, a payout output process is executed to set the prize ball command as an output target. In the following step S218, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process. Thereafter, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Audio light emission control device 60>
Next, the audio emission control device 60 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 5, the audio emission control device 60 includes an audio emission control board 61 on which an MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 62, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63. A certain RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are built-in.

Note that as the ROM 63, a storage means (ie, a nonvolatile storage means) is used that allows random access when reading control programs and fixed value data, and does not require an external power supply for memory retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the memory is not limited to this, and any type of memory can be used as the ROM 63 as long as random access is possible. Furthermore, the configuration in which the control and calculation section, ROM 63, and RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, but a configuration in which each function is installed as a separate chip may also be used, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It may also be configured so that it is installed.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 50 and the production operation device 48 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. A display light emitting section 44 and a speaker section 45 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62, and a display CPU 72, which will be described later, of the display control device 70 is also connected.

<Display control device 70>
Next, the display control device 70 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 5, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. .

The display CPU 72 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads, interprets, and executes control programs and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected to an input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71 via a bus, and various commands sent from the audio emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 through the input port 77. be done. Note that receiving commands from the audio emission control device 60 in the display CPU 72 is not limited to a configuration in which commands are directly received from the audio emission control device 60, but also includes a configuration in which commands are received relayed to a relay board. It will be done.

The display CPU 72 is connected to a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, and a VRAM 75 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on commands received from the audio emission control device 60. Give transfer instructions. Further, the display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and based on commands received from the audio emission control device 60, issues a drawing instruction to cause the symbol display device 41 to output an image signal. The memory module 74, work RAM 73, VRAM 75, and VDP 76 will be explained below.

The memory module 74 stores in advance control data including a control program and fixed value data, and also includes sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, background data, and moving image data. Various image data are stored in advance. The memory module 74 includes a nonvolatile semiconductor memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory. Incidentally, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed satisfactorily. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is used, the memory module 74 is used as a non-writing, read-only memory (ROM).

Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the external shape and pattern of the character, and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image. There is. Further, the background data is stored and held as JPEG format data that is compressed still image data. The moving image data will be explained in detail later.

The work RAM 73 is a storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 74, and also temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain memory, and specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Note that although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed satisfactorily. Further, the work RAM 73 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred to the work RAM 73 from the memory module 74 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74 . Then, the display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into an internal memory area (register group) as needed, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 75 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 75 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain memory, and specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAMs such as DRAM, SRAM, or dual port RAM may be used. Note that although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed satisfactorily. Further, the VRAM 75 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 75 includes a buffer 81 for expansion. Image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 76 to the memory module 74 . Further, the VRAM 75 is provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76. Note that the VRAM 75 may be built in the VDP 76.

The VDP 76 is an image generation device that draws on the pattern display device 41 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 72 using data stored and held in the expansion buffer 81, specifically by processing it. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 41b incorporated in the symbol display device 41 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display section 41a. Since the VDP 76 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and in reality, it can be said to be a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control section 91, a register 92, a video decoder 93, and a display circuit 94. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to an I/F 95 for the display CPU 72 and an I/F 96 for the VRAM 75.

The VDP 76 causes the register 92 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72. By storing the drawing list in the register 92, the control unit 91 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes predetermined processing. Note that all of the control programs for the control unit 91 to operate may be provided by a drawing list, and the control unit 91 may have a built-in memory in which control programs are stored in advance, and the control program and the content of the drawing list may be provided. A configuration may be adopted in which the control unit 91 executes predetermined processing. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 74 in advance.

As the above process, the control unit 91 reads the image data stored in the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Furthermore, the control unit 91 uses (or processes) the image data read into the expansion buffer 81 to create one frame's worth of drawing data in the frame buffer 82 . One frame of drawing data refers to the data necessary to display the image at one update timing in a configuration where the image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. say.

Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame area 82a and a second frame area 82b are provided. Each of these frame areas 82a and 82b is set to have a capacity capable of storing one frame's worth of drawing data. Specifically, each of the frame regions 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas that correspond to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) for each dot. Correspondingly, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to a full-color system; for example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 82 is provided with a first frame area 82a and a second frame area 82b, in a situation where drawing data on the symbol display device 41 is executed using drawing data created in one frame area. , creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame areas is executed. That is, a double buffer system is adopted as the frame buffer 82.

In the display circuit 94, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display section 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b, and the image signal is sent to the display circuit 94. It is output to the symbol display device 41 via the connected output port 78. Specifically, drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 82a and 82b to the display circuit 94. The resolution of the transferred drawing data is adjusted by a scaler (not shown) and converted into gradation data so that it corresponds to the resolution of the pattern display device 41. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output. Note that the display circuit 94 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal. Further, the video decoder 93 executes decoding of the video data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75.

<Processing configuration of MPU 62 of audio emission control device 60>
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 62 (hereinafter referred to as the sound/light side MPU 62) of the sound/light emission control device 60 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec) in the audio/light side MPU 62.

First, in step S301, table setting processing is executed to set a control table used to control the light emission of the display light emitting section 44, the sound output control of the speaker section 45, and the control of the display control device 70. do. In the table setting process, a control pattern table for performing processing corresponding to a command received from, for example, the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 (hereinafter referred to as main MPU 52) is set. In the following step S302, a command selection process for instructing the display CPU 72 on the content of display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed. In the command selection process, commands are output to the display CPU 72 according to the control table read out in the table setting process of step S301.

Thereafter, in step S303, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the display light emitting section 44 is performed according to the control table read out in the table setting process of step S301. Furthermore, in step S304, a sound output control process for controlling the sound output of the speaker section 45 is executed. In the sound output control process, the sound output of the speaker section 45 is controlled according to the control table read out in the table setting process of step S301. Thereafter, pointer update processing is executed in step S305. In the pointer update process, the pointer information in the current control table is updated to the next pointer information.

<Table setting process>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the table setting process executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

If the variation command and type command have been received from the main MPU 52 (step S401: YES), a game result storage process is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, information about the results of the jackpot occurrence lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main side MPU 52 at the start of the current game round is specified, The identified information is written to the RAM 64.

Thereafter, on the condition that the variable display time corresponding to the variation command received this time from the main MPU 52 is the variable display time corresponding to the situation in which the preview effect can occur (step S403: YES), the preview lottery process is executed. (Step S404). In the preview lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not a preview performance will be performed on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. As already explained, such a preview performance is performed in a situation where the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the symbol display device 41 starts displaying the symbols in a variable manner, or in a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or in some cases. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in multiple symbol rows, there are cases in which the characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or the background screen is changed from the previous pattern. It also includes those in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are in a predetermined manner different from the previous aspects. This notice effect can occur in any game round when a reach effect is performed or when a reach effect is not performed, but the performance is higher when a reach effect is performed than when a reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. In addition, preview effects are more likely to occur in game sessions that correspond to a jackpot result than in game sessions that correspond to a winning result, and furthermore, preview effects that appear less often in game sessions that correspond to a jackpot result. is set so that it is more likely to occur.

In the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice lottery table T1 stored in advance in the ROM 63 (hereinafter referred to as the sound and light side ROM 63) of the sound and light emission control device 60 is stored in the RAM 64 of the voice and light emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as the sound and light side RAM 64). read out. The advance notice lottery table T1 is prepared in one-to-one correspondence with combinations of variation commands and type commands. Therefore, in the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice lottery table T1 corresponding to the variation command and type command received this time from the main MPU 52 is read from the sound-light side ROM 63.

FIG. 11A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the advance notice lottery table T1. In the advance notice lottery table T1, the advance notice lottery results are associated with the numerical range of the advance notice lottery counter. As a result of the preview lottery, a non-occurrence in which the preview performance does not occur, a first preview performance in which the preview performance is performed in the first mode, and a second preview performance in which the preview performance is performed in the second mode are set. . In the first preview performance, for example, the individual image for the first preview performance is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined manner, and in the second preview performance, for example, the individual image for the second preview performance is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to be activated. The advance notice lottery counter is provided in the sound/light side RAM 64. The advance notice lottery counter is a loop counter that can take any value from "0" to "239", and is incremented by "1" periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and becomes "0" when the maximum value is reached. return. As shown in FIG. 11(a), in the advance notice lottery table T1, possible values of the advance notice lottery counter are assigned to any advance notice lottery result.

Note that the type of preview performance to be drawn may differ depending on the type of the preview lottery table T1. In this case, the selection rate of the preview effect may be different between the different types of preview lottery tables T1 even though the type of preview performance to be drawn is the same, or the selection rate of the preview performance may be different between the different types of preview lottery tables T1. In some cases, some or all of the types of preview presentations to be drawn may be different.

In the advance notice lottery process, the current value of the advance notice lottery counter is acquired, and the obtained value is compared against the advance notice lottery table T1 read this time. Then, the preview lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the preview lottery counter is obtained as the result of the current preview lottery process.

Returning to the explanation of the table setting process (FIG. 10), if a negative determination is made in step S403, or if the process in step S404 is executed, the variation display time corresponding to the variation command received this time from the main MPU 52 is reached. On the condition that the variable display time corresponds to the occurrence of the effect (step S405: YES), a reach effect lottery process is executed (step S406). In other words, if the variable display time of the game round determined by the main MPU 52 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach effect, the type of reach effect to be executed is determined in the reach effect lottery process, and the main side MPU 52 If the variable display time of the game round determined in does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach effect, the reach effect lottery process is not executed.

As already explained, in the reach effect, by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, it is possible to cope with the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode. This includes a display state in which a combination of ready-to-win symbols that is likely to result in a combination of jackpot symbols is displayed, and in this state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, with the combination of ready-to-reach symbols displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background image to create a ready-to-reach effect. , includes those in which a combination of ready-to-reach symbols is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface P to perform a ready-to-reach effect. This reach effect is more likely to occur in game rounds that correspond to any jackpot result than in game rounds that correspond to a miss result, and furthermore, the reach effect has a lower occurrence rate in game rounds that correspond to a jackpot result. It is set so that it is more likely to occur.

In the ready-to-win lottery process, the ready-to-win lottery table T2 stored in advance in the sound and light side ROM63 is read out to the sound and light side RAM64. The reach lottery table T2 is prepared in one-to-one correspondence with combinations of variation commands and type commands. Therefore, in the reach effect lottery process, the reach lottery table T2 corresponding to the variation command and type command received this time from the main side MPU 52 is read from the sound-light side ROM 63.

FIG. 11(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the reach lottery table T2. In the reach lottery table T2, the reach lottery results are associated with the numerical range of the reach lottery counter. As a reach lottery result, a first reach effect is executed in the first mode, a second reach effect is executed in the second mode, and a third reach effect is executed in the third mode. The performance is set. In the first reach effect, for example, the individual image for the first reach effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined manner, and in the second reach effect, for example, the individual image for the second reach effect is displayed in a predetermined manner. In the third ready-to-win performance, for example, an individual image for the third ready-to-win performance is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined manner. The reach lottery counter is provided in the sound and light side RAM 64. The reach lottery counter is a loop counter that can take any value from "0" to "239", and is added by "1" periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and when the maximum value is reached, it becomes "0". return. As shown in FIG. 11(b), in the reach lottery table T2, the possible values of the reach lottery counter are assigned to any of the reach lottery results.

Note that the types of ready-to-draw effects to be drawn may differ depending on the type of ready-to-draw table T2. In this case, although the type of reach effect to be drawn is the same between different types of reach lottery tables T2, the selection rate of the reach effect may be different, or between different types of reach lottery tables T2. In some cases, some or all of the types of reach effects that are subject to lottery may be different.

In the reach effect lottery process, the value of the reach lottery counter at that time is acquired, and the acquired value is compared against the reach lottery table T2 read out this time. Then, the reach lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the reach lottery counter is acquired as the result of the current reach effect lottery process.

Returning to the explanation of the table setting process (FIG. 10), if a negative determination is made in step S405 or if the process of step S406 is executed, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S407). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is either a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result, it corresponds to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one active line L1 to L5. The information obtained is determined as the information of the current stoppage result. In this case, the same combination of odd symbols is selected for the 15R probability variable jackpot result, while the same combination of even symbols can be selected for both the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variable jackpot result. Note that the active lines L1 to L5 on which the same symbol combinations are stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the same combination of odd symbols can be selected even if it is a normal jackpot result.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is an explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the active lines L1 to L5, and one active line L1 ~The information corresponding to the stop result in which a specific combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1") is established on L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a winning result, the presence or absence of a reach effect is determined from the contents of the combination of the variation command and the type command. When a reach effect occurs, the combination of the same symbols on all active lines L1 to L5 and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbols are stopped, and the result is a stop result on one or two active lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of reach symbols is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if the reach effect does not occur, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols on all active lines L1 to L5 and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbols are not established, and the reach effect occurs on all active lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of symbols is not established is determined as the information of the current stop result.

After that, a control pattern table setting process is executed (step S408). In the control pattern table setting process, the result of the preview lottery process (step S404), whether or not a reach effect occurs, if the reach effect occurs, the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S406), and the stop symbol determination process ( The control pattern table corresponding to the combination resulting from step S407) is read out from the audio-optical side ROM 63 and stored in the audio-optical side RAM 64.

The control pattern table T3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 12. Incidentally, FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a control pattern table T3 that can be set when a preview effect and a reach effect are executed in a game round that results in a 15R probability-variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 12, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the variable display time of the target game round is set in the control pattern table T3, and information on the content of the task is set in correspondence with each pointer information. and information about the presence or absence of command output are set.

The information on the content of the task is information set to perform light emission control and sound output control corresponding to the current game round, and the light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed in a manner according to the information on the content of the task in each frame. At the same time as the control is performed, the sound output control of the speaker section 45 is also performed. Specifically, regarding the control pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 12, the data at the start of the fluctuation is set in the pointer information of "0", and the data at the start of the preview effect is set in the pointer information of "200". , the data at the end of the preview performance is set in the pointer information of "300", the data at the start of normal reach is set in the pointer information of "400", and the data at the start of super reach is set in the pointer information of "700". The data at the start of the final performance is set in the pointer information "1000", and the data at the start of the standby display is set in the pointer information "1400". Each piece of pointer information corresponds to break timings such as the start of a performance, the changeover of a performance, and the end of a performance. Furthermore, data for enabling light emission control and sound output control between break timings is set in pointer information other than these.

The information on the presence or absence of command output is information indicating whether or not a command is output from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72, and the type of the command. By outputting a command to the display CPU 72 according to the control pattern table T3 in the command selection process (step S302) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the content of the image on the symbol display device 41 and the light emission in the display light emitting unit 44 are It becomes possible to associate the content with the sound output content from the speaker unit 45. That is, depending on the content of the moving image on the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 44 performs a light effect, and the speaker section 45 performs a sound output effect. Specifically, regarding the control pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 12, command data is set for pointer information of "0" where data at the start of variation is set in the task content. Therefore, at the start of variation in game times, display control is started in the display CPU 72 based on commands sent from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72. In addition, in the content of the task, each pointer information is set to the data at the start of the preview effect, the data at the start of normal reach, the data at the start of super reach, the data at the start of confirmed effect, and the data at the start of standby display. Specifically, command data is set for each pointer information of "200", "400", "700", "1000", and "1400". Therefore, within the scope of the performance for a game run that is started upon the occurrence of a predetermined start trigger in which a variation command and a type command are transmitted from the main MPU 52, the performance categories included in the performance for a game run are When the type changes, display control corresponding to the new performance category is started in the display CPU 72 based on a command sent from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72.

Note that the control pattern table T3 includes, in addition to the effects for the game run, effects for the open/close execution mode, and effects for demonstration display in a situation where neither the effect for the game cycle nor the effect for the open/close execution mode is being executed. It is set up to correspond to. Since the control pattern table T3 is set corresponding to various situations in this way, some control pattern table T3 is read out to the audio-optical RAM 64 in a situation where operating power is supplied to the audio-optical side MPU 62. The situation is as follows.

Thereafter, a variable display time determination process is executed (step S409). In this process, the information on the variable display time of the current game round is specified from the content of the variable command currently received from the main side MPU 52, and the information on the specified variable display time is converted into the information shown in FIG. 11(c). As shown in the figure, the variable time counter 64a provided in the sound/light side RAM 64 is set. The variable time counter 64a is a counter for specifying the timing at which the sound/light side MPU 62 ends the variable display of symbols on the symbol display device 41 and starts the final display of the symbols in the current game round. The value set in the variable time counter 64a is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated in the audio/light side MPU 62, that is, each time 4 msec elapses.

The manner in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner when a game repeat effect is executed will be described with reference to explanatory diagrams in FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b). FIG. 13(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the symbols are oscillatedly displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 13(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the symbols are displayed in a fixed manner on the symbol display device 41. FIG.

A game round that results in a complete winning result (a game round that results in a winning result without a reach effect) or a normal reach display (a reach effect is performed using the symbols in symbol rows Z1 to Z3 without the reach effect character being displayed) In the game round in which the display contents (display contents to be performed) are played, the fluctuating display of the symbols of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started in the high-speed fluctuating display which is a low discrimination mode, and then each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a predetermined order. At the same time as switching to a low speed fluctuation display which is a high discrimination mode, a standby display is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the predetermined order. Then, after the state where the standby display is performed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 continues for a predetermined period, each symbol that was on standby display is confirmed to be displayed as the final stop display, and the confirmed display state is confirmed to be displayed. continues over time.

The standby display is, as shown in FIG. 13(a), a standby area SA1 to SA1 that is virtually set so that there are three symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state where a symbol is waiting in SA9. In a state where only the upper symbol row Z1 is on standby display and the scrolling display of symbols continues in the remaining symbol rows Z2 and Z3, one symbol each is on standby in the standby areas SA1 to SA3 corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1. The situation is as follows. In addition, in a state where the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are in standby display and the scroll display of symbols continues in the middle symbol row Z2, the standby areas SA1 to SA3 corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 One symbol is waiting in each of the waiting areas SA7 to SA9 corresponding to. Furthermore, in a state where all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed on standby, one symbol is waiting in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9. In the standby display, the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are not displayed statically, but are displayed in a variable manner within the range of the same standby areas SA1 to SA9. Specifically, each symbol that is subject to standby display can be swung up and down or left and right within a range that includes the stop position within the corresponding standby area SA1 to SA9 and that has the stop position in between. move.

Confirmed display means that, as shown in FIG. 13(b), each symbol that was standby displayed in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is changed to the corresponding standby area SA1 to SA9. This is a display state in which the corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop position of each standby area SA1 to SA9 after the variable display within the range is finished. By performing the confirmation display in this manner, it becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize the result of stopping the symbols on the symbol display device 41 for the current game round.

On the other hand, in the game round in which the super reach display is performed, the variable display of symbols is started, and the symbols of upper symbol row Z1 and lower symbol row Z3, which are some symbol rows, are displayed in each standby area SA1 to SA3, SA7 to SA9. After the reach line is formed and the super reach image is displayed. Thereafter, symbols are displayed on standby for a predetermined period in each standby area on all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 with a combination of jackpot symbols or a combination of out-of-reach symbols formed. Then, the symbols are displayed in a fixed manner, and the displayed state continues for a fixed display time.

Returning to the explanation of the table setting process (FIG. 10), in a situation where the performance execution control is being performed according to the control pattern table set in step S408 (step S410: YES), in step S409, the sound and light side If the value of the variable time counter 64a of the RAM 64 is "0" (step S411: YES), the fixed display time counter 64b provided in the sound/light side RAM 64 indicates the fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec). ) information is set (step S412). The value set in the fixed time counter 64b is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated in the audio/light side MPU 62, that is, each time 4 msec elapses. Further, a final display table that determines the mode of light emission control of the display light emitting section 44 and sound output control of the speaker section 45 at the final display time is read out from the sound/light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound/light side RAM 64 (step S413). Control data for executing light emission control and sound output control for the fixed display time is set in the fixed display table, but in reality, the display light emitting section 44 is turned off and the speaker is turned off during the fixed display time. The section 45 is in a muted state. Thereafter, a final display start command is sent to the display CPU 72 (step S414). As a result, in the display CPU 72, each symbol that is being displayed in standby on the symbol display device 41 is displayed as it is, and the displayed state is maintained for a determined display time (specifically, 0.5 seconds). The display of the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the symbol display device 41 is displayed.

Here, in the main side MPU 52, when the variable display time corresponding to the variable command and the type command has elapsed, the special figure display section 37a responds to the results of the jackpot occurrence lottery process and the distribution determination process of the current game round. The stop result is displayed, and the state is maintained for the final display time. The variable display time measured by the main side MPU 52 is the same as the variable display time set in step S409 in the sound-light side MPU 62, and the fixed display time measured by the main-side MPU 52 is the same as the change display time measured by the sound-light side MPU 62. This is the same as the final display time set in step S412. Therefore, at the timing when the main side MPU 52 confirms that the variable display time has elapsed, the symbol display device 41 starts displaying the final symbol, and at the timing when the main side MPU 52 confirms that the fixed display time has elapsed, the symbol display device 41 starts displaying the symbol. At step 41, the final display of the symbol ends.

Note that in the table setting process, in addition to the above-mentioned processes, other processes are executed in step S415. In other processes, for example, when an opening command is received from the main MPU 52, a control pattern table for executing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is read, and when an ending command is received from the main MPU 52, executes processing to end the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, in a situation where neither the performance for the game round nor the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, a control pattern table for executing the demonstration display performance is read out.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, the sound-light side MPU 62 executes a preview lottery process (step S404) for determining the presence or absence of a preview performance and its contents, and also performs a reach performance lottery for determining the content of a reach performance. Processing (step S406) is executed. As a result, there is no need for the main MPU 52 to determine the presence or absence of a preview performance and its content, and furthermore, there is no need to determine the content of a ready-to-reach performance, reducing the processing load on the main MPU 52 regarding execution control of the performance for the game round. It becomes possible to do so.

However, since both the preview performance and the reach performance are determined by lottery in the sound and light side MPU 62, the variable display time determined by the control pattern table T3 selected by the sound and light side MPU 62 is changed to the main side MPU 52. It is possible that the variable display time may not match the determined variable display time. In other words, if you try to execute the lottery for the preview effect and the lottery for the reach effect while completely matching the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52, the lottery for the preview effect and the reach effect will be executed in accordance with each of the variable display times that can be determined by the main MPU 52. Therefore, it becomes necessary to prepare a plurality of types of preview performances and a plurality of types of ready-to-reach performances at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the types of preview performances and the types of reach performances become enormous. Furthermore, even if multiple types of preview performances and multiple types of ready-to-reach performances are prepared at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 in correspondence with each of the variable display times that can be determined by the main side MPU 52, the main side MPU 52 If an attempt is made to execute a lottery for a preview performance and a lottery for a ready-to-reach performance while completely matching the determined variable display time, restrictions will arise regarding the design of the preview performance and the reach-to-reach performance. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, while allowing the variable display time determined by the control pattern table T3 to be inconsistent with the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52, the pachinko machine 10 waits until the end of the performance of the game round. The configuration is such that display and confirmation display can be performed satisfactorily. The configuration will be explained below.

14(a) and 14(b) show various parts tables T4 to T4 used when setting the control pattern table T3 in the control pattern table setting process (step S408) in the table setting process (FIG. 10). It is an explanatory view for explaining T9.

The parts tables T4 to T9 are tables for generating part or all of one control pattern table T3, and are stored in advance in the audio-light side ROM 63. The parts tables T4 to T9 are classified into multiple table groups, and in some cases, one parts table read from one table group is used as is as one control pattern table T3, and in some cases, parts tables read from one table group are used as one control pattern table T3. One control pattern table T3 may be generated by combining the read parts tables.

The table groups include a table group TG1 for the first period and a table group TG2 for the second period. In the table group TG1 for the first period, when the fluctuating display of symbols is switched from scroll display to standby display in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in the game performance, Parts table corresponding to the period from the start of variable display to the start of standby display in lower symbol row Z3, and in the case where all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are switched to standby display at the same time in the game replay. A parts table corresponding to the entire period of the performance for that game round is included. When a preview performance is executed as a performance for the game round, control data for executing the preview performance is set in parts tables T5 and T6 included in the table group TG1 for the first period. For example, the control data for executing the first preview performance is set in the parts table T5 for the first preview performance, and the control data for executing the second preview performance is set in the parts table T6 for the second preview performance. It is set. In addition, control data corresponding to the period until the standby display starts in the lower symbol row Z3 of the game round when no advance notice effect occurs is set in the parts table T4 for the non-occurrence of advance notice effect. Note that the table group TG1 for the first period also includes parts tables other than the parts tables T4 to T6 exemplified above.

In the table group TG2 for the second period, when the fluctuating display of symbols is switched from scroll display to standby display in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in the game performance, A parts table corresponding to the period from the start of standby display in the lower symbol row Z3 until the end of the standby display in the middle symbol row Z2 is included. When a ready-to-win performance is executed as a performance for the game round, control data for executing the ready-to-win performance is set in parts tables T7 to T9 included in the table group TG2 for the second period. For example, the control data for executing the first reach effect is set in the parts table T7 for the first reach effect, and the control data for executing the second reach effect is set in the parts table T8 for the second reach effect. The control data for executing the third ready-to-reach effect is set in the parts table T9 for the third ready-to-reach effect. Note that the table group TG2 for the second period also includes parts tables other than the parts tables T7 to T9 exemplified above. The parts table also includes a parts table when the reach effect is not executed.

In the control pattern table setting process in step S408 of the table setting process (FIG. 10), one parts table is read out of the table group TG1 for the first period in the audio-optical side ROM 63. In this case, for example, it is a game round that has a losing result and the number of pending information stored in the pending storage area 54b is the upper limit of 4 pieces, and the current game round is started. If the variable display time of the game round corresponds to the variable display time in which switching from the scroll display of the variable display of symbols to the standby display occurs simultaneously in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the table for the first period. One parts table read from group TG1 is directly set as control pattern table T3.

On the other hand, if the variable display time of the current game round corresponds to the variable display time in which switching from the variable display of symbols to the standby display occurs sequentially in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the advance lottery process (step One parts table corresponding to the result of step S404) is read out from the table group TG1 for the first period in the sound-light side ROM 63. In addition, in a game round in which a reach effect does not occur, one parts table corresponding to the current variable display time is read out from the table group TG2 for the second period in the sound-light side ROM 63, and in a game time in which a reach effect occurs. If so, one parts table corresponding to the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S405) is read out from the table group TG2 for the second period in the sound-light side ROM63. Then, by combining the parts table read from the table group TG1 for the first period and the parts table read from the table group TG2 for the second period, one control pattern table T3 is set.

In a situation where one parts table is directly set as one control pattern table T3, the type of control pattern table T3 corresponding to one variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 is uniquely determined. On the other hand, in a situation where one control pattern table T3 is created by combining a plurality of parts tables, there are multiple types of control pattern tables T3 corresponding to one variable display time determined by the main MPU 52. It will exist. For example, the advance notice lottery process (step S404) is executed using the advance notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11(a), and the reach effect lottery process is executed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 11(b). In the situation where (step S406) is executed, from the table group TG1 for the first period, parts table T4 for non-occurrence of preview effects, parts table T5 for first preview effects, and parts table for second preview effects. One of the tables T6 is selected, and the parts table T7 for the first reach effect, the parts table T8 for the second reach effect, and the parts table T9 for the third reach effect are selected from the table group TG2 for the second period. One is selected.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable display time determined by the parts tables T4 to T9. FIG. 15(a1) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T4 for non-occurrence of preview effects, and FIG. 15(a2) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first preview effect. (a3) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T6 for the second preview effect. In addition, FIG. 15 (b1) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T7 for the first reach effect, and FIG. 15 (b2) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second reach effect, FIG. 15(b3) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T9 for the third reach effect.

As shown in FIGS. 15(a1) to 15(a3), the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first preview effect is longer than the variable display time determined by the parts table T4 for the non-occurrence of the preview effect. (Ta1) minutes longer, and the variable display time determined by the parts table T6 for the second preview performance is longer by the time (Ta2-Ta1) than the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first preview performance. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 15(b1) to 15(b3), the variable display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second reach effect is longer than the variable display time determined by the parts table T7 for the first reach effect. is also longer by time (Tb1), and the variable display time determined by the parts table T9 for the third ready-to-reach effect is longer by the time (Tb2-Tb1) than the variable display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second ready-to-reach effect.

In the above configuration, the advance notice lottery process (step S404) is executed using the advance notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11(a), and the reach effect lottery is executed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 11(b). When the process (step S406) is executed, the variable display time determined by the control pattern table will vary depending on the combination of parts tables T4 to T9 to be used. Specifically, when the combination of the parts table T4 for non-occurrence of preview effects and the parts table T7 for the first ready-to-reach effect is selected, the variable display time becomes the shortest, and the combination of the parts table T6 for the second preview effects and the parts table T7 for the first reach effect is selected. The variable display time is the longest when the combination with the parts table T9 for the third reach effect is selected, but the difference between these variable display times is (Ta2+Tb2). Therefore, for one variation command transmitted from the main MPU 52, the variation display time determined by the audio/light MPU 62 may be different.

However, if the longest variable display time among the variable display times that can be selected for one variable command is less than or equal to the variable display time corresponding to the variable command, that is, the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52. The advance notice lottery table T1 and the reach lottery table T2 are set to be selected for the combination of the variation command and the type command. In other words, no matter which preview lottery table T1 is used or which reach lottery table T2 is used, it corresponds to the control pattern table created by combining a plurality of parts tables. The variable display time is less than or equal to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52.

In a configuration in which the longest variable display time among the variable display times that can be selected for one variable command is less than or equal to the variable display time determined by the main side MPU 52, the variable time counter in the audio-light side RAM 64 The control corresponding to the final pointer set in the control pattern table ends before the variable display time measured using 64a elapses. On the other hand, if the control corresponding to the final pointer ends before the variable display time measured using the variable time counter 64a has elapsed, the value of the pointer to be controlled is returned. The configuration is such that the standby display continues. The process for returning the value of the pointer will be explained. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process executed in step S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

In the pointer update process, the value of the pointer information to be referenced among the pointer information used to specify the control data to be used in the currently set control table (for example, control pattern table) is added by 1. (Step S501). As a result, in the command selection process (step S302), light emission control process (step S303), and sound output control process (step S304) in the next process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the value of the pointer information updated this time is used. Corresponding control data are used.

After that, on the condition that the value of the pointer information to be referenced is larger than the final pointer value defined in the control table, and furthermore, the currently set control table is the control pattern table for the game round. (Step S502 and Step S503: YES), pointer information correction processing is executed (Step S504). In the pointer information correction process, the control data corresponding to the pointer information corresponding to the timing at which the standby display starts is used in the command selection process (step S302) and the light emission control process (step S302) in the next processing time of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). The value of the pointer information to be referenced is corrected so that it is used in step S303) and the sound output control process (step S304). As a result, even if the control corresponding to the final pointer ends before the variable display time measured using the variable time counter 64a has elapsed, the standby display continues until the variable display time has elapsed. That will happen.

Furthermore, when the pointer information correction process (step S504) is executed, a standby extension command is sent to the display CPU 72 (step S505). When the display CPU 72 receives the standby extension command, it sets a data table to continue the standby display, and causes the symbol display device 41 to continue the standby display.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 17, a description will be given of how the performance for the game round is executed. FIG. 17(a) shows the execution period of the game round, and FIG. 17(b1) and FIG. 17(b2) show the performance execution control using the parts table read from the table group TG1 for the first period. 17(c1) and FIG. 17(c2) are periods in which execution control of the effect is performed using the parts table read from the table group TG2 for the second period. 17(d1) and FIG. 17(d2) show a standby display period, and FIG. 17(e1) and FIG. 17(e2) show a final display period. Note that in FIGS. 17(b1), 17(c1), 17(d1), and 17(e1), the advance notice lottery process (step S404) is performed using the advance notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11(a). When the reach effect lottery process (step S406) is executed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 11(b), the control pattern table (hereinafter referred to as the shortest corresponding table 17(b2), FIG. 17(c2), FIG. 17(d2), and FIG. 17(e2) use the advance notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11(a). Control that results in the longest variable display time when the advance notice lottery process (step S404) is executed and the reach effect lottery process (step S406) is executed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 11(b). A case is shown in which a pattern table (hereinafter referred to as the longest correspondence table) is used.

Regardless of whether the shortest correspondence table is used or the longest correspondence table is used, at the timing t1, a game round is started as shown in FIG. ) and the first period starts as shown in FIG. 17(b2). After that, when the shortest correspondence table is used, the first period ends and the second period starts at timing t11 as shown in FIG. 17(b1) and FIG. 17(c1), and the longest correspondence table is used. When used, the first period ends and the second period starts at timing t21 as shown in FIGS. 17(b2) and 17(c2).

After that, when the shortest correspondence table is used, the second period ends and the standby display period starts at timing t12 as shown in FIGS. 17(c1) and 17(d1), and the longest correspondence table is used. When used, the second period ends and a standby display period starts at timing t22, as shown in FIGS. 17(c2) and 17(d2). In this case, in a situation where the shortest correspondence table is used, the end timing of the standby display specified in the control pattern table is earlier than the elapsed timing of the variable display time, but the pointer update process (Figure 16) By executing pointer information correction processing (step S504), the standby display continues.

Thereafter, regardless of whether the shortest correspondence table is used or the longest correspondence table is used, the fluctuation measured using the fluctuation time counter 64a of the sound-light side RAM 64 at timing t2. Display time elapses. Therefore, if the shortest correspondence table is used, the standby display period ends and the final display period starts as shown in FIG. 17(d1) and FIG. 17(e1), and if the longest correspondence table is used, the standby display period ends and the fixed display period begins. If so, the standby display period ends and the final display period begins, as shown in FIG. 17(d2) and FIG. 17(e2). Then, when the final display time elapses at timing t3, the final display period ends as shown in FIGS. 17(e1) and 17(e2), and the current game round ends as shown in FIG. 17(a). ends.

As described above, the light-side MPU 62 executes the advance notice lottery process (step S404) for determining the presence or absence and content of the advance notice performance, and also executes the ready-to-reach performance lottery process (step S406) for determining the content of the ready-to-reach performance. executed. As a result, there is no need for the main MPU 52 to determine the presence or absence of a preview performance and its content, and furthermore, there is no need to determine the content of a reach performance, reducing the processing load on the main MPU 52 regarding execution control of the performance for the game round. is planned. Furthermore, it is possible to diversify the performance modes set for one combination of the variation command and the type command transmitted from the main MPU 52.

Even if the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, the variation display time determined by the control pattern table can be different, so that it corresponds to the result of the advance notice lottery process and the result of the reach effect lottery process. A control pattern table is set. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the main MPU 52 and diversify the performance modes while allowing the design of the advance notice performance and the reach performance to be carried out suitably.

Even in a configuration in which the variable display times determined by the control pattern tables selected by the same variable command as a trigger can differ, the symbol display device At 41, the mode of variable display of symbols is switched from standby display to final display. As a result, even if the variable display time determined by the control pattern table is configured to be different, the performance of the game round on the symbol display device 41 is ended at the timing corresponding to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52. becomes possible.

In a configuration where the control pattern tables to be used may differ even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, the longest variation display among the variation display times determined by those control pattern tables. The time corresponds to less than the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52. If a control pattern table corresponding to a variable display time shorter than the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 is to be used, the control pattern table will be used until the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 has elapsed. , the variable display mode of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 is maintained in the standby display. As a result, no matter which control pattern table is used, the symbol display device 41 will switch from the standby display to the final display at the end of a game round, and for example, a predetermined effect will be displayed. It is possible to prevent occurrence of an event in which the final display is suddenly started in the middle of the game, or an event in which the final display of a symbol continues for a period longer than the normal final display period.

A variable time counter 64a is provided in the sound/light side RAM 64, and the variable display time corresponding to the variable command received from the main side MPU 52 is set in the variable time counter 64a, and the variable time counter 64a is set in the variable time counter 64a. When the measured variable display time has elapsed, the variable display mode of symbols on the symbol display device 41 is switched to fixed display. As a result, in a configuration where the variable display times determined by the control pattern table may differ even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, the command indicating the start timing of the final display can be sent to the main MPU 52. It becomes possible to start the final display at the timing corresponding to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 without transmitting the data from the main MPU 52.

Note that the following configuration may be applied as a configuration in which the variable display times determined by the control pattern table may differ even when the same variable command is received from the main MPU 52.

・The various parts tables T7 to T9 included in the table group TG2 for the second period are controlled for a time longer than the longest variable display time assumed as the situation in which these parts tables T7 to T9 are used. A configuration may also be adopted in which data is set and control data for executing a standby display is set as control data corresponding to a period subsequent to the end timing. In this case, there is no need to perform correction processing on the control pattern table to extend the execution period of the standby display. However, it is necessary to end the use of the control pattern table at the timing when the variable display time of the game round has elapsed.

- A control pattern table for controlling the execution of effects after the standby display starts is provided separately from a control pattern table for controlling the execution of effects before the start of the standby display, and the standby display starts. In this case, the configuration may be such that the state is switched to a state in which the execution of the performance is controlled based on the control pattern table for standby display. In this case, by configuring the same control pattern table for standby display to be used in any game round, it becomes possible to use the control pattern table for standby display in a variety of situations. In this configuration, the control pattern table for standby display is set as a table for displaying standby over a predetermined period, and if it is necessary to display standby for a period longer than the predetermined period, In this case, a control pattern table for standby display may be used in a loop. In addition, the control pattern table for standby display is set as a table that enables the standby display to be executed for longer than the longest period expected as the period in which the standby display is executed, and the variable display time of the game play is If the time has elapsed, the use of the control pattern table for standby display may be terminated midway.

- The measurement of the time to start the final display is not limited to the configuration in which the sound-light side MPU 62 executes the measurement, and when the timing to start the final display is reached, the measurement is performed from the main-side MPU 52 to the sound-light side MPU 62. A configuration may also be adopted in which a command corresponding to the command is transmitted, and when the command is received by the sound-light MPU 62, a process for starting confirmation display is executed in the sound-light MPU 62.

- In a configuration where the control pattern tables to be used may differ even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, the longest variation among the variation display times determined by those control pattern tables. Instead of a configuration in which the display time is less than or equal to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52, the longest variable display time among the variable display times determined by the control pattern table is determined by the main MPU 52. A configuration may be adopted in which the time can be longer than the display time. In this case, it becomes necessary to end the performance in the middle of the execution of the performance for the game round. Therefore, in such a case, a performance for forced termination will occur, and in the performance for forced termination, contents corresponding to the jackpot occurrence lottery and type lottery results of the corresponding game, more specifically, the content corresponding to the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery and type lottery for the corresponding game round will be generated. It may be configured such that content corresponding to the determination result of the stop symbol determination process (step S407) in the table setting process (FIG. 10) is notified. More specifically, even if the symbol display device 41 is in the middle of executing a production such as a ready-to-reach production corresponding to a period before the standby display, the game round will be displayed at the timing when the variable display time has elapsed. The combination of symbols determined as a stop result may be suddenly stopped and displayed, and the final display may be performed in a state where the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.

<Processing configuration of display CPU 72>
Next, the processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be explained. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process that is repeatedly activated by the display CPU 72 at a predetermined period, specifically, at a 20 msec period.

Note that when the VDP 76 outputs an image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 41, it starts outputting the image signal from a dot in the upper left corner of the display surface P, and then outputs the image signal on a horizontal line that includes the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially outputted to the lined dots, and image signals are outputted sequentially from the top to the right dots for each horizontal line. Finally, an image signal is outputted to the dot at the lower right corner of the display surface P. In this case, the VDP 76 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 72 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot, thereby making the display CPU 72 recognize that the update of one frame of the image is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec, which is the same as the update cycle of one frame's worth of images. In this respect, the V interrupt processing can also be considered to be activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V-interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has passed since the previous V-interrupt process was activated, a new V-interrupt process is activated.

In the V interrupt processing, first, command analysis processing is executed (step S601). Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 73 is analyzed. Here, when the display CPU 72 receives a strobe signal from the audio/light MPU 62, it executes the command interrupt process regardless of what process is being executed at that time. In the command interrupt processing, a command received at the input port 77 is transferred to a command buffer provided in the work RAM 73.

Thereafter, on the condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving a new command (step S602: YES), command correspondence processing is executed (step S603). In the command correspondence process, an execution target table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 74. The execution target table defines the processing necessary to display one frame of image at each image update timing when displaying a video corresponding to a received command on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. This is a group of information.

The commands that the display CPU 72 receives from the sound and light side MPU 62 include the already explained command at the start of variation, command at the start of preview performance, command at the start of normal reach, command at the start of super reach, command at the start of confirmed performance, There are commands for starting standby display, standby extension commands, and fixed display start commands. When these commands are received, an execution target table necessary for executing, on the symbol display device 41, the performance for the game round corresponding to each of these commands is read out.

If a negative determination is made in step S602 or if the process in step S603 is executed, task processing is executed (step S604). In task processing, by referring to the control data of the current processing time in the execution target table that is set as the target of use, it instructs the VDP 76 to draw in order to display one frame of image corresponding to the current update timing. Configure the various data necessary to perform the operations. Specifically, the various data include address information of an area where image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 74, address information of an area to which image data to be controlled is transferred in the VRAM 75, and image data to be controlled. Information on the target frame regions 82a, 82b for which drawing data should be created, information on coordinates when writing the image data to be controlled in the creation target frame regions 82a, 82b, information on the scale when writing the image data, There is also information on uniform α value (semi-transparent value) when writing the image data.

After that, a drawing list output process is executed (step S605). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying one frame of images corresponding to the update timing of the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is sent to the VDP 76. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately previous task process is to be drawn, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 76 creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 according to this drawing list. The processing in this VDP 76 will be explained in detail later.

The task processing in step S604 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 19. First, a setting process for starting control is executed (step S701). In the setting process for starting control, it is determined based on the currently set execution target table whether or not there is an individual image to be started as a control target in the current processing cycle. If it exists, the work RAM 73 is searched for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations when controlling the individual image, and it corresponds one-to-one to the individual image recognized as the control start target. Allocate free buffer space. Further, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved free buffer areas, and parameter information for starting control according to the individual image is set for the initialized free buffer areas.

Thereafter, the control update target is determined (step S702). This control update target is an individual image for which control start processing has been completed and that is likely to be included in one frame of images after the current processing time.

Thereafter, background arithmetic processing is executed (step S703). In the background arithmetic processing, the current control update target is determined from among the backmost still image and background sprite that constitute the background image. Furthermore, for the grasped control update target, various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list, such as coordinates on a virtual two-dimensional plane, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value and α data specification, etc., is calculated and derived. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information into an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to each individual image.

After that, arithmetic processing for presentation is executed (step S704). In the performance calculation processing, the current control update target is grasped among the performance sprites that constitute the performance images to be displayed in various performances such as reach performance, preview performance, and jackpot performance. Furthermore, the various parameter information described above is derived for the identified control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information into an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to each individual image.

Thereafter, symbol calculation processing is executed (step S705). In the symbol arithmetic processing, among the symbols that are subject to variable display in each game, the current control update target is grasped. Furthermore, the various parameter information described above is derived for the identified control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information into an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to each individual image.

Thereafter, a process of grasping the drawing instruction target is executed (step S706). In the process of grasping the drawing instruction target, one frame of the image corresponding to the current drawing data creation instruction is selected from among the individual images that have become control update targets through the calculation processes in steps S703, S704, and S705. Execute processing to understand the individual images included. This understanding is performed by performing predetermined calculations with reference to information on coordinates, rotation angles, and scales of various individual images. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this way, the individual images specified in the drawing list are not all the individual images for which control has started, but only the individual images to be displayed, thereby eliminating the need to select the individual images to be displayed in the VDP 76. Moreover, even if no sorting is performed, there is no need to wastefully perform drawing processing on individual images that are not to be displayed. This reduces the processing load on the VDP 76.

<Basic processing in VDP76>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 76 will be explained.

In the VDP 76, a process of setting the value of the register 92 based on a command sent from the display CPU 72, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list sent from the display CPU 72, Then, a process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b is executed.

Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I/F 95 for the display CPU 72. Further, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly activated by the control unit 91 at a predetermined period (for example, 1 msec). Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 at a predetermined timing to start outputting the image signal.

The process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail below. Prior to explaining the processing, the contents of the drawing list sent from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be explained. FIGS. 20(a) to 20(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. The header information includes information indicating which of the first frame area 82a and second frame area 82b to draw the drawing data for displaying one frame of image corresponding to the drawing list in the target buffer. Information is set. Further, the header information includes information about whether or not decoding is specified and the address of the moving image data to be decoded.

In addition to the above header information, the drawing list contains multiple types of image data used to display one frame of image, and also includes information on the drawing order of each image data and information on the drawing order of each image data. Parameter information is set. Specifically, information on the drawing order is set to be numerical information of serial numbers, and information on image data to be used is set in one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information. Further, parameter information is set in one-to-one correspondence with information of each image data.

The drawing order is set such that in one frame of images, the individual images that are desired to be displayed at the back of the display surface P are drawn first. Note that the individual image refers to one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as pattern sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 20A, background data is set as the first object to be drawn, sprite data A is set as second, sprite data B is third, and so on. Therefore, background data is first written to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn, then sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and then sprite data B is written. In addition, in the image for one frame, each individual image is displayed in the order of background image → effect image → pattern so that it is on the near side.

A plurality of types of parameters are set in the parameter information P(1), P(2), P(3), . . . . Specifically, regarding the parameter P(1) of the background data, as shown in FIG. address information, coordinate information indicating the position on the virtual two-dimensional plane when writing background data, rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the virtual two-dimensional plane when writing background data, and background data. With respect to the size set as the initial state, scale information indicating the magnification when writing to the frame areas 82a and 82b, and a uniform α value indicating the overall transparency information (or transparency information) when writing background data. information, and information on α data designation indicating whether or not α data is applied and to which it is applied are set. The types of parameters described above are the same for sprite data A, as shown in FIG. 20(c).

The coordinate information is not set individually for all pixels constituting the image data, but one coordinate information is set for one piece of image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is specified. VDP76 can recognize that the specified coordinate information is the center pixel of the image data, and when arranging the image data, make sure that the center pixel is on the specified coordinates. . This allows the display CPU 72 to reduce the information capacity (ie, data amount) of information on coordinates to be specified for one piece of image data. Further, since it is not necessary for the display CPU 72 or VDP 76 to be able to recognize the coordinates of all pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to one pixel at the center, and may be a pixel at a corner such as the upper left or upper right, for example. Since sprite data and still image data are basically defined as rectangular, by using corner pixels as reference pixels, it becomes easier for the display CPU 72 and VDP 76 to recognize the reference pixels.

Further, the uniform α value refers to transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data. The α data can have different transparency information for each pixel within the same background data or the same sprite data. This α data has a larger data capacity than program data for uniformly setting α values.

Because the α value and α data are set uniformly as described above, it is not necessary to finely control the transparency of background data and sprite data on a pixel-by-pixel basis, but rather to control the transparency uniformly for all pixels. By being able to respond uniformly using α values, the required data capacity can be reduced, and by applying α data, it is also possible to finely control transparency on a pixel-by-pixel basis.

The drawing process in the VDP 76 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether the creation of the drawing data specified in the drawing list that has already been received has been completed. If the creation of drawing data has been completed, it is determined in step S802 whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72. If a new drawing list has been received, in step S803, processing corresponding to the time of reception is executed.

In the processing at the time of reception, it is determined from the information of the target buffer included in the drawing list which frame areas 82a and 82b should be drawn with one frame of drawing data corresponding to the currently received drawing list.

In the following step S804, content understanding processing is executed. In the content understanding process, image data set as a read target in the drawing list is read from the memory module 74 and written to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. In addition, in the content grasping process, the type of image data that is initially set as a drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameter information of the image data is grasped. In the writing process, based on the grasping result of the content grasping process in step S804, the image data to be drawn this time is written into the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation targets.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the drawing data specified by the drawing list that has already been received is in the process of being created, then in step S806 the drawing list counter is updated. As a result, the drawing target is switched to the image data of the next drawing order. Then, the processes of steps S804 and S805 described above are executed for the switched image data. That is, by executing the drawing process multiple times, drawing data for one frame of the image specified by one drawing list is created.

Note that the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which only one piece of image data is processed in one drawing process, and a configuration in which multiple pieces of image data are processed in one drawing process is also possible. The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each processing time, and a configuration in which a different number of image data is processed in each processing time of the drawing process may be adopted.

If a negative determination is made in step S802, or after executing the process in step S805, it is determined in step S807 whether or not the display circuit 94 has completed outputting the image signal for one frame. If the process has not been completed, the main drawing process is immediately terminated; if it has been completed, a V interrupt signal is output to the display CPU 72 in step S808, and then the main drawing process is terminated.

The creation of the drawing data for one frame is completed within a period of 20 msec. In addition, an image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the pattern display device 41 based on the created drawing data, but since the double buffer method is adopted as already explained, the output of the image signal is This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data corresponding to an update timing one frame later than the corresponding frame. Note that the display circuit 94 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame areas 82a and 82b to be referenced each time the output of one frame's worth of image signals is completed. The frame areas 82a and 82b, which are the drawing targets of the drawing data, are regulated so that they do not become output targets for outputting image signals.

<Configuration for sharing execution target table>
Next, a configuration for sharing the execution target table will be described.

In this pachinko machine 10, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in symbol rows Z1 to Z3 set on the symbol display device 41 in each game round (see FIG. 4(a)). The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set in multiple rows such as an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and there are no numbers between each main symbol. Sub-designs are arranged one by one. When a game round is started, the display mode of the symbols that were finally stopped and displayed in the previous game round is scrolled in a predetermined direction according to the arrangement order of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. A variable display of symbols is performed. Thereafter, the variable display of symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped. In this case, since the display mode of the symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in each game round may be different, the types of symbols displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 when the game round is started may be different. .

An example of a pattern variation display mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 22. FIG. 22(a) shows the execution period of the game, FIG. 22(b) shows the acceleration period in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and FIG. 22(c) shows the high speed period in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. FIG. 22(d) shows the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1, FIG. 22(e) shows the low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3, and FIG. 22(f) shows the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2.

At timing t1, a game round is started as shown in FIG. 22(a). At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 22(b), a moving image display is performed in which the fluctuating display speed of symbols gradually becomes faster in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The fluctuating display speed in this case is a fluctuating display speed that makes it possible or easy to identify the types of symbols displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Due to the existence of the acceleration period in this way, it is possible to set the start mode in a fixed manner when the fluctuating display of symbols starts in each game round, so that it is possible for the player to know that the game round has started. becomes easier to recognize.

After that, at timing t2, the acceleration period ends as shown in FIG. 22(b), and a high-speed period begins in which variable display is performed at high speed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as shown in FIG. 22(c). . In the high speed period, the fluctuating display speed of the symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 becomes such a fluctuating display speed that it is impossible or difficult to identify the type of symbol. The types of symbols displayed on the display surface P during the high speed period are adjusted. As a result, in a configuration where the stop result of the current game round is determined regardless of the type of symbols displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 at the start of the current game round, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is It is possible to adjust the types of symbols to be displayed on standby and statically in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 while not giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Thereafter, at timing t3, the variable display speed of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from high speed to low speed, as shown in FIG. 22(d). When low-speed display is performed, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner at a variable display speed that makes it possible or easy to identify the type of symbol. In this case, low-speed display is performed only in the upper symbol row Z1, and high-speed display is continued in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3.

Thereafter, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 22(d), the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, and in the upper symbol row Z1, the scrolling display of the symbols ends and the standby display starts. Further, at the timing t4, the variable display speed of symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from high speed to low speed, as shown in FIG. 22(e). In this case, low-speed display is performed only in the lower symbol row Z3, high-speed display continues in the middle symbol row Z2, and standby display continues in the upper symbol row Z1.

Thereafter, as shown in the timing chart 22(e) at t5, the low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3 ends, and in the lower symbol row Z3, the scrolling display of the symbols ends and the standby display starts. Further, at the timing t5, the variable display speed of symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from high speed to low speed as shown in FIG. 22(f). In this case, low-speed display is performed only in the middle symbol row Z2, and standby display is continued in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3.

After that, at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 22(f), the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2 ends, and in the middle symbol row Z2, the scrolling display of the symbols ends and the standby display starts. In this case, all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 will be in a standby display state, and then all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 will be statically displayed.

When displaying symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a variable manner, an execution target table stored in the memory module 74 in advance is read out, and the type of symbol to be displayed on the display surface P is determined by the display CPU 72 according to the execution target table. At the same time, various parameters such as the arrangement position of the symbol to be displayed are determined. Here, the types of symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 at the start of each game round, and the types of symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 at the end of each game round are as follows. It may differ from game to game. For example, the fluctuating display of symbols may start from a stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23(a), or the fluctuating display of symbols may start from a stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23(b). There is also. Further, for example, a game round may end in a stopped display mode as shown in FIG. 23(a), or a game round may end in a stopped display mode as shown in FIG. 23(b). In this case, if you try to prepare an execution target table in advance according to each pattern, it is necessary to prepare an execution target table corresponding to each of the modes that can be taken as the stop display mode at the start of the variable display of the game time. At the same time, it becomes necessary to prepare an execution target table corresponding to each possible stop display mode at the end of a game round. In this case, the number of types of execution target tables becomes extremely large, and the storage capacity required to store the execution target tables in advance increases.

On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, a common execution target table is used regardless of the stop display mode at the start of the variable display of a game round, and a common execution target table is used regardless of the stop display mode at the end of the game round. The configuration uses an execution target table. The common execution target table will be explained.

The execution target table is provided corresponding to each of the acceleration period, high speed period, and low speed period. In this case, an execution target table is provided so that the acceleration period is common to all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. On the other hand, the high speed period and the low speed period are not provided in common between the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, but an execution target table is provided corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In addition, the execution target table is based on whether or not a reach effect occurs for the acceleration period of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the high speed period of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the low speed period of upper symbol row Z1, and the low speed period of lower symbol row Z3. Although it is used regardless, the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2 is used only when the reach effect does not occur. When a ready-to-win effect occurs, a common execution target table is not used for the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2, but a dedicated execution target table corresponding to each ready-to-reach effect is used.

The execution target table is stored in the memory module 74 in advance. Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 24(a), the memory module 74 stores an execution target table in advance for controlling the variable display of symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the acceleration period. A period storage area 101, a first high speed period storage area 102 in which an execution target table for controlling the fluctuating display of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 during the high speed period is stored in advance, and a storage area 102 for the upper symbol row Z1 in the low speed period. A first low speed period storage area 103 in which an execution target table for controlling the fluctuating display of symbols is stored in advance, and an execution target table for controlling the fluctuating display of the symbols in the medium symbol row Z2 in the high speed period are stored in advance. the second high-speed period storage area 104, which stores the execution target table for controlling the fluctuating display of symbols in the medium symbol row Z2 during the low-speed period; A third high-speed period storage area 106 in which an execution target table for controlling the fluctuating display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is stored in advance, and an execution target table for controlling the fluctuating display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 in the low-speed period A third low-speed period storage area 107 in which a target table is stored in advance is provided.

The acceleration period, high speed period, and low speed period are not constant in relation to the variable display time of the game round, and there are multiple types of periods, each having a length or a short length. In this case, there is only one type of execution target table for the acceleration period stored in the acceleration period storage area 101, and the acceleration period that can be controlled by the execution target table for the acceleration period is the variable display time of the game. The period is longer than the longest acceleration period among multiple types of acceleration periods determined in relation to the above. As a result, no matter which type of acceleration period is selected in relation to the variable display time of the game round, it is possible to use the execution target table for that one type of acceleration period.

Only one type of execution target table for the high speed period is stored in each of the first high speed period storage area 102, the second high speed period storage area 104, and the third high speed period storage area 106. The high-speed period that can be controlled by the execution target table for the first high-speed period stored in the storage area 102 for the first high-speed period includes multiple types of upper symbol row Z1 determined in relation to the variable display time of the game. The period is longer than the longest high speed period among the high speed periods. In addition, the high speed period that can be controlled by the execution target table for the second high speed period stored in the storage area 104 for the second high speed period is a plurality of medium symbol rows Z2 determined in relation to the variable display time of the game time. The period is longer than the longest high speed period among the types of high speed periods. In addition, the high speed period that can be controlled by the execution target table for the third high speed period stored in the storage area 106 for the third high speed period is a plurality of lower symbol rows Z3 determined in relation to the variable display time of the game time. The period is longer than the longest high speed period among the types of high speed periods. As a result, no matter which type of high-speed period is selected in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in relation to the variable display time of the game, only one type of high-speed period execution is executed for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It becomes possible to use the target table.

A plurality of types of execution target tables for the low-speed period are stored in each of the first low-speed period storage area 103, the second low-speed period storage area 105, and the third low-speed period storage area 107. In other words, in the first low-speed period storage area 103, a plurality of types of execution target tables for the first low-speed period are stored in one-to-one correspondence with the types of low-speed periods in the upper symbol row Z1, and the second low-speed period In the period storage area 105, a plurality of types of execution target tables for the second low speed period are stored in one-to-one correspondence with the types of the low speed period of the medium symbol row Z2, and in the storage area 107 for the third low speed period. A plurality of types of execution target tables for the third low speed period are stored in a one-to-one correspondence with the types of low speed periods in the lower symbol row Z3. In this way, by preparing an execution target table for each type of low-speed period, it is possible to correspond to each low-speed period by controlling the fluctuating display of symbols using the execution target table for the low-speed period. It becomes possible to execute the standby display of the symbols and the static display of the symbols at the timing when the symbol is displayed.

FIG. 25(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period stored in advance in the storage area 101 for the acceleration period, and FIG. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period stored in advance in the storage area 103 for the first low speed period. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining target table T12. Note that although the execution target table for the second high-speed period and the execution target table for the third high-speed period are different from the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period in the maximum value of pointer information, other points are the same as the execution target table for the first high-speed period. This is the same as the execution target table T11 for the high speed period. In addition, an execution target table of a different type from the first low-speed period execution target table T12 stored in the first low-speed period storage area 103, an execution target table for the second low-speed period, and an execution target table for the third low-speed period The execution target table is different from the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period in the maximum value of pointer information, but is otherwise the same as the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period.

As shown in FIGS. 25(a), 25(b), and 26, pointer information corresponding to the update timing of one frame of images is set in each execution target table T10 to T12, and each pointer information corresponds to the update timing of one frame of image. Corresponding to the information, a display pattern adjustment area and task content information are set.

Information for specifying the type of symbol to be displayed is set in the display symbol adjustment area. Specifically, information corresponding to one symbol in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is set in the display symbol adjustment area. Here, three symbols are displayed at the same time in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, but the information set in the display symbol adjustment area is based on the type of symbol that exists at the beginning in the moving direction of the symbol. It corresponds to the information of In addition, as already explained, the total number of symbols arranged in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is different. Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have a total of 18 main symbols and secondary symbols. In contrast, in the middle symbol row Z2, 20 symbols including the main symbol and the sub symbol are arrayed. Therefore, when the execution target table is used to control the fluctuating display of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the display symbol adjustment area corresponds to any one of "1" to "18". When the information to be executed is set and the execution target table is used to control the fluctuating display of symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, the display symbol adjustment area corresponds to one of "1" to "20". Information is set.

For example, if "1" is set in the display symbol adjustment area corresponding to predetermined pointer information in the execution target table for controlling the fluctuating display of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the predetermined pointer information In the frame corresponding to , the main symbol "1", the sub-symbols between "1" and "9", and the main symbol "9" are displayed. In addition, if "2" is set in the display symbol adjustment area, the sub symbol between "1" and "9" and the main symbol of "9" in the frame corresponding to the predetermined pointer information. , and the sub-symbols between "9" and "8" are displayed.

In the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols are scroll-displayed as described above, but the types of symbols to be scroll-displayed are the same over a plurality of frames. Therefore, the same symbol information is set in the display symbol adjustment area over a plurality of consecutive pieces of pointer information. Then, by changing the information set in the display symbol adjustment area as the value of the pointer information increases, the types of symbols to be displayed in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed.

The information on the contents of the task includes information on coordinates indicating the arrangement position of the pattern to be used in each frame (that is, the drawing position in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be written in the frame buffer 82) and the size of the pattern to be used. Parameter information such as scale information indicating . In this case, the coordinate information is set with information that determines the placement positions of the three symbols to be displayed in the corresponding frame. Therefore, it is possible to specify the information on the coordinates corresponding to each of the three symbols to be displayed, which are specified from the information on the display symbol adjustment area, from the information on the content of the task. For example, if "1" is set in the display symbol adjustment area of consecutive multiple pointer information in the execution target table applied to the upper symbol row Z1, information on the content of the task corresponding to these multiple pointer information , the placement positions of the main symbol "1", the sub-symbols between "1" and "9", and the main symbol "9" in the corresponding symbol row gradually change in the direction of scroll display. Coordinate information like this is set.

In a configuration where multiple symbols corresponding to the information set in the display symbol adjustment area are displayed as described above, and parameter information for these multiple symbols is set in the task content information, the display symbol adjustment area is an area that can be rewritten under the control of the display CPU 72 after the execution target table is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73. This rewriting is performed at the timing of starting the use of the corresponding execution target table, depending on the type of symbol to be displayed in the corresponding symbol array Z1 to Z3. Furthermore, as the symbols are scrolled, the types of the three symbols to be displayed in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3 change over time. The switching timing of the types of the three symbols to be displayed is predetermined in each of the execution target tables T10 to T12. Therefore, when rewriting the display symbol adjustment area, pointer information corresponding to the next switching timing from the first pointer information is set as one pointer group, and the pointer information included between the first switching timing and the next switching timing is set as one pointer group. When pointer information is one pointer group, the same symbol information is set in the display symbol adjustment area corresponding to each pointer information included in one pointer group, and different symbol information is set between different pointer groups. Information is set.

As already explained, information for specifying the type of symbol to be displayed is set in the display symbol adjustment area in each of the execution target tables T10 to T12. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 24(b), the work RAM 73 is provided with a first adjustment counter 111, a second adjustment counter 112, and a third adjustment counter 113 as an area for specifying the area. There is. The first adjustment counter 111 corresponds to the upper symbol row Z1, the second adjustment counter 112 corresponds to the middle symbol row Z2, and the third adjustment counter 113 corresponds to the lower symbol row Z3. .

In each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113, information about the type of symbol existing at the beginning when the symbol moves from right to left in the corresponding symbol row Z1 to Z3 is set. The display CPU 72 changes the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 corresponding to the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 each time the symbol existing at the beginning of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is changed to the next symbol. The information is updated to the information of the later pattern type. As a result, the information set in each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 always corresponds to the type of symbol existing at the head of the corresponding symbol array Z1 to Z3. When starting control of the variable display of symbols using a predetermined execution target table, the display CPU 72 displays information corresponding to symbol type information set in the adjustment counters 111 to 113 in the predetermined execution target table. Set in the pattern adjustment area.

When starting the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, if the first symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 is the main symbol "3" as shown in FIG. 23(a), the value of the first adjustment counter 111 becomes "5". Here, the relationship between the values set in each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 and the type of the first symbol will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 27. As already explained, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have a total of 18 symbols, including the main symbol and the sub-symbol, whereas the middle symbol row Z2 has the main symbol and the sub-symbol. Since a total of 20 symbols are arranged, the number of types of values that can be taken by the corresponding adjustment counters 111 to 113 is different.

In the case of the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113, as shown in FIG. There is a one-to-one correspondence with each of the 18 symbols in each row Z3. In this case, odd numbers correspond to the main symbols, and even numbers correspond to the sub symbols. In addition, in the upper symbol row Z1, the main symbols are arranged in descending order with respect to the scrolling direction from right to left, whereas in the lower symbol row Z3, the main symbols are arranged in descending order with respect to the scrolling direction from right to left. However, the relationship between the values that can be taken by the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113 and the type of the first symbol is the same as the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113. is the same between

In the case of the second adjustment counter 112, as shown in FIG. 27(b), it can take values from "1" to "20", and each value has one pair with each of the 20 symbols in the middle symbol row Z2. 1 is compatible. In this case, the relationship between the values "1" to "18" and the type of the first symbol is the same as in the case of the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113. Also, the value of "19" corresponds to the main symbol of "4" additionally arranged between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1", and the value of "20" corresponds to the main symbol of "4" which is additionally arranged between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". It corresponds to the sub-symbol between the main symbol "4" and the main symbol "1".

The manner of setting information for the display symbol adjustment area will be described by taking as an example the case where the manner of fluctuating display of symbols in the acceleration period, high speed period, and low speed period in the upper symbol row Z1 is set. FIG. 28(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period, and FIG. 28(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period. In addition, the setting mode of information for the display symbol adjustment area of the execution target table corresponding to each of the middle symbol column Z2 and the lower symbol column Z3 is that the upper symbol column Z1 has the symbols arranged in descending order, whereas the pattern arrangement mode is in descending order. The symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are different in that the symbols are arranged in ascending order, but other points are the same as the setting method of information for the display symbol adjustment area of the execution target table corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1. are the same.

When the game replay is started in the state shown in FIG. 23(a), the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is "5". Further, in the upper symbol row Z1, the symbols are arranged so that the main symbols are in descending order with respect to the scrolling direction from right to left. Therefore, in the display symbol adjustment area of the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period read from the storage area 101 for the acceleration period and corresponding to the upper symbol column Z1, as shown in FIG. 28(a), , "5" corresponding to the current top symbol is set for the first pointer group, and the symbols to be controlled in this case are the main symbol "3" and the symbol between "3" and "2". It becomes the secondary symbol of , and the main symbol of "2". Also, for the next order of pointers, "4" corresponding to the next order of symbols is set for the current first symbol, and for the next order of pointers, "4" corresponding to the next order of symbols is set. For the symbol in the next order, "3" corresponding to the symbol in the next order is set, and for the pointer group in the next order, "2" corresponding to the symbol in the next order is set for the symbol in the next order. " is set. In other words, numerical values are set for the adjustment areas of the displayed symbols so that the numbers are in descending order toward the rear pointer group.

When the control of the acceleration period of the upper symbol row Z1 is completed using the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period in which the display symbol adjustment area is set as described above, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 becomes "1". ing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28(b), in the display symbol adjustment area in the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period read from the storage area 102 for the first high speed period, the first pointer group is "1" corresponding to the current first symbol is set, and "18" corresponding to the next sequential symbol is set to the current first pointer group for the next order pointer group. . In other words, in the upper symbol row Z1, the 18 symbols scroll from right to left and circulate, so for the pointer group where "1" is set in the display symbol adjustment area, in the next order "18" is set in the display symbol adjustment area for the existing pointer group. Further, for subsequent pointer groups, values are set in the display symbol adjustment area so that they are consecutive numbers and in descending numerical order.

Here, as already explained, the high speed period that can be controlled by the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period is the longest among the multiple types of high speed periods of the upper symbol row Z1 determined in relation to the variable display time of the game time. The period has been longer than the high speed period. In this case, when it is time to use the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period, all of the display symbol adjustment areas in the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period, regardless of the current high speed period. However, when the control by the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current high-speed period is completed, the control by the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period is completed, and the control by the execution target table T11 for the first low-speed period is completed. The control is switched to the execution target table T12. In this case, when the control corresponding to the last pointer information in the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current high speed period is completed, the control by the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period ends.

Note that this also applies to the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period. In other words, as already explained, the acceleration period that can be controlled by the acceleration period execution target table T10 is the longest acceleration period among the multiple types of acceleration periods for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 determined in relation to the variable display time of the game cycle. The period is longer than the acceleration period. In this case, when it is time to use the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period, values are set for all of the display symbol adjustment areas in the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period, regardless of the current acceleration period. However, when the control by the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current acceleration period is completed, the control by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period is completed, and the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period is set. The control switches to In this case, when the control corresponding to the last pointer information in the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current acceleration period is completed, the control by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period ends.

In FIG. 28(b), if the pointer group for which "17" is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponds to the end timing of the current high-speed period, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 will be "16". It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29, the display symbol adjustment area in the execution target table T12 for the first low-speed period read from the storage area 103 for the first low-speed period contains the current state for the first pointer group. "16" corresponding to the first symbol is set, and for the subsequent pointer groups, values are set in the display symbol adjustment area so that they are consecutive numbers and in descending numerical order.

As described above, the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 are used to set the values of the display symbol adjustment areas in the execution target tables T10 to T12. As a result, even if the execution target tables T10 to T12 are configured to be used for multiple types of situations, the variable display of the symbol is controlled in a manner corresponding to the type of symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. It becomes possible to do so.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for controlling the variable display of symbols while also using the execution target table will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the command corresponding processing executed by the display CPU 72. Note that the command corresponding processing is executed in step S603 in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 18).

If a command for starting fluctuation has been received from the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 (step S901: YES), the execution target table for the acceleration period is read from the storage area 101 for the acceleration period into the work RAM 73 (step S902). In this case, the execution target tables for the acceleration period are read out in correspondence with the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3, so there are a total of three execution target tables for the acceleration period in the work RAM 73. is read out. However, these three execution target tables for the acceleration period are all of the same type.

Thereafter, for each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3, the high speed period execution target tables are read from the high speed period storage areas 102, 104, and 106 to the work RAM 73 (step S903). Specifically, the execution target table for the first high speed period corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 is read from the storage area 102 for the first high speed period, and the execution target table for the first high speed period corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2 is read from the storage area 104 for the second high speed period. The execution target table for the second high speed period is read out, and the execution target table for the third high speed period corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3 is read out from the storage area 106 for the third high speed period.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a reach effect will occur in the current game round based on the information on the variable display time in the current game round included in the command for starting the fluctuation (step S904). If the reach effect does not occur (step S904: NO), the execution target table for the low-speed period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game round is set for each of the upper symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2, and lower symbol row Z3. The data is read from the low-speed period storage areas 103, 105, and 107 to the work RAM 73 (step S905). As already explained, a plurality of types of low-speed periods are set in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the low-speed periods correspond to the variable display time of the game. Therefore, in step S905, the execution target table for the low speed period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game round is read. Specifically, the execution target table for the first low-speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the current low-speed period of the upper symbol row Z1) is read from the first low-speed period storage area 103, and the execution target table for the first low-speed period is read out from the storage area 103 for the first low-speed period. The execution target table for the second low-speed period corresponding to the current fluctuation display time (that is, the current low-speed period of medium symbol row Z2) is read from the storage area 105 for the current fluctuation display, and the current fluctuation display is read from the storage area 107 for the third low-speed period. The execution target table for the third low speed period corresponding to the time (that is, the current low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3) is read.

When a reach effect occurs (step S904: YES), the execution target table for the low speed period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game round is stored for the first low speed period for each of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. The data is read from the area 103 and the third low-speed period storage area 107 to the work RAM 73 (step S906). Specifically, the execution target table for the first low-speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the current low-speed period of the upper symbol row Z1) is read from the first low-speed period storage area 103, and the execution target table for the first low-speed period is read out from the first low-speed period storage area 103. The execution target table for the third low-speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the current low-speed period of the lower symbol row Z3) is read from the storage area 107. Thereafter, a dedicated execution target table corresponding to the current reach effect is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S907).

When the process of step S905 or step S907 is executed, information corresponding to the values of each adjustment counter 111 to 113 is added to the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table for each acceleration period read out in step S902. Setting processing is executed (step S908). In the setting process, for the execution target table for the acceleration period that is read out to control the fluctuating display of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the first adjustment area for the display symbol corresponding to the first pointer group is The value of the adjustment counter 111 is set, and for subsequent pointer groups, values are set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so that the numbers are consecutive for each pointer group and in descending numerical order. In addition, regarding the execution target table for the acceleration period that is read out to control the fluctuating display of symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, the second adjustment counter is set for the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the first pointer group. A value of 112 is set, and for subsequent pointer groups, values are set in the display symbol adjustment area so that the numbers are consecutive for each pointer group and in ascending numerical order. In addition, regarding the execution target table for the acceleration period read to control the fluctuating display of symbols in the lower symbol row Z3, the third adjustment counter is set for the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the first pointer group. A value of 113 is set, and for subsequent pointer groups, values are set in the display symbol adjustment area so that the numbers are consecutive for each pointer group and in ascending numerical order.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, or if the process in step S908 is executed, other processes are executed (step S909). In other processing, when a command different from the fluctuation start command is received, processing corresponding to the received command is executed.

Next, the normal variation arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31. The normal fluctuation calculation process is executed in the symbol calculation process of step S705 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the game repeat effect is being executed and the reach effect is not being performed. .

First, it is determined whether it is time to update the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1001). The update timing of the first adjustment counter 111 means that the pointer information currently being referred to in the execution target table used for the upper symbol row Z1 is the last pointer information in one pointer group. This applies if . If it is time to update the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1001: YES), the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is subtracted by 1 (step S1002). If the value of the first adjustment counter 111 after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1003: YES), the maximum value "18" is set in the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1004).

In step S1005, it is determined whether it is time to update the second adjustment counter 112 or the third adjustment counter 113. The update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 means that the pointer information currently being referred to in the execution target table that is used for the middle symbol row Z2 is the last pointer information in one pointer group. This applies if . The update timing of the third adjustment counter 113 means that the pointer information currently being referred to in the execution target table used for the lower symbol row Z3 is the last pointer information in one pointer group. This applies if .

If it is time to update the second adjustment counter 112 or the third adjustment counter 113 (step S1005: YES), 1 is added to the value of the adjustment counter 112, 113 to be updated this time (step S1006). In this case, only one of the second adjustment counter 112 and the third adjustment counter 113 may be updated, or both the second adjustment counter 112 and the third adjustment counter 113 may be updated. In some cases. Thereafter, it is determined whether the values of the adjustment counters 112, 113 to be updated after the addition of 1 exceed the maximum value (step S1007). In this case, the maximum value of the second adjustment counter 112 is "20", and the maximum value of the third adjustment counter 113 is "18". If the values of the adjustment counters 112, 113 to be updated exceed the maximum value, the values of the adjustment counters 112, 113 whose maximum value exceeds are set to the minimum value "1" (step S1008).

In step S1009, it is determined whether or not there is a table that is the switching timing among the execution target tables that are used in each of the upper symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2, and lower symbol row Z3. . If the switching timing is an acceleration period, the current pointer information in the execution target table for the acceleration period is the last pointer of the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the acceleration period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game round. This applies if it is information. Since the acceleration period is constant in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the switching timing from the execution target table for the acceleration period to the execution target table for the high speed period occurs simultaneously in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In addition, if the switching timing is a high speed period, the current pointer information in the execution target table for the high speed period is the end timing of the high speed period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game round in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3. This is the case when the pointer information is the last pointer of the pointer group corresponding to . Since the high speed period is different in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the timing of switching from the execution target table for the high speed period to the execution target table for the low speed period occurs individually in each symbol row Z1 to Z3.

For any of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3, if it is the timing to switch the execution target table (step S1009: YES), a process for changing the execution target table to be used is executed (step S1010). ). In this case, the execution target table to be used is changed for all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 corresponding to the switching timing. In this change process, if the execution target table for the acceleration period is to be used, the execution target table for the high speed period that has already been read out to the work RAM 73 in step S903 in the command corresponding process (FIG. 30) is used. If the execution target table for the high-speed period is changed to a table and the execution target table for the high-speed period is the target table, it has already been read out to the work RAM 73 in steps S905 to S907 in the command corresponding processing (FIG. 30). Change the usage target to the execution target table.

Thereafter, a setting process based on the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 corresponding to the execution target table is executed for the display symbol adjustment area in the execution target table newly determined to be used. The contents of the setting process are as described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. As a result, the content of the execution target table newly determined to be used is changed to a mode corresponding to the current display content of the symbol.

If a negative determination is made in step S1009, or if the process in step S1011 is executed, pointer update processing is executed (step S1012). In the pointer update process, for each of the upper symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2, and lower symbol row Z3, the pointer information that is referenced in the execution target table that is used is updated to the pointer information in the next order. do. However, the pointer information update process is not executed for the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 whose execution target tables to be used have been changed in the current processing round of the normal variation calculation process.

Thereafter, the type of image data corresponding to the symbol to be displayed for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is determined (step S1013). To understand this, from the value of the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the current pointer information in the execution target table that is used in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 corresponding to the execution target table are calculated. The type of the first symbol in Z3 is grasped, and the types of the two subsequent symbols are grasped. Further, such symbol types are checked for all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After that, various parameter information of all the symbols to be displayed this time are grasped from the contents of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the execution target table to be used in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The parameter information includes the coordinates of three symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the coordinates of three symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, and the coordinates of three symbols in the lower symbol row Z3.

When the normal variation arithmetic processing is executed as described above, in the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605), the pattern grasped in step S1013 is set as the drawing target. . Moreover, parameter information applied to those symbols is set in the drawing list.

As described above, since the execution target table for controlling the fluctuating display of symbols is shared in various situations, it is possible to reduce the number of execution target tables stored in the memory module 74 in advance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storing the execution target table in advance in the memory module 74. Furthermore, even if the execution target table is shared, the types of symbols to be displayed are adjusted using the adjustment counters 111 to 113, so it is difficult to appropriately control the fluctuating display of symbols. It becomes possible.

There is only one type of execution target table for the acceleration period, and the acceleration period that can be controlled by the execution target table for the acceleration period is the longest of the multiple types of acceleration periods determined in relation to the variable display time of the game play. The period is longer than the acceleration period. Then, no matter what type of acceleration period it is, the execution target table for that acceleration period is used, and the range of pointer information referenced in the execution target table changes in relation to the type of acceleration period being executed. be done. This makes it possible to suppress the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period, and it becomes possible to suppress the storage capacity required for storing the execution target tables in advance in the memory module 74. In particular, one type of execution target table for the acceleration period is used in common for all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Also from this point of view, it is possible to suppress the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period.

There is only one type of execution target table for the high speed period prepared for each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and the high speed period that can be controlled by the execution target table for each high speed period is the corresponding symbol row Z1 to Z3. Regarding Z3, the period is longer than the longest high speed period among the plurality of types of high speed periods determined in relation to the variable display time of the game round. Then, regarding one symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, no matter which type of high-speed period it is, one type of high-speed period execution target table is used, and the execution target table is used in relation to the type of high-speed period to be executed. The range of pointer information referenced in the table is changed. This makes it possible to suppress the number of execution target tables for the high-speed period, and it becomes possible to suppress the storage capacity required for storing the execution target tables in advance in the memory module 74.

Even in a configuration where the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period and execution target tables for the high speed period is kept small as described above, the execution target tables are switched in the order of the last in the group of pointers being referenced. This is done at the timing when control based on pointer information is completed. As a result, control can be started from the pointer information of the first order in one pointer group in the execution target table that is newly used, so that it is possible to appropriately switch the execution target table.

In each execution target table, a display pattern adjustment area is set in one-to-one correspondence with the task content in each pointer information. Then, by adjusting the information set in the display symbol adjustment area, the type of symbol to which the content of each task is applied is changed. Thereby, by simply referring to each execution target table, it is possible to grasp the type of target symbol to which the information on the content of the task is applied at each update timing.

Further, when starting to use the execution target table, symbol type information is set for each of the display symbol adjustment areas included in the execution target table. As a result, there is no need to execute processing to change the information in the display symbol adjustment area for the execution target table during execution of control using the execution target table, so It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration.

<Another form of shared execution target table>
- The execution target table may have a configuration in which the display symbol adjustment area is not provided. In this case, by configuring the execution target table to have at least information on the trigger for switching the values of the corresponding adjustment counters 111 to 113 and information on the task, the types of symbols to be displayed can be adjusted. This can be grasped from the counters 111 to 113. According to this configuration, there is no need to set a display symbol adjustment area in the execution target table, so it is possible to suppress the data capacity of the execution target table.

- If all types of individual images are to be controlled during the control period using one execution target table, the types of individual images to which the execution target table is applied will always be constant, but the execution target table's The order of the individual images to be applied may differ from game to game. Therefore, in this case, although the types of individual images to which the execution target table is applied are not adjusted, the order of the individual images to which the execution target table is applied is adjusted.

- For a configuration in which a specific variation display is performed using only one type of individual image among a plurality of types of individual images, a configuration in which the execution target table is also used as described above may be applied. In this case, in the execution target table, information that determines the operation content of the individual images that are the targets of specific variation display is set in chronological order, and the types of individual images to which the information is applied are adjusted. The Rukoto.

・Instead of the configuration in which the execution target table for the acceleration period is provided in common for all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a configuration in which the execution target table for the acceleration period is provided for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. You can also use it as Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the execution target table for the high speed period is provided in common for all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

・Switching between the execution target table for the acceleration period and the execution target table for the high speed period is not limited to a configuration in which switching is performed at the timing when control based on pointer information in the last order in the referenced pointer group is completed. Instead, it may be the timing when control based on other pointer information is completed. However, regardless of which acceleration period or high speed period the timing at which the switching occurs is preferably set as the timing at which control based on pointer information in a predetermined order in the pointer group is completed.

<Configuration for performing loop display performance>
Next, a configuration for performing a loop display effect will be described.

FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the loop display effect. In the loop display effect, as shown in FIG. 32(a), a loop display character G4 is displayed behind the symbols G1 to G3 that make it possible to notify the content corresponding to the result of the validity judgment in the MPU 62 of the main control device 50. At the same time, a loop display background G5 is displayed behind the loop display character G4. In addition, in the loop display performance, the types of symbols G1 to G3 are different from those in the case of FIG. 4(b), and the manner of fluctuating display of symbols in multiple symbol rows is also different from that of FIG. 4(b). have different aspects. Specifically, three cube-shaped base symbol images G6 to G8 are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and numerical symbols G1 to G3 are displayed in front of each base symbol image G6 to G8. Ru. When displaying symbols in a variable manner, the base symbol images G6 to G8 are rotated in the vertical direction about the rotation axis extending in the horizontal direction passing through the center of the base symbol images G6 to G8, and as the base symbols are rotated, each of the base symbol images G6 to G8 is rotated in the vertical direction. The symbols G1 to G3 displayed in front of the symbol images G6 to G8 are changed. The trigger for changing between the pattern display mode shown in FIG. 4(b) and the pattern display mode shown in FIG. 32(a) is arbitrary, but for example, if there are multiple types of display modes, the first display mode In the second display mode, the pattern may be displayed in the pattern shown in FIG. 4(b), and in the second display mode, the pattern may be displayed in the pattern shown in FIG. 32(a).

In the loop display effect, the loop display character G4 is displayed so as to repeatedly perform a series of actions. Specifically, in a situation where the base symbol images G6 to G8 are not displayed in rotation, as shown in FIG. The loop display character G4 is displayed so as to perform an action and repeat the action while the robot is stationary (this display content is also referred to as a display while the robot is stationary). An example of the motion while stationary is a motion in which the loop display character G4 is moving up and down with its arms folded. On the other hand, in a situation where rotational display is performed in any of the base symbol images G6 to G8, as shown in FIG. A loop display character G4 is displayed so as to perform an action while moving and repeat the action while moving (this display content is also referred to as a display while moving). As an example of the movement while moving, a movement in which the loop display character G4 is running in a predetermined direction can be considered.

In the loop display performance, the loop display background G5 does not scroll in one place, as shown in FIG. The background is displayed so that the player can recognize that it continues to be displayed. On the other hand, in a situation where the loop display character G4 is performing an action while moving, the loop display character G4 is displayed as if it were moving in a predetermined direction, as shown in FIG. 32(b). Accordingly, the loop display background G5 is displayed as if the background image is scrolling in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. In this case, the loop display background G5 is displayed as a series of background images scrolling over the background movement unit period, and the scrolling of the series of background images is repeated every time the background movement unit period passes. It will be displayed as follows.

The flow of the loop display effect will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 33. FIG. 33(a) shows the execution period of the game round, FIG. 33(b) shows the flow of periodic display of the loop display character G4 in a situation where movement is performed, and FIG. 33(c) 33(d) shows the flow of periodic display of the loop display character G4 in a situation in which a motion is performed while stationary, and FIG. 33(d) shows the flow of scroll display of the loop display background G5.

At timing t1, a game round is started as shown in FIG. 33(a), and the variable display of symbols G1 to G3 is started. Furthermore, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 33(b) and 33(c), the loop display character G4 starts the moving action from the state in the middle of the stationary action, and As shown in 33(d), scrolling display is also started in the loop display background G5.

Thereafter, the moving motion is repeated in the loop display character G4, and the scrolling display of a series of background images is repeated in the loop display background G5 until timing t6, which is the timing at which the current game round ends. Specifically, the loop display character G4 executes the moving action once in each moving unit period Tc1 from timing t1 to timing t2, from timing t2 to timing t3, and from timing t3 to timing t4. will be held. In this case, the next execution of the moving action starts at timing t2 when one execution of the moving action ends, and the next execution of the moving action starts at the timing t3 when one execution of the moving action ends. One execution time is started, and at timing t4 when one execution time of the moving action ends, the next one execution time of the moving action is started. Furthermore, the display mode of the loop display character G4 at the start timing of each execution time of the moving action is the same, and the loop display character G4 at the timing when the same amount of time has elapsed from the start timing of each execution time of the moving action. The display mode of G4 is the same.

Furthermore, for the loop display background G5, one scroll display of a series of background images is performed in the background movement unit period Tc2 from timing t1 to timing t5. In this case, at timing t5 when one execution of the scroll display of a series of background images ends, the next execution of the scroll display starts. In addition, the display mode of the loop display background G5 at the start timing of each execution time of the scroll display is the same, and the loop display background G5 at the timing when the same amount of time has elapsed from the start timing of the execution time of the scroll display. The display mode of G5 is the same.

In the above configuration, the moving unit period Tc1 is shorter than the background moving unit period Tc2. Therefore, even if one execution of the moving action in the loop display character G4 and one execution of the scroll display of a series of background images in the loop display background G5 are started at the same time, the end timing of each execution is There will be a difference. Further, the number of times one execution of the moving action is performed in one game round may be different from the number of times one execution of the scrolling display of a series of background images is performed in one game round.

Thereafter, at the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the game round ends, and as shown in FIGS. 33(b) and 33(c), the loop display character G4 is moving. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 33(d), the loop display background G5 changes from the scroll display of a series of background images to the stop display. The state can be switched to In this case, although the timing t6 is in the middle of one execution of the moving motion in the loop display character G4, the moving motion is ended at the middle timing and the stationary motion is started. Further, the timing of t6 is the timing in the middle of one execution in the scroll display of a series of background images in the loop display background G5, and the stop display of the loop display background G5 is performed while being displayed at the timing of t6. Begins.

At the timing t6, the stopping action is started in the loop display character G4, and the stopping action is repeated in the loop display character G4 until the timing t10, which is the timing when the next game round is started. In detail, the loop display character G4 is executed one time during the stationary operation in each stationary unit period Tc3 from timing t6 to timing t7, timing t7 to timing t8, and timing t8 to timing t9. will be held. In this case, at the timing t7 when one execution of the stationary operation ends, the next execution of the stationary operation starts, and at the timing t8 when one execution of the stationary operation ends, the next execution of the stationary operation starts. One execution cycle is started, and at timing t9 when one execution cycle of the stationary operation ends, the next execution cycle of the stationary operation is started. Furthermore, the display mode of the loop display character G4 at the start timing of each execution time of the motion while stopped is the same, and the display mode of the loop display character G4 is the same at the timing when the same amount of time has elapsed from the start timing of the execution time of the motion while stopped. The display mode of G4 is the same. The stationary unit period Tc3 is shorter than the moving unit period Tc1. Therefore, when compared in the same execution period, the number of times a stationary motion is executed is greater than the number of times a moving motion is executed.

Thereafter, at timing t10, a new game round is started as shown in FIG. 33(a). In this case, although the timing of t10 is the timing in which the loop display character G4 is in the middle of one execution of the motion while stationary, as shown in FIG. The moving operation starts from the state in which the machine is moving. Then, the loop display character G4 repeatedly performs the moving action in the same manner as in the case of timing t1 to timing t6.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33(d), the loop display background G5 is stopped and displayed with the contents of the background image at that time when the previous game round ends at timing t6, and the state in which it is stopped and displayed is continues until timing t10. Therefore, at timing t10 when a new game round is started, the scrolling display of the series of background images is resumed from the stopped display state. In other words, the scrolling display of a series of background images is temporarily stopped from timing t6 to timing t10, and at timing t10, the scrolling display of a series of background images continues with the flow up to timing t6. It will be restarted.

When the scroll display effect is executed as described above, the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 are both displayed behind the symbols G1 to G3, and during the execution of the game, the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 are A series of displays over a predetermined period of time are repeated in both display backgrounds G5, but in a situation where no game is being played, the loop display character G4 repeats the motion while stopped, whereas the loop display background At G5, the scroll display of a series of background images is stopped and displayed. In this case, if the table for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 is set as the same table, a table for non-game rounds is prepared and a table for the non-game rounds is prepared. It becomes necessary to prepare a table for a number of minutes corresponding to all possible stop-display timings on the loop display background G5, or to fix the stop-display timings on the loop display background G5. If you try to prepare a number of tables corresponding to all the timings that can be stopped and displayed in the loop display background G5 during a non-gaming round, the number of tables will increase and the storage capacity of the memory module 74 will be overwhelmed. If an attempt is made to fix the timing at which the display background G5 is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the loop display background G5 during a non-game round will become uniform regardless of the timing at which a game round ends.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a table for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and a table for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are separately prepared. Hereinafter, the contents of the data stored in advance in the memory module 74 for executing the loop display effect will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 34(a).

As data for performing a loop display effect, the memory module 74 stores in advance an image data group 121 for loop display, as shown in FIG. 34(a). The image data group 121 for loop display includes image data for displaying base symbol images G6 to G8, image data for displaying symbols G1 to G3 in base symbol images G6 to G8, and character G4 for loop display. It includes image data for displaying and image data for displaying loop display background G5. In this case, the image data for displaying the loop display character G4 includes multiple types of image data used when performing motions while stationary and multiple types of image data used when performing motions while moving. Contains data. Furthermore, there are multiple types of image data for displaying the loop display background G5.

In addition to the image data group 121 for loop display, the memory module 74 stores in advance a character stop table 122, a character movement table 123, and a background table 124. The character stop table 122 is a table that is referred to in order to cause the loop display character G4 to repeatedly perform a stop motion. The character movement table 123 is a table that is referred to in order to cause the loop display character G4 to repeatedly perform an action during movement. The background table 124 is a table that is referenced to scroll a series of background images when the loop display character G4 is performing a moving action.

35(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the character stopping table 122, FIG. 35(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the character moving table 123, and FIG. 35(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the character moving table 123. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a table 124. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 35(a) to 35(c), pointer information corresponding to the update timing of one frame's worth of images is set in each table 122 to 124. Information about the content of the task is set. The task content information includes information for specifying the type of image data to be displayed in each corresponding frame, as well as the location of the image data set to be displayed (i.e., the frame buffer Parameter information such as coordinate information indicating the drawing position in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be written in 82 and scale information indicating the size of the image data set as the display target is set.

In detail for each table, the character retention table 122 is set with pointer information (“0” to “99”) for the number of frames corresponding to the retention unit period Tc3. The content of the task corresponding to each pointer information includes image data of the loop display character G4 to display at one timing of the stopped motion in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. The type and parameter information to be applied to the image data are set. When it is time to draw an image for one frame, the next pointer information becomes the current reference target for the pointer information that was referenced at the previous drawing timing, and the loop is executed according to the contents of the task corresponding to that pointer information. By executing the display control of the display character G4, a stop motion is performed in the loop display character G4. In addition, if the display control corresponding to the last pointer information in the character stop table 122 is completed during the period in which the loop display character G4 is made to perform a stop motion, the pointer information to be referenced is the first pointer information in the character stop table 122. The pointer information will be returned. Thereby, it becomes possible to repeatedly execute the motion while stopped by using the character stop table 122 in which display control data corresponding to one execution of the motion while stopped is set.

In the character movement table 123, pointer information (“0” to “199”) for the number of frames corresponding to the moving unit period Tc1 is set. The content of the task corresponding to each pointer information includes image data of the loop display character G4 to display at one timing of the moving action in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. The type and parameter information to be applied to the image data are set. When it is time to draw an image for one frame, the next pointer information becomes the current reference target for the pointer information that was referenced at the previous drawing timing, and the loop is executed according to the contents of the task corresponding to that pointer information. By executing the display control of the display character G4, a moving action is performed in the loop display character G4. In addition, if the display control corresponding to the last pointer information in the character movement table 123 is completed during the period in which the loop display character G4 is made to perform an action while moving, the pointer information to be referenced is the first pointer information in the character movement table 123. The pointer information will be returned. This makes it possible to repeatedly execute the moving action using the character movement table 123 in which display control data corresponding to one execution of the moving action is set.

In the background table 124, pointer information (“0” to “599”) for the number of frames corresponding to the background movement unit period Tc2 is set. The content of the task corresponding to each pointer information includes the type of image data of the loop display background G5 for displaying the scroll display at one timing in the loop display background G5 in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. and parameter information to be applied to the image data. When it is time to draw an image for one frame, the next pointer information becomes the current reference target for the pointer information that was referenced at the previous drawing timing, and the loop is executed according to the contents of the task corresponding to that pointer information. By executing the display control of the display background G5, a series of background images are scrolled and displayed on the loop display background G5. In addition, if the display control corresponding to the last pointer information of the background table 124 is completed during the period in which the loop display background G5 performs the scroll display, the pointer information to be referenced is the first pointer of the background table 124. Let's go back to information. This makes it possible to repeatedly perform scroll display using the background table 124 in which display control data corresponding to one execution of scroll display is set.

In a configuration in which the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are provided separately, the operation of the loop display character G4 while stopped is 34 (b ), the work RAM 73 is provided with an interlocking flag 125. The state in which the interlocking flag 125 is set to "1" corresponds to a situation where the loop display character G4 is performing a moving action, and the state in which the interlocking flag 125 is set to "1" , a scrolling display of the loop display background G5 is performed. On the other hand, a state in which the interlocking flag is "0" corresponds to a situation where the loop display character G4 is performing a stationary action, and a state in which the interlocking flag 125 is "0" is a loop display. The scrolling display of the background G5 is stopped.

As described above, the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are prepared separately, so that the game round ends. When the timing is reached, the background table 124 stops updating the pointer information to stop displaying the loop display background G5, and the pointer information in the character stop table 122 is updated to display the loop display character G4. By performing the display control, it becomes possible to cause the loop display character G4 to perform a stationary display. Therefore, it is possible to end the scrolling display of the loop display background G5 and start the stop display at an arbitrary timing in accordance with the timing at which the game round ends. In addition, since there is no need to prepare multiple types of tables corresponding to arbitrary timings during non-gaming rounds, the number of tables for controlling the loop display effect can be reduced, and the table can be stored in advance. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of

In addition, there are four or more types of timings at which the scrolling display of the loop display background G5 is stopped in relation to the timing at which the game round ends.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the loop display effect will be explained. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the character loop calculation process executed by the display CPU 72. Note that the character loop calculation process is executed in the performance calculation process of step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where a loop display effect should be executed.

If it is determined that it is the start timing of the game round based on the currently read execution target table (step S1101: YES), the character movement table 123 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 and set as the table to be used. (Step S1102). Thereafter, the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 is set to "1" (step S1103), and the pointer information of the reference object in the character movement table 123 is cleared to "0" (step S1104). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the task content corresponding to the first pointer information in the character movement table 123 is grasped as the image data to be used this time. Further, in step S1113, parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time is derived using information set in the content of the task corresponding to the first pointer information in the character movement table 123. Understand.

If it is determined that it is the end timing of the game round based on the currently read execution target table (step S1105: YES), the character stop table 122 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 and set as the table to be used. (Step S1106). Thereafter, the interlock flag 125 in the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1107), and the pointer information of the reference object in the character stop table 122 is cleared to "0" (step S1108). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the task content corresponding to the first pointer information in the character stop table 122 is grasped as the image data to be used this time. Further, in step S1113, parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time is derived and grasped using the information set in the task content corresponding to the first pointer information in the character stop table 122. do.

If this time is neither the start timing nor the end timing of the game round (step S1101 and step S1105: NO), pointer information is updated for the table to be used among the character movement table 123 and the character stop table 122 ( Step S1109). Specifically, the update process is performed to add 1 to the value of the pointer information. If the pointer information after the update exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the table being used (step S1110: YES), the pointer information is cleared to "0" in order to return it to its initial value (step S1110: YES). S1111). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the task content corresponding to the current pointer information of the tables 122 and 123 to be used is set as the image data to be used this time. grasp. In addition, in step S1113, parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time is used, using information set in the task contents corresponding to the current pointer information of the tables 122 and 123 to be used. Derive and understand.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for the background loop executed by the display CPU 72. Note that the background loop calculation process is executed in the background calculation process of step S703 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where a loop display effect should be executed.

If the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 is set to "1" (step S1201: YES), the pointer information to be referenced in the background table 124 is updated (step S1202). Specifically, the update process is performed to add 1 to the value of the pointer information. If the updated pointer information exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the background table 124 (step S1203: YES), the pointer information is cleared to "0" to return to the initial value (step S1204). Thereafter, the image data of the loop display background G5 set in the task content corresponding to the current pointer information in the background table 124 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1205). Also, by using the information set in the task content corresponding to the current pointer information in the background table 124, parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time is derived and grasped (step S1206). .

If the interlocking flag is not set to "1" (step S1201: NO), the image data of the loop display background G5 set in the task content corresponding to the current pointer information in the background table 124 is displayed this time. By grasping this as the image data to be used, the image data of the loop display background G5, which is similar to the previous one, is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1207). In addition, by grasping the parameter information set in the area for storing parameter information to be applied to those image data in the work RAM 73 as the parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time, the same The parameter information of the loop display background G5 is grasped as the parameter information to be used this time (step S1208).

When the arithmetic processing for the character loop and the arithmetic processing for the background loop are executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) includes step S1112, step S1205 or The image data grasped in step S1207 is set as the drawing target. Further, parameter information applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

As described above, since the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are prepared separately, the game round is completed. When the timing is reached, the background table 124 stops updating the pointer information to stop displaying the loop display background G5, while the pointer information in the character stop table 122 is updated to display the loop display character G4. By performing the display control, it becomes possible to cause the loop display character G4 to perform a stationary display. Therefore, it is possible to end the scrolling display of the loop display background G5 and start the stop display at an arbitrary timing in accordance with the timing at which the game round ends. In addition, since there is no need to prepare multiple types of tables for non-gaming rounds corresponding to arbitrary timings, the number of tables for controlling loop display effects can be reduced, and the table can be stored in advance. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of

Dedicated pointer information is set in the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4, and dedicated pointer information is set in the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5. By doing so, it is possible to continue updating the pointer information of one of the tables 122, 123, and 124 while not using the other, or to maintain the pointer information of the other at a predetermined value. Become.

As a table for controlling the display of the loop display character G4, there is a character stop table 122 for making the loop display character G4 perform a display while it is stationary, and a table for making the loop display character G4 perform a display while moving. A character movement table 123 is separately provided. Thereby, when changing the variable display mode of the loop display character G4, it is only necessary to switch the tables 122, 123 to be used, and it is possible to suitably switch between these variable display modes. Further, it is possible to set an arbitrary timing as the switching timing while suppressing the number of tables.

By repeatedly using the character stationary table 122 in a loop, the loop display character G4 is repeatedly displayed as stationary, and by repeatedly using the character movement table 123 in a loop, the loop display character G4 is displayed in a moving state. Make the display repeat. This makes it possible to suppress the data capacity of these tables 122 and 123.

By repeatedly using the background table 124 in a loop, the scrolling display of the loop display background G5 is repeated. In this case, the number of image update timings required for the loop display background G5 to complete one rotation is different from the number of image update timings required for the moving display of the loop display character G4 to complete one rotation. In this configuration, a character movement table 123 for causing the loop display character G4 to perform a moving display and a background table 124 for causing the loop display background G5 to perform a scroll display are separately provided. This makes it possible to set only information corresponding to one round in each table 123, 124, and there is no need to set useless information beyond one round.

When the character movement table 123 is used to start moving display in the loop display character G4, the interlocking flag 125 is set to "1", so that the loop display background G5 using the background table 124 is set. When the scrolling display of the loop display character G4 is started and the moving display of the loop display character G4 is to be ended, the interlocking flag 125 is cleared to "0", so that the scroll display of the loop display background G5 using the background table 124 is started. is terminated. As a result, in the execution target table for controlling the overall flow of the loop display effect, it is only necessary to set the information on the start timing and end timing of the moving display for the loop display character G4, and the information for the loop display character G4 is set. There is no need to set information on the start timing and end timing of the scroll display for the background G5. Therefore, it is possible to link the movements of the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 while suppressing the amount of data preset in the data table.

<Another form of loop display performance>
- When the loop display character G4 is performing an action while stationary, the relative position of the building image with respect to the loop display character G4 in the loop display background G5 is not changed, but the lighting condition of the building image and the view of the sky are changed. Display modes such as the color tone of the image, the presence or absence of cloud images in the sky, and the display position may be changed. In this case, even in a situation where scroll display is stopped in the loop display background G5, the display mode of the loop display background G5 will be changed, so the display control of the loop display background G5 in this situation is performed. It is preferable that a separate table be provided for this purpose.

- The scrolling display of the loop display background G5 may be continued regardless of whether or not the loop display character G4 is displayed while moving. Even in this case, by using different tables for the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5, it is possible to prepare a table that corresponds to one rotation of the individual images G4 and G5. Therefore, there is no need to set unnecessary information for more than one round. This is the same even when the loop display character G4 continues to be displayed while moving and the loop display background G5 continues to be scrolled.

- In a situation where the loop display character G4 continues to be displayed while moving, the type of the loop display background G5 may be changed. Even with this configuration, by separately providing a table for controlling the loop display character G4 and a table for controlling the loop display background G5, when switching the loop display background G5, the corresponding loop It is only necessary to switch the table for controlling the display background G5, and the table for controlling the loop display character G4 can be used as is.

- Since the interlocking flag 125 is not provided, in the execution target table for controlling the entire loop display effect, together with information on the switching timing between the stationary display and the moving display in the loop display character G4, A configuration may also be adopted in which information about the start timing and stop timing of the scroll display in the loop display background G5 is set.

<Configuration for performing group display performance>
Next, a configuration for performing a group display effect will be described.

FIGS. 38(a) and 38(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the group display effect. The group display performance is a performance in which a large number of group display characters G11 are displayed as if they are moving in the group display direction as a group. The group display character G11 is displayed so that the player can recognize that it represents a person having a face, a body, both hands, and both legs. Furthermore, each group display character G11 is displayed so that the player can recognize it as the same or similar character, although the details of the movements of the limbs and the like are different. The group display characters G11 are displayed as a group across the symbol display device 41 in one direction over a group display period (for example, 3 seconds). Comparing the case of FIG. 38(a) and the case of FIG. 38(b), the display position of the group display character G11 shown in FIG. 38(a) is entirely on the left in FIG. 38(b). direction. Furthermore, each group display character G11 is displayed in a shape that allows the player to recognize that the characters G11 are moving in the direction of movement as a group.

Note that the moving direction of the group display character G11 is not limited to the horizontal direction and may be the vertical direction, and some of the group display characters G11 move from a predetermined end of the symbol display device 41 toward the center. The remaining group display characters G11 may be displayed so as to move from an end opposite to a predetermined end of the symbol display device 41 toward the center.

Group display moving image data 131 is used as image data for displaying the group display character G11 in the group display effect. The moving image data is image data that is compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data based on one frame of still image data, and encoded using, for example, the MPEG2 system. When the moving image data is decoded, it is developed into still image data for multiple frames.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining moving image data 131 for group display. As shown in FIG. 39, in the moving image data 131 for group display, file data is set at the first address, followed by compressed data for each frame. Note that a frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data includes one frame of I picture data corresponding to reference data, multiple frames of P picture data corresponding to first difference data, and multiple frames of B picture data corresponding to second difference data. It has

I-picture data is data that can create one frame of still image data by itself when decoding. P-picture data is data that can create one frame of still image data by performing forward prediction with reference to I-picture data or P-picture data one or more frames before when decoding. . During decoding, B-picture data is bidirectionally predicted by referring to I-picture data or P-picture data one or more frames before, and I-picture data or P-picture data one or more frames later. , is data with which one frame of still image data can be created.

In the compressed data of the moving image data 131 for group display, I picture data is set as the first frame data. Further, B picture data is set as data for the second frame, . . . , m-1 frame. Further, P picture data is set as the m-th frame data. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the m+1th frame, . . . , the n−1th frame. Further, P picture data is set as the n-th frame data. Note that the arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above-mentioned arrangement pattern and may be arbitrary.

By performing decoding processing on the group display video data 131, still image data for multiple update timings (hereinafter also referred to as decoded image data) is created from the group display video data 131. The Rukoto. In this case, the cycle in which the decoded image data can be used for the group display moving image data 131 is longer than the image update cycle in the symbol display device 41 due to the compression rate of the image data.

The relationship between the update cycle of the image and the cycle in which still image data can be used will be explained with reference to the time chart in FIG. 40(a). 40(a1) shows the update timing of the image in the symbol display device 41, FIG. 40(a2) shows the usable timing of image data stored in advance in the memory module 74 as still image data, and FIG. 40(a3) ) indicates the usable timing of decoded image data based on the moving image data 131 for group display.

As already explained, the image update cycle Td1 in the symbol display device 41 is 20 msec, and as shown in FIG. 40(a1), the timing of t1, the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, and the timing of t5 , t6 and t7, the image on the symbol display device 41 is updated. Furthermore, since the image data stored in advance in the memory module 74 as still image data can be used as is, it can be used at each timing from t1 to t7 as shown in FIG. 40(a2). Available for use.

On the other hand, the usable period Td2 of the decoded image data based on the group display moving image data 131 is twice the image update period Td1 in the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIG. 40(a3). Therefore, although the decoded image data can be used at timing t1, timing t3, timing t5, and timing t7, new decoded image data cannot be used at timing t2, timing t4, and timing t6. cannot be used.

In this case, at each of the timing of t2, the timing of t4, and the timing of t6, the same decoded image data as the decoded image data used at the immediately preceding timing, t1, t3, and t5, is used. It is also possible to use However, if an attempt is made to simply use the same decoded image data, there is a risk that the image will become jittery, making it impossible to display a smooth moving image. On the other hand, by changing the range to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the same decoded image data at two consecutive update timings when the same decoded image data is used, This reduces the occurrence of image jitter.

FIGS. 40(b) and 40(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the ranges to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn are made different in the same decoded image data 132.

When drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, the data is written to all unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a and 82b is 800 x 600. It is the number of dots. On the other hand, each decoded image data 132 obtained by executing decoding processing on moving image data 131 for group display has a size larger than the number of dots in frame areas 82a and 82b at the initial magnification after decoding processing. It is the number of pixels. The range that can be drawn by each decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification is larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b in both the horizontal and vertical dimensions. As a result, even if the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b is changed in accordance with the movement direction of the group display character G11 at two consecutive update timings of the same decoded image data 132, the symbol display device 41 It becomes possible to display the group display character G11 throughout.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and among the horizontal and vertical directions in the range that can be drawn using the decoded image data 132, the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group is the corresponding direction in the frame areas 82a and 82b. However, in the horizontal and vertical directions, the direction that is different from the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group has the same size or shorter size as the corresponding direction in the frame areas 82a and 82b. A certain configuration may also be used.

At the earlier update timing of two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data 132 is used, the group display characters G11 move as a group in the decoded image data 132, as shown in FIG. 40(b). The drawing range for the frame areas 82a and 82b is set closer to the end on the forward side in the direction of drawing, that is, the left end. On the other hand, at the rear update timing, in the decoded image data 132, the group display characters G11 are moved to the original end in the direction in which they move as a group, that is, to the right end, as shown in FIG. 40(c). Then, the drawing range for the frame areas 82a and 82b is set. In other words, at the rear update timing with respect to the front update timing, the drawing range in the frame areas 82a and 82b in the decoded image data 132 is on the opposite side to the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group. Moving. As a result, the group display character G11, which was displayed at a predetermined position at the front update timing, is displayed at a position moved to the left of the predetermined position at the rear update timing. Therefore, even if the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, the group display characters G11 may move in the direction in which they move as a group between those two update timings. It becomes possible to perform a display like this. Note that in the decoded image data 132, the range outside the drawing range for the frame areas 82a and 82b is excluded from the drawing target.

Here, when the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, the movement amount of the group display character G11 at the rear update timing with respect to the group display character G11 at the front update timing is a predetermined amount. This is the amount of movement. On the other hand, with respect to the group display character G11 at the rear update timing, the movement amount of the group display character G11 at the front update timing in the decoded image data 132 corresponding to the next usage timing is also the predetermined movement amount. They are the same.

In other words, the first decoded image data 132 at one usage timing and the second decoded image data 132 at the next usage timing are two update timings displayed using the decoded image data 132 at one usage timing. The amount of movement of the group display character G11 between, and the update timing of the rear side displayed using the first decoded image data 132 and the front side update timing displayed using the second decoded image data 132. The amount of movement of the group display character G11 is set to be the same as the predetermined amount of movement. More specifically, when comparing the display positions of the predetermined group display characters G11 to be displayed in both the case of using the first decoded image data 132 and the case of using the second decoded image data 132, From the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the front update timing when the first decoded image data 132 is used, to the predetermined group display character G11 at the front update timing when the second decoded image data 132 is used. The amount of movement to the display position of G11 is from the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the front update timing when the first decoded image data 132 is used to the rear when the first decoded image data 132 is used. This is twice the amount of movement of the predetermined group display character G11 to the display position at the side update timing. In addition, in order to enable setting of such a movement amount, at least the group display characters G11 move as a group in the horizontal and vertical directions in the range that can be drawn by each decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification. The dimension in the direction (specifically, the dimension in the lateral direction) is set to be larger than the dimension in the drawing range of the frame regions 82a, 82b in that direction by at least the predetermined movement amount. With this configuration, it is possible to keep the amount of movement of the group display character G11 constant between one update timing and the next update timing, and it is possible to smoothly move the group display character G11. becomes.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the group display effect will be explained. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for group display effect executed by the display CPU 72. Note that the arithmetic processing for group display effect is executed in the arithmetic processing for effect in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the group display effect should be executed.

If it is the timing to perform the decoding process on the moving image data 131 for group display (step S1301: YES), the address of the moving image data 131 for group display in the memory module 74 is grasped (step S1302), and the The address of the work RAM 73 for developing the moving image data 131 for display as decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1303), and decoding designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 72 (step S1304). Further, the value of the same use flag provided in the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1305). The same use flag is a flag for the display CPU 72 to specify whether or not to use the same decoded image data 132 as the previous update timing at one update timing, and if the value of the same use flag is "0". If so, it is specified to use new decoded image data 132, and if the value of the same use flag is "1", it is specified to use the same decoded image data 132 as at the previous update timing. .

When the processes from step S1302 to step S1305 described above are executed, information on the address of the moving image data 131 for group display is set in the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). At the same time, information on the address where the moving image data 131 for group display is to be developed is set, and decoding designation information is also set. When receiving the drawing list, the video decoder 93 of the VDP 76 executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42(a). Specifically, the address of the video image data 131 for group display is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S1401), and the address of the video image data 131 for group display is determined from the information specified in the drawing list. The address of the area where 131 is to be developed as decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1402). Then, the moving image data 131 for group display is read out from the address of the memory module 74 grasped in step S1401, and the moving image data 131 for group display is decoded. Then, each decoded image data 132 resulting from the decoding is written into each area of the address grasped in step S1402 (step S1403).

Returning to the explanation of the calculation process for group display effect (FIG. 41), if a negative determination is made in step S1301 or if the process in step S1305 is executed, whether the value of the same use flag in the work RAM 73 is "0" It is determined whether or not (step S1306). If the value of the same use flag is "0" (step S1306: YES), this means that it is time for an update to use new decoded image data 132. In this case, first, the address of the work RAM 73 where the decoded image data 132 corresponding to the current order of use among the plurality of decoded image data 132 that have been decoded is expanded is determined (step S1307).

Thereafter, the "A, A" coordinates are grasped as coordinate information (step S1308). Here, the coordinate information is information for determining where the center pixel in the image data to be used is placed with respect to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. In the case of "A, B" coordinates, the setting position of the decoded image data 132 with respect to the frame areas 82a, 82b becomes the position shown in FIG. The drawing range is set. Note that the value of A and the value of B are the same for any type of decoded image data 132. Thereafter, after updating and understanding the parameter information other than the coordinate information (step S1309), the same use flag of the work RAM 73 is set to "1" (step S1310). As a result, at the next update timing, the same decoded image data 132 as at the current update timing will be used.

If the same use flag is set to "1" (step S1306: NO), this means that the current update timing is to use the same decoded image data 132 as the previous update timing. In this case, the address of the work RAM 73 where the same decoded image data 132 as the previous one is expanded is determined (step S1311).

Thereafter, the "A-1, B" coordinates are grasped as coordinate information (step S1312). In the case of "A-1, B" coordinates, the set position of the decoded image data 132 with respect to the frame areas 82a, 82b becomes the position shown in FIG. The drawing range is set. Thereafter, after grasping the parameter information other than the coordinate information (step S1313), the same use flag of the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1314). As a result, new decoded image data 132 will be used at the next update timing.

When the processes from step S1307 to step S1310 or from step S1311 to step S1314 are executed, the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605) includes the decoded image data 132 to be used this time. Information on the address of the work RAM 73 where is stored is set, and parameter information to be applied to the decoded image data 132 including coordinate information is also set. When receiving the drawing list, the VDP 76 executes group display setting processing as part of the content understanding processing executed in step S804 of the drawing processing (FIG. 21). FIG. 42(b) is a flowchart showing the setting process for group display.

In the group display setting process, first, information on the address where the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is stored is determined from the drawing list (step S1501). Also, coordinate information to be applied to the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is grasped from the drawing list (step S1502), and other parameter information to be applied to the decoded image data 132 is grasped from the drawing list (step S1503). ).

By executing the setting process for group display as described above, in the subsequent writing process (step S805), the current decoding is performed with the parameters applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. Image data 132 is drawn. In this case, if the coordinate information is "A, B", the range shown in FIG. 40(b) is drawn, and if the coordinate information is "A-1, B", the range shown in FIG. 40(c) is drawn. Ru. Then, by outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 based on the drawing data, a group display effect is executed.

As described above, even if the cycle in which the decoded image data 132 based on the group display moving image data 131 can be used is twice the image update cycle in the symbol display device 41, the same decoded image data 132 At two consecutive update timings in which . This makes it possible to reduce the occurrence of image wobble.

In two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data 132 is used, the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 at the earlier update timing and the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 at the later update timing are the same. The parts are duplicated. This makes it possible to cause a slight change in the image between two consecutive update timings while using the same decoded image data 132.

At two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data 132 is used, each group display character G11 is displayed in the group display image at the rear update timing as opposed to the group display image at the front update timing. In the same decoded image data 132, the range to be drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn is changed so that the image is shifted to the forward side in the moving direction. Thereby, even in a configuration where the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, it is possible to provide continuity to the movement of the group display character G11.

Among the horizontal and vertical directions in the range that can be drawn by each decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification, at least the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group is set wider than the direction in the frame areas 82a and 82b. ing. As a result, even if the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b is changed in accordance with the movement direction of the group display character G11 at two consecutive update timings of the same decoded image data 132, the symbol display device 41 It becomes possible to display the group display character G11 throughout.

The first decoded image data 132 at one usage timing and the second decoded image data 132 at the next usage timing are the two update timings displayed using the decoded image data 132 at one usage timing. The amount of movement of the group display character G11 and the group display between the rear update timing displayed using the first decoded image data 132 and the front update timing displayed using the second decoded image data 132 The amount of movement of the character G11 is set to be the same as that of the character G11. Thereby, it becomes possible to keep the amount of movement of the group display character G11 constant between one update timing and the next update timing, and it becomes possible to smoothly move the group display character G11.

The image displayed by using the same decoded image data 132 at two consecutive update timings is an image in which a large number of group display characters G11 move in the same direction. This makes it less noticeable that the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings.

<Another form of group display performance>
- At least the dimension in the specific direction (specifically, the horizontal dimension) in which the group display characters G11 move as a group among the horizontal and vertical directions in the range that can be drawn by each decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification. The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the size is set to be at least a predetermined movement amount larger than the dimension in the specific direction in the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b, and the decoded image data 132 after decoding is expanded from the size of the initial magnification. Accordingly, at least the dimension in the specific direction may be set to be larger than the dimension in the specific direction in the drawing range of the frame regions 82a, 82b by at least a predetermined movement amount. In this case, although it is necessary to perform size enlargement processing on the decoded image data 132, the display position of the group display character G11 is moved by a predetermined value between two consecutive update timings using the same decoded image data 132. It becomes possible to change the amount.

- The moving direction of the group display character G11 is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction. In this case, at least the vertical dimension in the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification or the decoded image data 132 after the enlargement process from the size at the initial magnification is the vertical dimension in the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b. It is necessary to set the value to be at least a predetermined amount of movement larger than the amount of movement.

- The group display character G11 is not limited to humans, and may be other animals such as cats, fish, and dogs, or may be a pictogram of something other than an animal.

- A configuration in which the same image data is used at multiple consecutive update timings, and the drawing ranges in the frame areas 82a and 82b are different at each update timing, is used when multiple identical group display characters G11 It may be applied to images other than images that move entirely in the direction. For example, the above configuration may be applied when a moving image is displayed in which a large single image exceeding the size of the liquid crystal display section 41a of the symbol display device 41 moves in a predetermined direction.

- Decoding obtained by decoding the moving image data 131, in which the same image data is used at multiple consecutive update timings, and the drawing ranges to the frame areas 82a and 82b are made different at each update timing. It may also be applied to image data other than the image data 132. For example, the above configuration may be applied to still image data stored in the memory module 74 in advance.

<Configuration for displaying validity period>
Next, a configuration for performing a valid period display effect will be described.

FIGS. 43(a) and 43(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the valid period display effect. The valid period display performance is an operation-compatible performance that changes the content of the performance depending on whether the performance operation device 48 is operated or not during the validity period in which the operation of the performance operation device 48 is activated. This is an effect in which the validity period is displayed on the symbol display device 41 when it is performed.

In the validity period display performance, an operation promotion image G21 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 to enable the player to recognize that it is a situation in which the performance operation device 48 should be operated. A valid period image G22 is displayed to allow the player to recognize the remaining period during which the operation will be valid. Specifically, as the operation promotion image G21, an image representing the production operation device 48 is displayed, and an image that makes it possible to recognize that the production operation device 48 is being operated is displayed. The specific display content is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the situation is such that the device 48 should be operated.

As the validity period image G22, a frame image G23, a band image G24, and a blinking image G25 are displayed. The frame image G23 is an image for displaying the frame portion of the validity period image G22, and is displayed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular frame. The band image G24 is displayed within the frame formed by the frame image G23 so as to extend to the right with the left end of the frame as the base end, and furthermore, as shown in FIG. 43(a), a validity period display effect is started. 43(b), the frame image G23 is displayed so as to fill the entire frame, and as the remaining validity period decreases, the right end position is changed as shown in FIG. 43(b). It is displayed so that it gradually moves toward the left end and the filled range within the frame formed by the frame image G23 becomes narrower. The blinking image G25 is displayed so as to be added to the leading edge position of the band image G24, and is displayed so as to move in accordance with the leading edge position when the leading edge position of the band image G24 gradually moves to the left end. Furthermore, the entire blinking image G25 is displayed as if it is blinking.

Here, in the case of a configuration in which a blinking display is performed while the blinking image G25 moves in accordance with the movement of the band image G24, data for controlling the display of the movement of the band image G24 and data for controlling the blinking display of the blinking image G25 are used. data are set together by one animation data, etc., and if one of the moving speed of the tip of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed, the other will also be changed accordingly. It ends up. A case in which this event occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 44. FIG. 44(a) shows how the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 changes, and FIG. 44(b) shows how the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 changes.

By starting the validity period display effect, at timing t1, the leading end of the band image G24 starts to be displayed moving as shown in FIG. 44(a), and blinks as shown in FIG. 44(b). The blinking display of image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1. Then, from the timing t1 to the timing t5, the moving display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking period Te1 are performed.

Thereafter, at timing t5, the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is changed to a second speed faster than the first speed, as shown in FIG. 44(a). The change in speed is performed by controlling the display by referring to data in a predetermined order among the reference data set in chronological order in the data for display controlling the movement of the band image G24, and then controlling the display by referring to data in a specific order after that. This is done by shortening the time required to perform display control with reference to . Specifically, when pointer information set as a serial number and information on the content of a task are set in one-to-one correspondence to the pointer information as data for display control, a predetermined After controlling the display of the band image G24 with reference to the information on the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information of the order, the information on the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information of a specific order that is an order after the predetermined order is displayed. The moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is changed by changing the number of times the image update timing occurs before the display control of the band image G24 is performed with reference to . In this case, if data for controlling the display of the band image G24 and data for controlling the display of the blinking image G25 are set together in the display control data, the leading end of the band image G24 may be moved. In order to change the speed, display control is performed by referring to information on the contents of tasks corresponding to pointer information in a predetermined order, and then display control is performed by referring to information on the contents of tasks that correspond to pointer information in a predetermined order. If the number of image update timings that occur before display control is performed with reference to content information is varied, the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 will also be changed accordingly.

In other words, when the moving speed of the tip of the band image G24 is changed from the first speed to the second speed at timing t5 in FIG. 44(a), the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is changed as shown in FIG. 44(b). Also, the first blinking period Te1 is changed to the second blinking period Te2. This is the same when changing the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25. If the data for each display control is set together, changing the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 will cause the tip of the band image G24 to change. Movement speed will also change.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the data for controlling the display of the band image G24 and the data for controlling the display of the flashing image G25 are not provided together. Separately provided. Hereinafter, the contents of the data stored in advance in the memory module 74 for executing the validity period display effect will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 45.

As data for performing the validity period display effect, the memory module 74 includes frame display image data 141 for displaying the frame image G23 and band display image data 141 for displaying the band image G24, as shown in FIG. Image data 142, lighting image data 143 for displaying the blinking image G25 in the lighting state, and light-off image data 144 for displaying the blinking image G25 in the lights-out state are stored in advance. By drawing the frame display image data 141 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, it becomes possible to display the frame image G23 on the symbol display device 41.

The band display image data 142 is set to a size that can fill the entire frame of the frame image G23 at the initial magnification, and is set so that the left edge of the band image G24 matches the left edge of the frame of the frame image G23. By setting the coordinate information for the frame areas 82a and 82b of the band display image data 142 at the initial magnification, the band image G24 is displayed so as to fill the entire frame of the frame image G23. Then, while gradually reducing the horizontal size of the band display image data 142 from the initial magnification, the band display image of the size is adjusted such that the left end of the band image G24 matches the left end of the frame of the frame image G23. By setting the coordinate information for the frame areas 82a and 82b of the data 142, an image in which the leading end of the band image G24 gradually moves toward the left end is displayed.

The image data for lighting 143 and the image data for turning off 144 are both image data for displaying the blinking image G25, and the images displayed by these image data for lighting 143 and image data for turning off 144 have the same initial magnification. Size and shape. However, the lighting image data 143 displays a relatively bright blinking image G25, and the turning-off image data 144 displays a relatively dark blinking image G25. Only one of these image data for turning on 143 and image data for turning off 144 is used at each image update timing, and the image data 143 and 144 to be used has a blinking image G25 at the tip of the band image G24. Coordinate information for frame areas 82a and 82b is set so that they are displayed overlappingly from the front side. Then, by alternately repeating the period in which the image data for lighting 143 is used and the period in which the image data for turning off 144 is used, the blinking image G25 in the lit state and the blinking image G25 in the off state are displayed. The display will be repeated alternately. This makes it possible to display the blinking image G25 as if the light is blinking.

In addition to various image data 141 to 144, the memory module 74 stores in advance a band display table 145 and a blinking display table 146. The band display table 145 is data for executing display control of the band image G24, and specifically, the horizontal size information of the band display image data 142 and the position information of the tip of the band image G24 are determined. This is the data obtained. The blinking display table 146 is data for executing display control of the blinking image G25, and specifically, the image data to be used for the blinking image G25 is determined among the lighting image data 143 and the lights-off image data 144. This is the data obtained. These band display table 145 and blinking display table 146 will be explained in detail.

FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the band display table 145. As shown in FIG. 46(a), pointer information is set in the band display table 145 so as to be a sequential number, and the horizontal size of the band display image data 142 is set in correspondence with each pointer information. A combination of information and positional information of the leading end of the band image G24 is set. By reducing the size of the band display image data 142 by the magnification of the size information corresponding to the pointer information being referenced, the horizontal display range of the band image G24 becomes narrower. The band display image data 142 is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b so that the left end of the band image G24 overlaps the left end of the frame of the frame image G23, so that the leading end of the band image G24 gradually moves to the left end. An image moving towards the target will be displayed. Further, the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information that is the reference target is the tip portion of the band image G24 when the band display image data 142 is reduced and drawn at the magnification of the size information corresponding to the pointer information. corresponds to the position of Then, the image data to be used out of the lighting image data 143 and the lights-out image data 144 is drawn at a position corresponding to this tip position information, so that it overlaps the tip of the band image G24 from the front side. In this way, the blinking image G25 is displayed.

When the display control of the band image G24 is performed so that the leading end of the band image G24 moves at the first speed, one The same size information and tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are referenced. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information in the next order at the update timing of the next image with respect to the image update timing for the obi side specified number of times, and the size information and tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are changed to the obi side specified number of times. It is referenced over the number of image update timings. In this way, by updating the pointer information every time the band side specific number of image update timings have elapsed, the band image G24 is displayed so that the leading end moves at the first speed, and the leading end moves at the first speed. The blinking images G25 are displayed so as to overlap from the front side.

On the other hand, when the display control of the band image G24 is performed such that the leading end of the band image G24 moves at a second speed faster than the first speed, the band side predetermined number of times ( For example, the same size information and tip position information corresponding to one pointer information are referred to over two image update timings. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information in the next order at the update timing of the next image for the belt side predetermined number of times of image update timing, and the size information and tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are updated to the belt side predetermined number of times. It is referenced over the number of image update timings. In this way, by updating the pointer information every time the band side image update timing has elapsed a predetermined number of times, the band image G24 is displayed such that the tip portion moves at the second speed faster than the first speed. At the same time, a blinking image G25 is displayed so as to overlap from the front side at the tip thereof.

FIG. 46(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the blinking display table 146. As shown in FIG. 46(b), pointer information is set in the blinking display table 146 so as to be serial numbers, and image data for turning on 143 and image data for turning off 144 correspond to each pointer information. Among them, the image data to be used is set. The image data 143, 144 that is set as the target of use in the pointer information that is the reference target is the tip position information that corresponds to the pointer information that is the reference target in the band display table 145 at the update timing of the image. By being drawn at the position, the flashing image G25 in a state corresponding to the image data 143, 144 to be used is displayed superimposed on the leading end of the band image G24 from the front side.

In the blinking display table 146, lighting image data 143 is set as image data to be used for pointer information from "0" to "9", and lighting image data 143 is set for pointer information from "10" to "19". In this case, the image data for turning off 144 is set as the image data to be used. When display control is performed using the blinking display table 146, the pointer information to be referenced is incremented by 1 each time the pointer information is updated, and the value of the pointer information after the increment by 1 is the maximum value. 19'', the value of the pointer information of the reference object is cleared to ``0''. In other words, while the valid period display effect is being performed, the pointer information to be referenced in the blinking display table 146 has a reference period starting from "0" and ending with "19", with one reference period. will be repeated multiple times. This makes it possible to suppress the amount of data in the blinking display table 146.

When the display control of the blinking image G25 is performed so that the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 becomes the first blinking cycle Te1, the blinking image G25 is displayed at once over the image update timing of a specified number of blinking times, which is a plurality of times (for example, two times). The image data 143 and 144 of the same target of use corresponding to the pointer information are referred to. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information of the next order at the update timing of the next image with respect to the update timing of the image of the blinking side specific number of times, and the image data 143, 144 of the same target of use corresponding to the pointer information is updated. is referenced over the blinking-side image update timing for a specific number of times. In this way, the pointer information is updated every time the flashing-side specific number of image update timings elapse, so that the first flashing image G25, which is displayed so as to overlap from the front end of the band image G24, A blinking display is performed at a blinking period Te1.

On the other hand, when the display control of the blinking image G25 is performed such that the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 becomes the second blinking cycle Te2, the blinking side predetermined number of times (for example, once) is smaller than the blinking side specific number of times. The same image data 143 and 144 to be used corresponding to one pointer information are referenced throughout the image update timing. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information of the next order at the update timing of the next image with respect to the update timing of the blinking side predetermined number of images, and the image data 143, 144 of the same target of use corresponding to the pointer information is updated. is referenced over a predetermined number of image update timings on the blinking side. In this way, the pointer information is updated every time the flashing-side predetermined number of image update timings elapse, so that the second flashing image G25, which is displayed so as to overlap from the front side with the tip of the band image G24, is updated. A blinking display is performed at a blinking period Te2.

A manner in which the validity period display effect is executed using both the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 47. FIGS. 47(a1) and 47(a2) show the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24, and FIGS. 47(b1) and 47(b2) show the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25.

First, with reference to FIGS. 47(a1) and 47(b1), a case will be described in which the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is changed under a situation where the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is constant.

As the validity period display effect is started, at timing t11, the leading end of the band image G24 starts to be displayed moving as shown in FIG. 47(a1), and blinks as shown in FIG. 47(b1). The blinking display of image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1. Then, from the timing t11 to the timing t15, the moving display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking period Te1 are performed.

Thereafter, at timing t15, the number of times the image update timing occurs until the pointer information is updated in the band display table 145 is changed to the band side predetermined number of times, which is smaller than the band side specific number of times. Then, as shown in FIG. 47(a1), the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is changed to a second speed faster than the first speed. On the other hand, the number of times the image update timing occurs until the pointer information is updated in the blinking display table 146 is maintained at the specified number of times on the blinking side, as shown in FIG. 47(b1). The blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 47(a2) and 47(b2), a case will be described in which the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed under a situation where the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is constant.

As the validity period display effect is started, at timing t21, the leading end of the band image G24 starts to be displayed moving as shown in FIG. 47(a2), and blinks as shown in FIG. 47(b2). The blinking display of image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1. Then, from the timing t21 to the timing t25, the moving display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking period Te1 are performed.

Thereafter, at timing t25, the number of times the image update timing occurs until the pointer information is updated in the blinking display table 146 is changed to a blinking-side predetermined number of times that is smaller than the blinking-side specific number of times. Then, as shown in FIG. 47(b2), the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed to a second blinking cycle Te2, which is shorter than the first blinking cycle Te1. On the other hand, the number of times the image update timing occurs until the pointer information is updated in the band display table 145 is maintained at the band side specific number of times, as shown in FIG. 47(a2). The moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is maintained at the first speed.

As described above, the band display table 145 is provided as data for display-controlling the display content of the band image G24, and the blinking display table 146 is provided as data for display-controlling the display content of the blinking image G25. By providing this, it is possible to change one of the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 without changing the other. As a result, it becomes possible to independently change the moving speed of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, and it becomes possible to suitably realize diversification of the display mode of the validity period display effect. .

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, the display contents of the band image G24 and the flashing image G25 are associated with the degree of expectation that a special performance corresponding to the operation will be executed when the performance operation device 48 is operated during the valid period. It is being Specifically, the first display content is a case where the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is maintained at the first speed until the end, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1 until the end. The second display content is a case where the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed midway and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1 until the end, and the second display content of the band image G24 is When the third display content is a case in which the moving speed of the tip portion is maintained at the first speed until the end and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed to the second blinking cycle Te2 midway through, the second display content is The expectation level is set to be higher for the third display content than for the first display content, and the expectation level is higher for the third display content than for the second display content. As a result, by checking the display contents of the band image G24 and the flashing image G25, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation that a special performance corresponding to the operation will be executed when the performance operation device 48 is operated. , it becomes possible to increase the player's attention to the effective period display performance.

Furthermore, when the performance operation device 48 is operated, a special performance corresponding to the operation is executed, whereas when the performance operation device 48 is operated, the special performance corresponding to the operation is not executed. The probability of occurrence of the special performance corresponding to the operation is set so that the expectation of a jackpot result in the corresponding game round is higher than that in the case of the corresponding game. In this case, as described above, since the display contents of the band image G24 and the flashing image G25 are associated with the degree of expectation for execution of the operation-compatible special effect, the display contents of the band image G24 and the flashing image G25 are also associated with the degree of expectation of the jackpot result. This means that the From this point of view as well, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the validity period display performance.

In addition, it may be configured such that when the performance operation device 48 is operated during the valid period, any one of a plurality of types of operation-compatible performances including the first operation-compatible performance and the second operation-compatible performance is executed; in this case, , the display contents of the band image G24 and the flashing image G25 may be associated with the degree of expectation of execution of a predetermined operation corresponding effect.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the validity period display effect will be explained. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the calculation process for displaying the validity period executed by the display CPU 72. Note that the calculation process for displaying the valid period is executed in the calculation process for effect in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the valid period display effect should be executed.

If it is the start timing of the validity period display performance (step S1601: YES), the band display table 145 and the flashing display table 146 are read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S1602). Then, as a process for setting the moving speed of the band image G24, the update cycle of pointer information in the band display table 145 is set to the update cycle corresponding to the first speed (step S1603), and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is set. As a process, the update cycle of pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is set to the update cycle corresponding to the first blink cycle Te1 (step S1604).

After that, among the image data for turning on 143 and the image data for turning off 144, the image data to be used that is set corresponding to the first pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is used for displaying the blinking image G25 this time. It is grasped as image data (step S1613), and the frame display image data 141 and band display image data 142 are grasped as image data to be used this time (step S1614). Thereafter, the size information set in the band display table 145 corresponding to the first pointer information is grasped as size information to be applied to the band display image data 142 (step S1615), and the band display table 145 The tip position information set in correspondence with the first pointer information is grasped as the position information for drawing the image data to be used this time among the image data for lighting 143 and the image data for turning off 144 (step S1616). , further grasps parameter information other than these (step S1617).

When the calculation process for displaying the validity period is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605) includes the image data for lighting 143 and the image data for turning off 144. Among them, the image data to be used that is set in correspondence with the first pointer information in the blinking display table 146, the frame display image data 141, and the band display image data 142 are set as drawing targets. Further, the parameter information obtained in steps S1615 to S1617 is set in the drawing list.

If it is not the start timing of the valid period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether it is the timing to update the pointer information on the band image G24 side (step S1605). When the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is set to the first speed, and when the number of times the image update timing has occurred since the pointer information of the band display table 145 was last updated is the band side specific number of times. If it is determined that it is time to update the pointer information on the band image G24 side, and the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is set to the second speed, the pointer information in the band display table 145 is updated last time. When the number of occurrences of the update timing of the image from G24 is the predetermined number of times on the band side, it is determined that it is the timing to update the pointer information on the band image G24 side. If it is time to update the pointer information on the band image G24 side (step S1605: YES), the pointer information is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced in the band display table 145 is incremented by 1 (step S1606). ).

If it is not the start timing of the valid period display performance (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether it is the timing to update the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side (step S1607). When the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is set to the first blinking cycle Te1, and when the number of occurrences of the image update timing since the pointer information of the blinking display table 146 was last updated is the blinking side specific number of times. If it is determined that it is time to update the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is set to the second blinking cycle Te2, the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is updated since the last update. When the number of occurrences of the image update timing is a predetermined number of times on the blinking side, it is determined that it is the timing to update the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side. If it is time to update the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side (step S1607: YES), the pointer information is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced in the blinking display table 146 is incremented by 1 (step S1608). ).

If it is not the timing to start the validity period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether it is the timing to change the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 (step S1609). Whether or not to change the movement speed and, if the movement speed is changed, the change timing is determined at the start of the current effective period display effect, and the display CPU 72 determines whether or not the timing is determined at the start. Determine. In addition, as a method for specifying the change timing, the number of occurrences of the image update timing that is the above change timing is determined at the start of the current effective period display effect, and the number of occurrences of the determined image update timing is determined. A method can be considered to identify that it is the timing for the above change when the change occurs. If it is the timing to change the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 (step S1609: YES), the update cycle of the pointer information in the band display table 145 is set to the second speed as a process for setting the moving speed of the band image G24. The corresponding update cycle is set (step S1610).

If it is not the start timing of the valid period display performance (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether it is the timing to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 (step S1611). The presence or absence of a change in the blinking cycle and the change timing when changing the blinking cycle are determined at the start of the current effective period display effect, and the display CPU 72 determines whether the timing is determined at the start. Determine. In addition, as a method for specifying the change timing, the number of occurrences of the image update timing that is the above change timing is determined at the start of the current effective period display effect, and the number of occurrences of the determined image update timing is determined. One possible method is to specify that it is time for the above change when the change occurs. If it is the timing to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 (step S1611: YES), as a setting process for the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, the update cycle of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is made to correspond to the second blinking cycle Te2. The update period is set to (step S1612).

After that, among the image data for turning on 143 and the image data for turning off 144, the image data to be used that is set in correspondence with the pointer information of the current reference target in the blinking display table 146 is displayed, and the blinking image G25 is displayed this time. The image data is grasped as image data for the purpose of (step S1613). In this case, if the process in step S1608 has not been executed in the current processing time, the image data corresponding to the pointer information that was the reference target in the previous processing time is grasped, and the process in step S1608 in the current processing time is grasped. If the process is being executed, the image data corresponding to the pointer information that has been newly updated and has become a reference target is grasped. Furthermore, the frame display image data 141 and band display image data 142 are grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1614).

Thereafter, the size information set in the band display table 145 corresponding to the pointer information of the current reference target is grasped as size information to be applied to the band display image data 142 (step S1615), and the band display The tip position information set in correspondence with the pointer information of the current reference target in the table 145 is used as the position information for drawing the image data to be used this time among the image data for turning on 143 and the image data for turning off 144. grasp. In this case, if the process of step S1606 is not executed in the current processing round, the size information and tip position information corresponding to the pointer information that was the reference target in the previous processing round are grasped, and the current processing round If the process in step S1606 is being executed, the size information and tip position information corresponding to the pointer information that has been newly updated and has become a reference target is grasped. Further, parameter information other than these is grasped (step S1617).

When the calculation process for displaying the validity period is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605) includes the image data for lighting 143 and the image data for turning off 144. Among them, the image data to be used that is set in correspondence with the pointer information of the current reference target in the blinking display table 146, the frame display image data 141, and the band display image data 142 are set as drawing targets. . Further, the parameter information obtained in steps S1615 to S1617 is set in the drawing list.

As described above, the band display table 145 is provided as data for display-controlling the display content of the band image G24, and the blinking display table 146 is provided as data for display-controlling the display content of the blinking image G25. By doing so, it is possible to change one of the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 while not changing the other. As a result, it becomes possible to independently change the moving speed of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, and it becomes possible to suitably realize diversification of the display mode of the validity period display effect. .

In particular, when changing the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24, all that is required is to change the update cycle of the pointer information in the band display table 145. Table 145 is used. Similarly, when changing the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, only the update cycle of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is changed, so the same blinking display table 146 is used regardless of the blinking cycle. used. For example, in a configuration in which data for controlling the display of the band image G24 and data for controlling the display of the flashing image G25 are set together in one table, the tip of the band image G24 is If one of the moving speed and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is to be changed without affecting the other, it will be necessary to separately prepare a corresponding table, and the table will not be able to handle the combination of the moving speed and the blinking period. Several types are required. In this case, the storage capacity of the memory module 74 required to store the table in advance increases. On the other hand, since the same band display table 145 is used regardless of the moving speed and the same blink display table 146 is used regardless of the blinking period, the memory module It becomes possible to realize diversification of the display mode of the validity period display effect while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the 74.

In the band display table 145, tip position information corresponding to information on the position where the image data to be used among the image data for lighting 143 and the image data for turning off 144 is set is set. As a result, information for arranging the blinking image G25 at the position of the leading end of the band image G24 is set in association with the information that determines the display mode of the band image G24. Therefore, in a configuration in which the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 are provided separately, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for adjusting the relative position between the band image G24 and the blinking image G25. .

<Another form of valid period display performance>
- The pointer information of the blinking display table 146 is only "0" and "1", one of these "0" and "1" corresponds to the image data for turning on 143, and the other corresponds to the image data for turning off. It is also possible to adopt a configuration compatible with 144. In this case, by adjusting the update cycle of the pointer information between "0" and "1", the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is set to either the first blinking cycle Te1 or the second blinking cycle Te2. becomes possible. According to this configuration, it is possible to further reduce the amount of data in the blinking display table 146.

- When the moving speed of the tip of the band image G24 is the first speed, 1 is added to the pointer information of the reference target in the band display table 145 at each image update timing, and the tip of the band image G24 is moved at the first speed. When the moving speed is the second speed, a configuration may be adopted in which two or more values are added to the pointer information of the reference target in the band display table 145 at each image update timing. In other words, the configuration may be such that the value added to the pointer information of the reference object in the band display table 145 is different for each image update timing between the first speed and the second speed. Even with this configuration, it is possible to change the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 between the first speed and the second speed while using the same band display table 145.

- When the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1, 1 is added to the pointer information of the reference target in the blinking display table 146 at each update timing of the image, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is In the case of the second blinking cycle Te2, a configuration may be adopted in which a value of 2 or more is added to the pointer information of the reference target in the blinking display table 146 at each update timing of the image. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the value added to the pointer information of the reference target in the blinking display table 146 is different for each image update timing between the first blinking cycle Te1 and the second blinking cycle Te2. Even with this configuration, it is possible to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 between the first blinking cycle Te1 and the second blinking cycle Te2 while using the same blinking display table 146.

- The image data for displaying the blinking image G25 is not limited to two types, but may be three or more types, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is not limited to two types, but may be three or more types. There may be. Further, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types.

- Instead of the configuration in which the blinking display table 146 is used to determine the type of image data used to display the blinking image G25, the blinking image G25 can be displayed without using a table through processing on the program. A configuration may also be adopted in which the type of image data used for the image data is determined.

- In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the size of the band image G24 changes over time, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the shape and color of the band image G24 changes over time. In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the type of image data for displaying the blinking image G25 changes over time, at least one of the size, shape, and color of the blinking image G25 changes over time. It is also possible to have a configuration that changes depending on the time.

<Configuration for performing number display performance>
Next, a configuration for performing a number display effect will be explained.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the number display effect. The number display performance is a performance in which the number of game balls that the player has acquired since the start of the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode (hereinafter referred to as the number of acquired balls) is displayed on the symbol display device 41. . The number of acquired balls is the difference between the total number of game balls paid out to the player since the start of the open/close execution mode and the total number of game balls fired into the gaming area PA since the start of the open/close execution mode. It is about. In addition, the display of the number of acquired pieces by the number display effect starts when the opening period starts in the opening/closing execution mode, and when an opportunity to pay out game balls to the player occurs in the opening/closing execution mode, and when the game balls are launched. If this is done, the displayed content will be changed accordingly. In detail with respect to FIG. 49, in a situation where the display performance for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed on the symbol display device 41, the number display image G31 is displayed on the edge side of the symbol display device 41. By checking the number display image G31, the player can grasp the number of game balls acquired in the opening/closing execution mode.

FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing a number display effect.

Winning detection sensors 151 to 154, a launched ball detection sensor 155, and a return ball detection sensor 156 are electrically connected to the MPU 52 of the main control device 50. The winning detection sensors 151 to 154 are sensors for detecting the occurrence of a winning that triggers the payout of game balls. A plurality of types are provided in one-to-one correspondence. The MPU 52 of the main control device 50 receives detection signals from each of the plurality of types of winning detection sensors 151 to 154. When the MPU 52 receives a signal from any of the winning detection sensors 151 to 154 that corresponds to the occurrence of a game ball entering the corresponding ball entering section, the MPU 52 sends out the number of game balls corresponding to the winning. A prize ball command for instructing payout is transmitted to the payout control device 55.

The payout control device 55 includes a payout control board 158 on which an MPU 159a is mounted. The MPU 159a includes a ROM 159b that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 159a, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 159b. It has a built-in RAM 159c, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. A payout device 56 is electrically connected to the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55, and when the MPU 159a receives a prize ball command from the main control device 50, it drives a payout motor 56a provided in the payout device 56. By starting to output the signal, the payout of game balls is started. Then, when the number of game balls to be paid out, which is measured based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 56b provided in the payout device 56, corresponds to the number information set in the prize ball command, the MPU 159a determines that Then, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 56a is stopped to stop the payout of game balls. Furthermore, each time the payout detection sensor 56b detects one game ball, the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55 sends a payout completion signal to the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 indicating that the payout of one game ball has been completed. Send.

The launched ball detection sensor 155 is provided in a game ball launch mechanism 161 that launches a game ball toward the gaming area PA when the launch operation device 28 is operated. FIG. 51 is a front view of the inner frame 13 showing the lower area of the inner frame 13 in an enlarged manner. The game ball firing mechanism 161 is provided below the game board 24 on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The game ball launch mechanism 161 includes a launch rail 162 that extends toward a guide rail formed on the game board 24, and an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launch rail 162 from the upper tray 46a toward the guide rail. It is equipped with a certain solenoid 163 and a holding member 164 for holding one game ball B1 supplied onto the firing rail 162 at a position where the solenoid 163 can launch it. When the firing operation device 28 is operated, a drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 163 every time a predetermined firing cycle (for example, 60 msec) occurs, and the solenoid 163 launches a game ball.

In the game ball launch mechanism 161, the launch ball detection sensor 155 is provided to detect a game ball passing through the most downstream position of the launch rail 162. In other words, the launched ball detection sensor 155 is provided to detect a game ball launched from the most downstream part of the launch rail 162 toward the guide rail, and the game ball detected by the launch ball detection sensor 155 is placed on the launch rail. 162 will not flow backwards.

The shot ball detection sensor 155 is an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and in a situation where the game ball B1 is present in the detection range, it outputs a HI level signal as a shot ball detection signal and detects the game ball. In a situation where B1 does not exist within the detection range, a LOW level signal is output as a shot ball non-detection signal. Therefore, the launched ball detection sensor 155 makes it possible to specify the number of game balls that have passed through the most downstream position of the launch rail 162 and have been launched toward the guide rail. Note that the relationship between these HI and LOW may be reversed. Further, the launched ball detection sensor 155 is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be a sensor using another detection method.

The return ball detection sensor 156 is provided in a return ball collection unit 165 that collects game balls that were fired from the most downstream part of the launch rail 162 toward the guide rail but flowed back down the guide rail without reaching the game area PA. It is being The return ball recovery section 165 is formed in a region created by laterally separating the guide rail and the firing rail 162 on the front surface of the inner frame 13, and exists between both rails. The return ball recovery section 165 is formed as a space having a predetermined depth, and the space is opened upward. The return ball collection section 165 is communicated with the lower tray 47a, and the game ball B1 collected by the return ball collection section 165 is discharged to the lower tray 47a by its own weight.

In the return ball collection section 165, the return ball detection sensor 156 is provided to detect a game ball passing through the most downstream position of the return ball collection section 165. In other words, the return ball detection sensor 156 is provided so as to detect the game ball flowing down from the most downstream part of the return ball collecting section 165 toward the lower tray 47a.

The return ball detection sensor 156 is an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and in a situation where a game ball is present in the detection range, it outputs a HI level signal as a return ball detection signal, and detects when the game ball is detected. In a situation where the ball does not exist within the detection range, a LOW level signal is output as a return ball non-detection signal. Therefore, the return ball detection sensor 156 makes it possible to specify the number of game balls collected by the return ball collection section 165. Note that the relationship between these HI and LOW may be reversed. Further, the return ball detection sensor 156 is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be a sensor using another detection method.

Returning to the explanation with reference to FIG. 50, the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 receives the result of receiving the payout completion signal from the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55, the result of receiving the shot ball detection signal from the shot ball detection sensor 155, and the return ball. A command corresponding to each of the reception results of the return ball detection signal from the detection sensor 156 is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 62. Specifically regarding these commands, the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 measures the number of times the payout completion signal is received, and if the payout completion signal is received 10 times, it is determined that the payout of 10 game balls has been completed. A prize ball completion command in which information indicating is set is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 62. In addition, if the next payout completion signal is not received even after a reception standby period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the last reception of the payout completion signal, the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 transmits the prize ball completion command the previous time. After that, even if the number of times the payout completion signal is received has not reached 10 times, a prize ball completion command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 62. Information indicating the number of payout completion signals received since the previous transmission of the prize ball completion command is set in this prize ball completion command. Further, when the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 receives a shot ball detection signal from the shot ball detection sensor 155, it sends a shooting execution command indicating that one game ball has been shot to the sound-light side MPU 62. However, when a return ball detection signal is received from the return ball detection sensor 156, a return ball generation command indicating that one return ball has been generated is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 62.

When the sound/light side MPU 62 is in the opening/closing execution mode, each time it receives a prize ball completion command, a firing execution command, and a return ball generation command from the MPU 52 of the main controller 50, it is possible to display the number of acquired balls. Perform measurement processing. Then, a measurement command corresponding to the result of the measurement processing is transmitted to the display CPU 72 of the display control device 70 when the timing for transmitting the measurement command comes. The display CPU 72 displays the number display image G31 on the symbol display device 41 with the content of the received measurement command reflected.

Hereinafter, the processing contents executed by the sound and light side MPU 62 and the display CPU 72 in order to perform the number display effect will be explained. First, the contents of the processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 62 will be explained.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the counting process executed by the sound-light side MPU 62. Note that the counting process is executed in the table setting process of step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

When the prize ball completion command is received in the opening/closing execution mode (step S1701 and step S1702: YES), the measurement counter 166 provided in the sound-light side RAM 64 is set to the prize ball completion command received this time. A value corresponding to the number of game balls that have been paid out is added (step S1703). The measurement counter 166 is a counter used to measure the number of pieces obtained from the transmission timing of one measurement command to the transmission timing of the next measurement command in the opening/closing execution mode. For example, when receiving a prize ball completion command indicating that the payout of 10 game balls has been completed, a value of "10" is added to the measurement counter 166, indicating that the payout of 3 game balls has been completed. When a prize ball completion command indicating ``3'' is received, a value of "3" is added to the measurement counter 166.

When the firing execution command is received in the opening/closing execution mode (step S1701 and step S1704: YES), "1" is subtracted from the measurement counter 166 (step S1705). The measurement counter 166 is configured to be able to measure both positive and negative values. For example, when the value of the measurement counter 166 is "5" and a firing execution command is received, the measurement counter 166 is configured to be able to measure both positive and negative values. The value of the measurement counter 166 becomes "4", and if the firing execution command is received when the value of the measurement counter 166 is "0", the value of the measurement counter 166 becomes "-1". Further, when a return ball generation command is received in the opening/closing execution mode (step S1701 and step S1706: YES), "1" is added to the value of the measurement counter 166 (step S1707).

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the measurement command output setting process executed by the sound-light side MPU 62. Note that the counting process is executed in the command selection process of step S302 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

In the measurement command output setting process, first, it is determined whether it is the measurement command output timing (step S1801). The output timing of the measurement command occurs when the command output cycle elapses in the opening/closing execution mode. The command output cycle is set as a cycle longer than the update cycle of the number display image G31, and more specifically, the command output cycle is set as a cycle longer than the update cycle of the number display image G31, which is twice the update cycle of the number display image G31. The cycle is set to be shorter than the cycle multiplied by three. Note that the update cycle of the number display image G31 is set as a cycle longer than 20 msec, which is the update cycle of one frame of images, and is set, for example, to 300 msec. However, the update timing of the number display image G31 that occurs when the update cycle of the number display image G31 has elapsed corresponds to the update timing of the image for one frame.

If it is the output timing of the measurement command (step S1801: YES), the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to the increase in the number of pieces obtained by determining whether the value of the measurement counter 166 is greater than or equal to "0". It is determined whether or not (step S1802). If the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to an increase in the number of pieces acquired (step S1802: YES), an increase measurement command is read from the sound-light side ROM 63, and the measurement counter Information corresponding to the current value of 166 is set (step S1803). Then, the increase measurement command after setting the information is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S1804). As a result, the display CPU 72 specifies that the number of acquired items has increased, and also specifies the increased number of items.

If it is the output timing of the measurement command and the value of the measurement counter 166 is less than "0" (step S1801: YES, step S1802: NO), the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to a decrease in the number of pieces acquired. It means doing. In this case, the measurement command for reduction is read from the sound-light side ROM 63, and information corresponding to the current value of the measurement counter 166 is set for the read measurement command for reduction (step S1805). Then, the reduction measurement command after setting the information is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S1806). As a result, the display CPU 72 specifies that the number of acquired pieces has decreased, and also specifies the number of pieces corresponding to the decrease.

When the process of step S1804 or step S1806 is executed, the value of the measurement counter 166 is cleared to "0" (step S1807). As a result, the information on the number of acquired pieces that was set in the measurement command is erased from the measurement counter 166.

Next, the contents of the processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be explained. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the measurement command corresponding processing executed by the display CPU 72. Note that the measurement command corresponding process is executed in the command corresponding process of step S603 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18).

When an increase measurement command is received from the sound-light side MPU 62 (step S1901: YES), the reflection counter 167 provided in the work RAM 73 stores the increase in the number of acquisitions set in the increase measurement command received this time. A value corresponding to the number is added (step S1902). The reflection counter 167 is a counter for the display CPU 72 to specify the number of increase/decrease that should be reflected in the future with respect to the display of the acquired number currently displayed as the number display image G31. When the measurement command for reduction is received from the sound-light side MPU 62 (step S1903: YES), the value of the reflection counter 167 corresponds to the decrease in the number of obtained pieces set in the measurement command for reduction received this time. The value is subtracted (step S1904).

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing calculation processing for measurement display executed by the display CPU 72. Note that the calculation process for measurement display is executed in the calculation process for performance in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19).

When it is time to update the number display image G31 (step S2001: YES), if the value of the reflection counter 167 is less than 0 (step S2002: YES), the subtraction process of the total counter 168 provided in the work RAM 73 is performed. Execute (step S2003). The total counter 168 is a counter that determines the value of the acquired number to be displayed as the number display image G31, and the value stored in the total counter 168 is displayed as the number display image G31. Therefore, as the value of the totalizing counter 168 changes, the content of the number display image G31 changes accordingly. In the subtraction process of the total counter 168, the value corresponding to the decrease in the number of acquisitions set in the current reflection counter 167 is subtracted from the current value of the total counter 168. In other words, if the value of the reflection counter 167 is a value corresponding to a decrease in the number of acquired pieces, regardless of the value, all the values set in the reflection counter 167 corresponding to the decrease in the number of acquired pieces are used for the total. This is reflected in the value of the counter 168. As a result, when the number of acquired pieces decreases, the entire decrease is reflected in the display of the number of acquired pieces in the number display image G31. Thereafter, the value of the reflection counter 167 is cleared to "0" (step S2004).

If it is the update timing of the number display image G31 and the value of the reflection counter 167 is "0" or more (step S2001: YES, step S2002: NO), whether the value of the reflection counter 167 is 1 or more. (Step S2005). If the value of the reflection counter 167 is not 1 or more (step S2005: NO), it means that the value of the reflection counter 167 is "0". In this case, the total counter 168 does not increase or decrease at the current update timing of the number display image G31. Therefore, the displayed content of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is maintained as it is.

If the value of the reflection counter 167 is greater than or equal to 1 (step S2005: YES), it is determined whether the value of the reflection counter 167 is greater than or equal to the first reference value (step S2006). Here, when increasing the acquired number displayed in the number display image G31, the value to which the acquired number is added at one update timing of the number display image G31 is limited to a predetermined limit value. As a result, when the number of acquired pieces increases, the period in which the number of acquired pieces is updated to increase in the number display image G31 can be easily continued for a long time, and the number of acquired pieces increases in the opening/closing execution mode. This makes it easier to give players the impression that

Multiple types of values are set for addition of the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31, and specifically, the first addition target value "5" is set as the value to be added. , "3" is the second addition target value smaller than the first addition target value, and "1" is the third addition target value smaller than the second addition target value. If the value of the reflection counter 167 is larger than the value of "12" preset as the first reference value, "5" is selected as the value to be added, and the value of the reflection counter 167 is If it is larger than the value of "5" which is set in advance as the second reference value which is smaller than the first reference value, "3" is selected as the value to be added, and the value of the reflection counter 167 is is less than or equal to the value of "5", "1" is selected as the value to be added. This makes it possible to prevent the increase in the number of acquired pieces that is not reflected in the display of the number of acquired pieces in the number display image G31 and is kept on standby in the reflection counter 167 from becoming an extremely large value. At the same time, it becomes possible to diversify the manner in which the number of acquired pieces increases in the number display image G31.

Incidentally, when the payout motor 56a is operating at a normal speed, the payout device 56 pays out one game ball every 24 msec. Further, the firing cycle of the game ball is 60 msec. On the other hand, the output cycle of the measurement command by the sound-light side MPU 62 is approximately 720 msec. In this case, the maximum value of the increase in the number of acquisitions included in the increase measurement command is set to "18", so the situation where the value of the reflection counter 167 is larger than the first reference value is It can occur.

In detail, regarding the calculation processing for measurement display, if the value of the reflection counter 167 is larger than the first reference value (step S2006: YES), the first addition target value is added to the totalization counter 168 (step S2007). ), the first addition target value is subtracted from the reflection counter 167 (step S2008). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 increases by the first addition target value, and the value of the increase in the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 is increased by the first addition target value. Decrease.

If the value of the reflection counter 167 is less than or equal to the first reference value and greater than the second reference value (step S2006: NO, step S2009: YES), the second addition target value is added to the summation counter 168 ( Step S2010), and the second addition target value is subtracted from the reflection counter 167 (Step S2011). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 increases by the second addition target value, and the value of the increase in the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 is increased by the second addition target value. Decrease.

If the value of the reflection counter 167 is less than or equal to the second reference value (step S2009: NO), the third addition target value is added to the totalization counter 168 (step S2012), and the third addition target value is added from the reflection counter 167. The value is subtracted (step S2013). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 increases by the third addition target value, and the value of the increase in the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 is increased by the third addition target value. Decrease.

If the process of step S2004 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2005, if the process of step S2008 is executed, if the process of step S2011 is executed, or if the process of step S2013 is executed, the total counter The image data corresponding to the value 168 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2014). Then, parameter information to be applied to the image data is grasped (step S2015). As a result, the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605) includes image data for displaying the image corresponding to the current value of the total counter 168 as the number display image G31. Set as a target. Further, parameter information applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

Next, how the number display effect is executed will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 56. 56(a) shows the transmission timing of the measurement command from the sound-light side MPU 62, FIG. 56(b) shows how the value of the reflection counter 167 fluctuates, and FIG. 56(c) shows the number display image G31. Indicates update timing.

At timing t1, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72, as shown in FIG. 56(a). In this case, the measurement command is an increase measurement command in which "17" is set as the increase in the number of pieces acquired. Therefore, at the timing of t1, the value of the reflection counter 167 is set to "17" as shown in FIG. 56(b). However, since the timing of t1 is not the update timing of the number display image G31, the value set in the reflection counter 167 is not reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31.

Thereafter, at timing t2, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c). In this case, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is "17" which is a larger value than the first reference value, the value of the reflection counter 167 is changed to the first addition target value as shown in FIG. 56(b). "5" is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the first addition target value to the previous value.

Thereafter, the number display image G31 is updated at timing t3 and timing t4, respectively, as shown in FIG. 56(c). In these cases, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is less than the first reference value and larger than the second reference value, the value of the reflection counter 167 is changed from the value of the reflection counter 167 as shown in FIG. 56(b). “3”, which is the value to be added by 2, is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the second addition target value to the previous value.

Thereafter, at timing t5, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72, as shown in FIG. 56(a). In this case, the measurement command is a reduction measurement command in which "3" is set as the decrease in the number of acquired objects. Therefore, at the timing t5, the value of the reflection counter 167 is updated to "3" by subtracting "3" from "6" as shown in FIG. 56(b).

Thereafter, the number display image G31 is updated at timing t6 and timing t7, respectively, as shown in FIG. 56(c). In these cases, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is less than the second reference value, "1", which is the third addition target value, is subtracted from the value of the reflection counter 167, as shown in FIG. 56(b). Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the third addition target value to the previous value.

Thereafter, at timing t8, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72, as shown in FIG. 56(a). In this case, the measurement command is an increase measurement command in which "5" is set as the increase in the number of pieces acquired. Therefore, at the timing of t8, the value of the reflection counter 167 is incremented by 5 from "1" and updated to "6" as shown in FIG. 56(b).

Thereafter, at timing t9, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c). In this case, the value of the reflection counter 167 is again larger than the second reference value, so as shown in FIG. ' will be subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the second addition target value to the previous value.

Thereafter, the number display image G31 is updated at timing t10, timing t12, and timing t13, respectively, as shown in FIG. 56(c). In these cases, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is less than the second reference value, "1", which is the third addition target value, is subtracted from the value of the reflection counter 167, as shown in FIG. 56(b). Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the third addition target value to the previous value. Note that a measurement command is sent at timing t11 as shown in FIG. The value of 167 has not been changed.

After that, at timing t14, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c), but as shown in FIG. 56(b), the value of the reflection counter 167 is "0", so The value of the reflection counter 167 is maintained as is, and the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is also maintained as is.

Thereafter, at timing t15, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound-light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72, as shown in FIG. 56(a). In this case, the measurement command is a reduction measurement command in which "5" is set as the decrease in the number of acquired objects. Therefore, at the timing t15, the value of the reflection counter 167 is subtracted by 5 from "0" and updated to "-5" as shown in FIG. 56(b).

Thereafter, at timing t16, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c). In this case, the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to a decrease in the number of acquired pieces. If the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to a decrease in the number of acquired pieces, it is reflected in the display of the number of acquired pieces at once regardless of the value. Therefore, the value of the reflection counter 167 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 56(b).

As described above, the number of game balls acquired since the start of the opening/closing execution mode is displayed as a number display effect while changing according to the increase/decrease in the actual number of acquired balls. It also becomes possible for the player to grasp the number of game balls he has acquired up to that point. In this case, when increasing the acquired number displayed in the number display image G31, the value to which the acquired number is added at one update timing of the number display image G31 is limited to a predetermined limit value. As a result, when the number of acquired pieces increases, the period in which the number of acquired pieces is updated to increase in the number display image G31 can be easily continued for a long time, and the number of acquired pieces increases in the opening/closing execution mode. This makes it easier to give players the impression that

A plurality of types of values to which the acquired number is added at one update timing of the number display image G31 are set. The larger the value of the reflection counter 167, the larger the value to which the acquired number is added at one update timing of the number display image G31. The value to which the acquired number is added at each update timing becomes a small value. This makes it possible to prevent the increase in the number of acquired pieces that is not reflected in the display of the number of acquired pieces in the number display image G31 and is kept on standby in the reflection counter 167 from becoming an extremely large value. At the same time, it becomes possible to diversify the manner in which the number of acquired pieces increases in the number display image G31.

Even if the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes equal to or less than the first reference value and the second addition target value is added to the display of the number of acquired pieces in the number display image G31, the value of the reflection counter 167 will not change after that. When the value becomes larger than the first reference value, the situation returns to the state where the first addition target value is added to the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31. This makes it possible to update the display of the acquired number in an appropriate manner for the situation at each update timing of the number display image G31.

If the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to a decrease in the number of pieces acquired, the value of the decrease is collectively displayed in the number display image G31 regardless of the value of the reflection counter 167. This will be reflected in the number display. This makes it possible to prevent the period in which the display of the acquired number is updated so as to decrease from continuing for a long time. In addition, when the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes a negative value, it becomes possible to clear the value of the reflection counter 167 to "0" at the timing of one update of the number display image G31, and then the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes a negative value. It is possible to easily make the value of the counter 167 a positive value. Therefore, it is possible to generate many opportunities to update the display of the acquired number to increase.

<Another form of number display performance>
- Instead of a configuration in which a prize ball completion command is sent from the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 to the sound-light side MPU 62, when sending a prize ball command to the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55, the same prize ball command is sent to the sound-light side MPU 62. A configuration may also be adopted in which the information is transmitted to the side MPU 62. In this case, the number of game balls that have not actually been paid out but are scheduled to be paid out will be added to the display of the acquired number.

- The number of fired game balls detected by the fired ball detection sensor 155 and the number of returned game balls detected by the returned ball detection sensor 156 are reflected in the display of the number of acquired balls, but among these, A configuration may be adopted in which one or both are not reflected in the display of the number of acquired items.

・The number display effect was configured to start when the opening period starts in the opening/closing execution mode, but instead, it starts when the opening period ends and the first round game starts. It may also be a configuration.

・The number display effect is configured to end when one opening/closing execution mode ends, but if the support mode changes to high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the number display effect will be displayed in the high-frequency support mode. is continued, and if the opening/closing execution mode occurs multiple times without intervening the low-frequency support mode, the number of game balls acquired since the first opening/closing execution mode was started is continuously displayed. You can also use it as In addition, if the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes a high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the number display effect will continue in the high probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode will occur multiple times without intervening the low probability mode. In this case, the number of game balls acquired since the first opening/closing execution mode is started may be configured to be continuously displayed.

- It is possible to specify whether or not a firing operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28, and the number display image G31 is displayed depending on whether or not a firing operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28. A configuration may be adopted in which the value to which the acquired number is added changes at one update timing. For example, even if the values to which the acquired number is added are the same, the number display image G31 is updated more often in a situation where a firing operation is being performed than in a situation where a firing operation is not performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the value to which the acquired number is added becomes a large value or tends to become a large value at a timing, or a configuration in which the value to be added to the acquired number becomes a small value or tends to become a small value may be adopted. Note that a configuration that can identify whether or not a firing operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28 includes a touch sensor that detects that the player is touching the firing operation device 28. In addition to or in place of this configuration, if the touch sensor is turned on, it can be specified that a firing operation is being performed. A configuration in which a variable resistor is provided to grasp the situation, and when the detection result of the variable resistor corresponds to a result that the amount of rotational operation is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, it is determined that a firing operation is being performed. You can also use it as

<Another form of number display performance>
- The object to which the number display effect is applied is not limited to the effect for displaying the number of game balls acquired in the opening/closing execution mode, and is arbitrary. For example, in a slot machine, when the number of remaining continuation games of an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player, such as an RT game, an AT game, or an ART game, can increase in the middle of the advantageous gaming state, the number of remaining continuation games can be displayed as a number display effect. A configuration may also be adopted in which an increase display effect showing how the number of games is increasing is executed. The calculation process for increasing display executed by the display CPU 72 to perform the increasing display effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57.

When an opportunity to increase the number of remaining consecutive games in the advantageous gaming state occurs, an increase display effect is started. If it is the start timing of the increase display performance (step S2101: YES), division processing of the target increase value is executed (step S2102). In the target increase value division process, the target increase value determined as the number of games to be increased to the remaining number of consecutive games in the advantageous gaming state is divided by "100" which is a predetermined division value. Multiple types of target increase values are set, and all of these multiple types of target increase values are set so that the quotient value when divided by the division value is 8 or less, and when divided by the division value The values of the quotients are set to be different from each other. Specifically, "50", "100", and "250" are set as the target increase values. When the target increase value is "50", the result of dividing by the division value is quotient "0" and the remainder is "50", and when the target increase value is "100", dividing by the division value As a result, the quotient is "1" and the remainder is "0", and if the target increase value is "250", the result of division by the division value is that the quotient is "2" and the remainder is "50".

When the target increase value division process is executed, the value obtained by adding "1" to the quotient value derived by the division process is stored in the work RAM 73 as a unit increase value (step S2103). The unit increase value is a value that increases the display of the remaining number of consecutive games displayed on the symbol display device 41 as an increase display performance at one update timing of the display. As described above, since the quotient of the result of division by the division value differs depending on the type of target increase value, the unit increase value also differs depending on the type of target increase value.

Thereafter, a setting process for a unit increment counter provided in the work RAM 73 is executed (step S2104). The unit increase counter is a counter for the display CPU 72 to specify the number of times the display is updated in the current increase display performance. In step S2104, the current target increase value is divided by the unit increase value derived in step S2103. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division is set in the unit increment counter. For example, when the target increase value is "250", the unit increase value is "3", and when the target increase value is divided by this unit increase value, the quotient is "83" and the remainder is "1". In this case, "83" is set in the unit increase counter. Furthermore, if the remainder is 1 or more as a result of dividing the target increase value by the unit increase value, the remainder is stored in the work RAM 73 as a remaining value (step S2105).

When the process of step S2105 is executed, or when it is time to update the increase display effect (step S2106: YES), it is determined whether the value of the unit increase counter in the work RAM 73 is 1 or more (step S2107). If the value of the unit increment counter is 1 or more (step S2107: YES), the unit increment value calculated in step S2103 is added to the current value of the total counter provided in the work RAM 73 (step S2108). ). The total counter is a counter that determines the value when displaying the remaining number of consecutive games as a game number image, and the value stored in the total counter is displayed as the game number image. Note that when the increase display effect is started, the remaining number of continuous games at that point is set in the total counter.

In step S2108, the unit increment value is added to the current value of the totaling counter, so that the value of the game number image increases by the unit increment value from the current value. Thereafter, the value of the unit increment counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2109).

If the value of the unit increment counter is "0" (step S2107: NO), and the remaining value is stored in the work RAM 73 (step S2110: YES), the remaining value is added to the totaling counter ( Step S2111). As a result, the value of the game number image increases from the current value by the remaining value.

If the process of step S2109 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2110, or if the process of step S2111 is executed, the image data corresponding to the value of the totaling counter is grasped as the image data to be used this time. (Step S2112). Then, parameter information to be applied to the image data is grasped (step S2113). As a result, in the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605), image data for displaying the image corresponding to the current total counter value as the game number image is included as a drawing target. Set. Further, parameter information applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

According to the above configuration, when an effect that increases the number of remaining consecutive games in an advantageous gaming state is executed, the unit increase value changes according to the target increase value, so the target increase value is added to the number of consecutive games. It becomes possible to diversify the manner in which the number of games increases at each update timing of the game number image when the game number image is updated.

In addition, even when the manner of increasing the number of consecutive games is diversified in this way, the processing configuration for determining the unit increase value, the processing configuration for setting the value of the unit increase counter, and the number of games image The processing configuration for updating is constant regardless of the type of target increase value. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects described above while simplifying the processing configuration.

Further, since the unit increase value is set according to the target increase value, it is possible for the player to predict the target increase value by checking the unit increase value. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the update mode of the game number image, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the increase display performance.

Note that a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of division values are prepared when executing the division process of the target increase value (step S2102), and the division process is executed using the division value determined by lottery. In this case, even if the target increase value is the same, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the number of games increases at each update timing of the number of games image when the target increase value is added to the number of consecutive games.

<Configuration for performing pseudo video production>
Next, a configuration for performing a pseudo moving image effect will be explained.

The pseudo moving image effect is an effect in which a moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 over the pseudo moving image effect period. During the pseudo moving image production period, the image update timing at which at least a part of the image displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed occurs a specific number of times (for example, 600 times). At each image update timing during the pseudo moving image production period, one piece of still image data 171 to 173 to be used at the update timing is drawn on the entire frame area 82a, 82b to be drawn. , an image based on the one piece of still image data 171 to 173 is displayed over the entire symbol display device 41. In this case, the number of still image data 171 to 173 to be used during the pseudo moving image presentation period is smaller than the specific number of updates.

Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 58, the memory module 74 stores the first character image data 171 and the effect image data 172 as still image data 171 to 173 for executing the pseudo moving image effect. , second character image data 173 are stored in advance. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59(a), the first character image data 171 includes, as a first character image G41, a first pseudo moving image character G42 representing a person, and a first pseudo moving image character G42. The second pseudo-animation character G43 representing a person different from the character G43 and the pseudo-animation background G44 displayed on the back side of the first pseudo-animation character G42 and the second pseudo-animation character G43 are displayed on the pattern display device 41. This is image data to be displayed over the entire area. The first character image G41 is an image captured by an imaging device such as a camera.

In the effect image data 172, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59(b), a light ray image G47 is displayed as an effect image G45 showing a state in which light is irradiated from a light source to the surrounding area in front of an effect background G46. This is image data for displaying an image on the entire symbol display device 41. The effect image G45 is an image for enhancing the visual effect, and in addition to the ray image G47, it includes an image representing a blast wave, an image representing water droplets, and an aura representing the surroundings of the character as if it were emitting light. Examples include images. The effect image G45 is an image created using software for creating images.

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59(c), the second character image data 173 includes the first pseudo moving image character G42 and the This is image data for displaying the pseudo moving image character G43 and the pseudo moving image background G44 on the entire symbol display device 41. Further, the second character image G48 is an image captured by an imaging device such as a camera.

However, the display mode of the first pseudo-video character G42 and the second pseudo-video character G43 based on the second character image data 173 is the same as the first pseudo-video character G42 and the second pseudo-video character G43 based on the first character image data 171. The display mode is different from that of the character G43. Specifically, the shape of a hand region representing a hand, which is a partial region of the first pseudo-animation character G42, the orientation of the torso region representing the torso, the relative position of the hand region with respect to the torso region, etc. The second character image G41 and the second character image G48 are different. In addition, the shape of a hand region representing a hand, which is a part of the second pseudo-animation character G43, the direction of the torso region representing a torso, the relative position of the hand region to the torso region, etc. are different from the first character image G41. and the second character image G48.

Between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48, there is no continuity in the display mode of the first pseudo-animation character G42, and similarly there is no continuity in the display mode of the second pseudo-animation character G43. There is no. The fact that there is no continuity in the display mode for the first pseudo-animation character G42 means that the shape of a predetermined area such as the hand area of the first pseudo-animation character G42 in the second character image G48, and the shape of the predetermined area and the first pseudo-animation character G42. This means that the relative position of the moving image character G42 with respect to other areas is different from the aspect at the update timing of the next image assumed from the display manner of the first character image G41. Similarly, the fact that there is no continuity in the display mode of the second pseudo animation character G43 means that the shape of a predetermined area such as the hand area of the second pseudo animation character G43 in the second character image G48, and the predetermined area This means that the relative position between the character G43 and the other area of the second pseudo moving image character G43 is different from the manner at the next image update timing assumed from the display manner of the first character image G41.

A second display period in which the effect image G45 is displayed is set between a first display period in which the first character image G41 is displayed and a third display period in which the second character image G48 is displayed. As a result, each pseudo moving image between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 is The discontinuity of characters G42 and G43 becomes less noticeable. Each of the pseudo-animation characters G42 and G43 is displayed in a different display mode in each of the first display period and the third display period, while making the discontinuity of the pseudo-animation characters G42 and G43 less noticeable. Therefore, even though the number of character image data 171, 173 is small with respect to the image update timing, and the motion of each pseudo animation character G42, G43 is not continuous, it is possible to It becomes possible to make the player recognize that the moving image characters G42 and G43 are being displayed.

The image update timing occurs multiple times in each of the first display period in which the first character image G41 is displayed, the second display period in which the effect image G45 is displayed, and the third display period in which the second character image G48 is displayed. Each display period is the same period. In a configuration in which image update timing occurs multiple times in each of the first display period, second display period, and third display period, the image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period is of one type as already explained. Only. However, in each display period, the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame areas 82a and 82b is changed at each update timing. Specifically, in each of the image data 171 to 173, the range to be drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn is sequentially changed. The configuration will be explained below.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how different ranges are drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn in each of the image data 171 to 173.

When drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, the data is written to all unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a and 82b is 800 x 600. It is the number of dots. On the other hand, the first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 have a size larger than the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b in the state stored in the memory module 74. It is the number of pixels. The range that can be drawn by each of the image data 171 to 173 at the initial magnification is larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b in both the horizontal and vertical dimensions. This makes it possible to vary the range to be drawn in one type of image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period. Furthermore, even if the range to be drawn is different in one type of image data 171 to 173 to be used in this way, the one type of image data 171 to 173 is used in the entire symbol display device 41. It becomes possible to display an image corresponding to the .

The sizes of the first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 stored in the memory module 74 are the same. The manner in which the range to be drawn in each of the image data 171 to 173 is made different is the same regardless of whether it is in the first display period, the second display period, or the third display period. Specifically, at the start timing of each display period, a range of image data 171 to 173 to be used that is closer to a predetermined corner is set as a range to be drawn. Then, at the subsequent image update timing, the range to be drawn is changed so that the range to be drawn gradually moves toward the corner opposite to the predetermined corner. It is set.

Data for changing the range to be drawn is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as a pseudo moving image table 174, as shown in FIG. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pseudo moving image table 174. As shown in FIG. 61, pointer information that is a serial number is set in the pseudo video table 174, and drawing range information that determines the range to be drawn is set in correspondence with each pointer information. . The pointer information is set by the number of image update timings that occur in each display period. Thereby, by referring to the pseudo moving image table 174 in each display period, it becomes possible to derive drawing range information corresponding to all update timings. Moreover, since the pseudo moving image table 174 is shared in each display period, the pseudo moving image table 174 is stored in advance, compared to a configuration in which the pseudo moving image table 174 is prepared in advance in correspondence with each display period. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store data.

FIG. 62 is a time chart showing how the pseudo moving image effect is executed. 62(a) shows the first display period, FIG. 62(b) shows the second display period, FIG. 62(c) shows the third display period, and FIG. 62(d) shows the display period used in each display period. It shows how the drawing target range of target image data 171 to 173 is changed.

By starting the pseudo moving image effect at timing t1, the first display period starts as shown in FIG. 62(a). Then, the first display period continues from timing t1 to timing t2, but during this period, as shown in FIG. 62(d), the range to be drawn in the first character image data 171 is Changes occur gradually while maintaining a certain direction.

At timing t2, the first display period ends as shown in FIG. 62(a), and the second display period begins as shown in FIG. 62(b). Then, the second display period continues from timing t2 to timing t3, but during this period, as shown in FIG. 62(d), the range to be drawn in the effect image data 172 is fixed in a certain direction. It gradually changes while retaining its gender. This directionality and the amount of deviation in the drawing range between successive update timings are the same as in the first display period.

At timing t3, the second display period ends as shown in FIG. 62(b), and the third display period begins as shown in FIG. 62(c). The third display period will continue from timing t3 to timing t4, but during this period, as shown in FIG. 62(d), the range to be drawn in the second character image data 173 is Changes occur gradually while maintaining a certain direction. This directionality and the amount of deviation in the drawing range between successive update timings are the same as in the first display period and the second display period.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the pseudo moving image effect will be explained. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for pseudo moving image effect executed by the display CPU 72. It should be noted that the calculation process for pseudo moving image effect is executed in the calculation process for effect in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the pseudo moving image effect should be executed.

If it is the first display period (step S2201: YES), it is determined whether this time is the start timing of the first display period (step S2202). In addition, when starting the pseudo-video performance, the display CPU 72 reads an execution target table from the memory module 74 for controlling the overall flow of the pseudo-video performance, and by referring to the execution target table, it can be determined which one is currently being played. It specifies whether it corresponds to a display period and whether it is the start timing of each display period.

If it is the start timing of the first display period (step S2202: YES), the pseudo moving image table 174 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S2203). If a negative determination is made in step S2202, or if the process in step S2203 is executed, the first character image data 171 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2204). Furthermore, the drawing range information set in correspondence with the pointer information currently being referred to in the pseudo moving image table 174 is grasped (step S2205). After that, after grasping the parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2206), the pointer information of the reference target is updated so that the value of the pointer information of the reference target is incremented by 1 in the pseudo video table 174 (step S2206). S2207).

When the arithmetic processing for pseudo animation effect is executed as described above, the first character image data 171 is set as the drawing target in the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). be done. Moreover, the parameter information grasped in step S2205 and step S2206 is set in the drawing list.

If it is the second display period (step S2201: NO, step S2208: YES), it is determined whether this time is the start timing of the second display period (step S2209). If it is the start timing of the second display period (step S2209: YES), the value of the pointer information of the reference target in the pseudo video table 174 that has already been read out to the work RAM 73 during the first display period is cleared to "0". (Step S2210). As a result, the drawing range information set corresponding to the first pointer information in the pseudo moving image table 174 becomes the target of use at the start timing of the second display period.

If a negative determination is made in step S2209 or if the process in step S2210 is executed, the effect image data 172 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2211). Furthermore, the drawing range information set in correspondence with the pointer information currently being referred to in the pseudo moving image table 174 is grasped (step S2212). After that, after grasping the parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2213), the pointer information of the reference target is updated so that the value of the pointer information of the reference target is incremented by 1 in the pseudo video table 174 (step S2213). S2214).

When the arithmetic processing for pseudo moving image effect is executed as described above, the effect image data 172 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). Moreover, the parameter information grasped in step S2212 and step S2213 is set in the drawing list.

If it is the third display period (step S2201 and step S2208: NO), it is determined whether this time is the start timing of the third display period (step S2215). If it is the start timing of the third display period (step S2215: YES), the value of the pointer information of the reference target in the pseudo video table 174 that has already been read into the work RAM 73 during the first display period is cleared to "0". (Step S2216). As a result, the drawing range information set corresponding to the first pointer information in the pseudo moving image table 174 becomes the target of use at the start timing of the third display period.

If a negative determination is made in step S2215, or if the process in step S2216 is executed, the second character image data 173 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2217). Furthermore, drawing range information set in correspondence with the pointer information currently being referred to in the pseudo moving image table 174 is grasped (step S2218). After that, after grasping the parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2219), the pointer information of the reference target is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced in the pseudo video table 174 is incremented by 1 (step S2219). S2220).

When the arithmetic processing for producing a pseudo moving image is executed as described above, the second character image data 173 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). be done. Moreover, the parameter information grasped in step S2218 and step S2219 is set in the drawing list.

Here, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are used individually in a performance different from the pseudo moving image performance. Specifically, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are used as display images of round effects executed during different round games in the opening/closing execution mode, which is a high-frequency winning mode. . FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing calculation processing for round effects executed by the display CPU 72. Note that the calculation process for round effect is executed in the calculation process for effect in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the round effect should be executed.

If it is the execution period of the first round game (step S2301: YES), the first character image data 171 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2302), and other image data are set as the image data to be used this time. Understand (step S2303). Thereafter, parameter information to be applied to these image data is grasped (step S2304). When the calculation process for the round effect is executed in this way, the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605) includes the first character image data 171 and the data captured in step S2303. Image data is set as the drawing target. Moreover, the parameter information grasped in step S2304 is set in the drawing list.

If it is the execution period of the 8th round game (step S2305: YES), the second character image data 173 is recognized as the image data to be used this time (step S2306), and the other image data are recognized as the image data to be used this time. (Step S2307). Thereafter, parameter information to be applied to these image data is grasped (step S2308). When the arithmetic processing for the round effect is executed in this way, the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) includes the second character image data 173 and the data captured in step S2307. Image data is set as the drawing target. Further, the parameter information grasped in step S2308 is set in the drawing list.

Note that if it is not the first round game or the eighth round game, other processing is executed (step S2309). In this case, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are not selected as image data to be used.

As described above, the second display period for displaying the effect image G45 is set between the first display period for displaying the first character image G41 and the third display period for displaying the second character image G48. ing. As a result, each pseudo moving image between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 is The discontinuity of characters G42 and G43 becomes less noticeable. Then, each of the pseudo-animation characters G42 and G43 is displayed in a different display mode in each of the first display period and the second display period, while making the discontinuity of each of the pseudo-animation characters G42 and G43 less noticeable. Therefore, even though the number of character image data 171, 173 is small with respect to the image update timing, and the motion of each pseudo animation character G42, G43 is not continuous, it is possible to It becomes possible to make the player recognize that the moving image characters G42 and G43 are being displayed.

In particular, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are image data prepared for displaying images for round effects in different round games, and considering their purpose of use, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are There is no requirement for continuity in the movement of each pseudo moving image character G42, G43 between the image G41 and the second character image G48. In this case, by creating the display period of the first character image G41 and the display period of the second character image G48 with the display period of the effect image G45 in between as described above, the image for the round effect can be changed. Using the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 prepared for display, it is possible to perform a pseudo moving image effect.

The manner in which the image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b is changed at each update timing. This makes it possible to display moving images while using one type of image data 171 to 173 in each display period.

The pseudo moving image table 174 for changing the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect in the frame areas 82a and 82b is shared in each display period. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects described above while suppressing the storage capacity required in the memory module 74.

<Another form of pseudo video production>
- The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which only two types of character image data 171, 173 for displaying each of the pseudo-animation characters G42, G43 exist, and a configuration in which three or more types exist may be used. For example, the pseudo animation characters G42 and G43 are displayed separately from the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173, and the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 are A configuration may also be adopted in which third character image data that makes the display modes of the moving image characters G42 and G43 different is stored in the memory module 74 in advance. In this case, the pseudo animation production period includes a first display period in which the first character image data 171 is used, a second display period in which the effect image data 172 is used, and a second display period in which the second character image data 173 is used. There is a third display period in which the effect image data 172 or different effect image data is used, and a fifth display period in which the third character image data is used. I will do it.

・The display periods of the pseudo video effects are not limited to the same period, but may be different but substantially the same period. At least one of the display periods may be configured to be significantly different from the other display periods. For example, the first display period and the second display period may be the same or substantially the same period, but the effect period may be longer or shorter than the first display period and the second display period. If the display periods are different from each other, by creating the pseudo video table 174 to correspond to all the update timings of the display period that is the longest among the display periods, this can be done even in other display periods. The pseudo moving image table 174 can also be used.

- If the drawing range information derived from the pseudo video table 174 has continuity between the start timing and the end timing, it is assumed that the pseudo video table 174 is used multiple times in one display period in the pseudo video production. There is no discomfort. In this case, it is not necessary that data corresponding to the entire display period be set in the pseudo video table 174; it is sufficient that data corresponding to only a part of the display period is set. be.

- The first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 are configured to have a larger size than the frame areas 82a and 82b at the initial magnification stored in the memory module 74. There is no limitation, and the size at the initial magnification is the same as or smaller than the frame areas 82a and 82b, and after being read from the memory module 74, it is enlarged to a larger size than the frame areas 82a and 82b. The configuration may be such that the process is executed. In this case, when using the image for round production, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are used at the initial magnification size, and the image for pseudo animation production is displayed. When used for display, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 may be used in a size enlarged from the initial magnification size.

- A method for changing the drawing mode in the frame areas 82a, 82b of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period of the pseudo animation effect at each update timing is to The method is not limited to different ranges. For example, a method may be adopted in which the range to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173 is gradually narrowed, so that the image to be displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed. Alternatively, a method may be adopted in which the range to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173 is gradually widened, so that the image to be displayed is gradually reduced in size.

- In the first display period of the pseudo animation production, the configuration is not limited to the first character image data 171 being the only image data to be used; in the first display period, the first character image data 171 is used as a frame. After drawing in the areas 82a and 82b, other image data may be drawn in a part of the frame areas 82a and 82b. Even in this case, the first character image G41 will be displayed behind the other image data, and the effect image G45 will be displayed between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48. By displaying it, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the moving image created by each of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 is being displayed.

<Another form of pseudo video production>
- The modes shown in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c) are also conceivable as modes of pseudo moving image presentation. Specifically regarding this aspect, as shown in FIGS. 65(a) and 65(c), a pseudo moving image character G51 is displayed in the pseudo moving image production. The first pseudo moving image image data and the second pseudo moving image image data are stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data for displaying the pseudo moving image character G51, and the first pseudo moving image image data is used. By becoming the object, the first pseudo moving image G52 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65(a), and when the second pseudo moving image image data is being used, the second pseudo moving image G52 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65(c). A pseudo moving image G53 is displayed.

In the first pseudo-animation image G52, as shown in FIG. 65(a), a predetermined part G51a (specifically, both arms) of the pseudo-animation character G51 is displayed before it moves along a predetermined motion path, and the second In the pseudo animation image G53, as shown in FIG. 65(c), a predetermined part G51a of the pseudo animation character G51 is displayed after it moves along a predetermined motion path. However, the position of the predetermined part G51a of the pseudo moving image character G51 between the first pseudo moving image G52 and the second pseudo moving image G53 is far enough apart that it is difficult for the player to recognize the continuity of the movement. .

On the other hand, between the display period of the first pseudo moving image G52 and the display period of the second pseudo moving image G53, a pseudo moving image effect image G54 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65(b). . In this pseudo moving image effect image G54, many small individual images G54a such as bubbles are displayed. Furthermore, the pseudo animation effect image G54 is displayed over a predetermined period, and during the predetermined period, a large number of small individual images G54a are displayed in the movement direction of the pseudo animation character G51 along the predetermined movement path in the predetermined portion G51a. The video is displayed moving in the same direction.

With the above configuration, the position of the predetermined part G51a of the pseudo animation character G51 between the first pseudo animation image G52 and the second pseudo animation image G53 makes it difficult for the player to recognize continuity of movement. Even if they are separated by a certain degree, the visual effect caused by the movement of the small individual image G54a in the pseudo moving image effect image G54 will cause the difference between the first pseudo moving image G52 and the second pseudo moving image G53. It becomes possible to make the player recognize that the predetermined part G51a has moved along a predetermined motion path. As a result, even if the configuration has a small number of pseudo moving image data for displaying the pseudo moving image character G51, the predetermined portion G51a between the first pseudo moving image G52 and the second pseudo moving image G53 can be It is possible to make the player recognize that a moving image of the pseudo moving image character G51 is being displayed while making the discontinuity of the position of the character G51 less noticeable.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the electrical configuration related to display control. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment described above will be explained. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration in this embodiment.

The configuration shown in FIG. 66 includes a main controller 50 as in the first embodiment. The main control device 50 also includes a payout control device 55 that controls the payout device 56, and a power source/power supply that functions to supply power to each device including the main control device 50 and drive and control the game ball firing mechanism 58. The firing control device 57, the special symbol unit 37 that displays the result of the game round, and the regular symbol unit 38 that displays the result of the regular electricity open lottery are electrically connected. Further, an audio light emission control device 60 is provided that drives and controls the display light emitting section 44 and the speaker section 45 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 50. A display control device 200 is provided that controls the symbol display device 41 based on the above information.

As shown in FIG. 66, the display control device 200 includes a display control board 206 on which a display CPU 201, a work RAM 202, a memory module 203, a VRAM 204, and a video display processor (VDP) 205 are mounted. .

The display CPU 201 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 200, and reads, interprets, and executes control programs and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 201 is connected to an input port 207 mounted on the display control board 206 via a bus, and various commands sent from the audio and light emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 201 through the input port 207. be done.

The display CPU 201 is connected to a work RAM 202, a memory module 203, and a VRAM 204 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 based on commands received from the audio emission control device 60. Give transfer instructions. The display CPU 201 is also connected to the VDP 205 via a bus, and issues drawing instructions for displaying a three-dimensional image (3D image) on the symbol display device 41 based on commands received from the audio emission control device 60. conduct. The memory module 203, work RAM 202, VRAM 204, and VDP 205 will be explained below.

The memory module 203 stores in advance control data including a control program and fixed value data, and also stores in advance various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image. The memory module 203 includes a nonvolatile semiconductor memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory. Incidentally, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is executed satisfactorily. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is used, the memory module 203 is used as a non-writing, read-only memory (ROM).

The various image data stored in the memory module 203 include object data such as patterns and characters displayed on the pattern display device 41, texture data pasted to the object data, and the backmost image data in one frame of images. This includes image data for the back side that makes up the image.

Here, the object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. Further, a polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of three-dimensional coordinate vertices. For example, in order to apply a surface model to the object data, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates set in advance for each object data as the origin. That is, in each object data, the relative position (that is, orientation and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in a self-contained local coordinate system.

Texture data is an image pasted to each polygon of object data, and by pasting texture data to object data, an image corresponding to the object data, such as a display image including a pattern or a character, is generated. The texture data can be held in any way, but it includes at least a combination of bitmap format data and a color palette that is referenced when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image.

The backmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The image data for the back side can be stored in any manner, but for example, two-dimensional still image data is stored and held as compressed JPEG format data. Incidentally, when the image data for the rear surface is arranged in the world coordinate system, plate-shaped object data (that is, plate polygon) is used.

The work RAM 202 is a storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 203, and also temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 202 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply to retain memory, and specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Note that although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 can be executed satisfactorily. Further, the work RAM 202 is used for both reading and writing purposes when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred to the work RAM 202 from the memory module 203 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 201 to the memory module 203 . Then, the display CPU 201 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 202 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 204 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 204 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain memory, and specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAMs such as DRAM, SRAM, or dual port RAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is executed satisfactorily. Further, the VRAM 204 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 204 includes a rasterization buffer 211, and image data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the rasterization buffer 211 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 205 to the memory module 203. Further, the VRAM 204 is provided with a frame buffer 212 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 205.

The VDP 205 is an image generation device that draws on the pattern display device 41 based on drawing instructions from the display CPU 201 using data stored and held in the expansion buffer 211, specifically by processing it. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 41b incorporated in the symbol display device 41 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display section 41a. Since the VDP 205 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its actual state can be called a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 205 includes a geometry calculation section 221, a rendering section 222, a register 223, and a display circuit 225. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to an I/F 226 for the display CPU 201 and an I/F 227 for the VRAM 204.

The I/F 226 for the display CPU 201 causes the register 223 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 201. The geometry calculation unit 221 reads various image data stored in the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 based on the drawing list stored in the register 223. Furthermore, the geometry calculation unit 221 places object data designated as a placement target within the world coordinate system. Furthermore, the geometry calculation unit 221 executes various coordinate transformation processes when and after placing the object data in the world coordinate system. Then, the object is finally clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface P.

Based on the drawing list stored in the register 223, the rendering unit 222 adjusts the light source and attaches texture data to each piece of clipped object data, thereby determining the appearance of the object data. In addition, the rendering unit 222 projects each object data onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, performs various adjustments based on depth information, and converts one frame of drawing data, which is two-dimensional data, into a frame. It is created in the buffer 212. One frame of drawing data refers to the data necessary to display the image at one update timing in a configuration where the image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. say.

Note that all of the control programs for the operation of the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may be provided by the drawing list, and the VDP 205 may have a built-in memory in which the control programs are stored in advance, and the control programs and the drawing list may be provided. The configuration may be such that the geometry calculation section 221 and the rendering section 222 execute processing depending on the contents of the . Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 203 in advance. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 execute processing only by operating hardware circuits corresponding to the drawing list, without using a program.

Here, the frame buffer 212 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 212a and 212b. Specifically, a first frame area 212a and a second frame area 212b are provided. Each of these frame areas 212a and 212b is set to have a capacity capable of storing one frame's worth of drawing data. Specifically, each of the frame regions 212a and 212b includes a large number of unit areas that correspond to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) for each dot. Correspondingly, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to a full-color system; for example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 212 is provided with a first frame area 212a and a second frame area 212b, in a situation where drawing data on the symbol display device 41 is executed using drawing data created in one frame area. , creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame areas is executed. In other words, the frame buffer 212 uses a double buffer method.

In the display circuit 225, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display section 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 212a or the second frame area 212b, and the image signal is sent to the display circuit 225. It is output to the symbol display device 41 via the connected output port 208. Specifically, drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 212a and 212b to the display circuit 225. The resolution of the transferred drawing data is adjusted by a scaler (not shown) and converted into gradation data so that it corresponds to the resolution of the pattern display device 41. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output. Note that the display circuit 225 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal.

<Basic processing in display CPU 201>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 201 will be explained.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing in this embodiment. In the V interrupt processing, if this is the timing to start power supply to the display CPU 201 (step S2401: YES), all the texture data previously stored in the memory module 203 is transferred to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. The data is read out to the texture area 211a (step S2402).

If a negative determination is made in step S2401 or if the process in step S2402 is executed, command analysis processing is executed (step S2403). Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 202 is analyzed. Here, when the display CPU 201 receives a strobe signal from the audio/light MPU 62, it executes the command interrupt process regardless of what process is being executed at that time. In the command interrupt processing, a command received at the input port 207 is transferred to a command buffer provided in the work RAM 202.

Thereafter, on condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving a new command (step S2404: YES), command correspondence processing is executed (step S2405). In the command correspondence process, an execution target table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 203. The execution target table is a group of information that defines the processing necessary to display one frame of image at each image update timing when displaying a moving image corresponding to a received command on the pattern display device 41. be.

As in the first embodiment, the commands that the display CPU 201 receives from the sound and light side MPU 62 include a command at the start of variation, a command at the start of preview presentation, a command at the start of normal reach, a command at the start of super reach, There are commands for starting a fixed effect, commands for starting a standby display, and commands for starting a fixed display. When these commands are received, an execution target table necessary for executing, on the symbol display device 41, the performance for the game round corresponding to each of these commands is read out.

If a negative determination is made in step S2404 or if the process in step S2405 is executed, task processing is executed (step S2406). In task processing, by referring to the control data of the current processing time in the data table set to be used, a drawing instruction is given to the VDP 205 to display one frame of image corresponding to the current update timing. Configure the various necessary data above. Specifically, the various data include address information of an area where image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 203, address information of an area to which image data to be controlled is transferred in the VRAM 204, and image data to be controlled. There are information on frame regions 212a and 212b for which drawing data should be created, and various information for creating a 3D image using a virtual three-dimensional space.

Thereafter, drawing list output processing is executed (step S2407). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying one frame of images corresponding to the update timing of the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is sent to the VDP 205. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately previous task process is to be drawn, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 205 creates drawing data in the frame areas 212a and 212b of the VRAM 204 according to this drawing list.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the task processing in step S2406.

In the task processing, first, a setting process for starting control is executed (step S2501). In the setting process for starting control, a process for setting an individual image for which control (calculation) is newly started in the display CPU 201 is executed in this processing time. Note that an individual image refers to one 2D image defined by still image data such as back image data, or one 3D image defined by a combination of object image data and texture image data. That's true.

Specifically, regarding the setting process for starting control, first, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be controlled to start in the current processing time. If it exists, the work RAM 202 is searched for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations when controlling the individual image, and it corresponds one-to-one to the individual image recognized as the control start target. Allocate free buffer space. Further, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved free buffer areas, and parameters for starting control according to the individual images are set for the initialized free buffer areas.

After that, the control update target is grasped (step S2502). This control update target is an individual image for which control start processing has been completed and that may be included in one frame of images after the current processing time.

Thereafter, background arithmetic processing is executed (step S2503). In the background calculation process, the coordinates in the world coordinate system, rotation angle, scale, light information for adding brightness, and projection are calculated for the background image and the background character. It executes the process of calculating and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list, such as camera information to be used and Z test designation.

Thereafter, arithmetic processing for presentation is executed (step S2504). In the calculation processing for performance, processing is executed to calculate and derive the various parameters described above for individual images to be displayed in various performances such as reach display, preview display, and jackpot performance.

Thereafter, symbol calculation processing is executed (step S2505). In the symbol calculation process, the various parameters described above are calculated and derived for the image of the symbol that is subject to variable display in each game round.

Incidentally, in each process of steps S2503 to S2505, a process of updating the control start parameters set in step S2501 is executed. Furthermore, in each process from step S2503 to step S2505, animation data is used that is set to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern every time the image is updated. This animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. Further, the animation data is stored in the memory module 203 in advance, and is transferred to the work RAM 202 in advance before the timing when the display CPU 201 needs to read it.

Thereafter, a process of determining the placement target in the world coordinate system is executed (step S2506). In the process of grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system, the process of grasping the individual image to be set as the drawing target in the current drawing list from among the individual images that have become control update targets through the processes of steps S2503 to S2505 above. Execute. This understanding is performed based on the currently set execution target table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

In other words, since the number of individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 201 is greater than the number of individual images to be controlled by the VDP 205, the adjustment is performed in step S2506. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the individual images to be controlled in the display CPU 201 and the individual images to be controlled in the VDP 205 are the same, and in this case, the process of step S2506 is executed. There will be no need.

<Basic processing in VDP205>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 205 will be explained.

The VDP 205 performs a process of setting the value of the register 223 based on a command sent from the display CPU 201, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 212a and 212b of the frame buffer 212 based on the drawing list sent from the display CPU 201, At least a process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 212a and 212b is executed.

Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 223 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I/F 226 for the display CPU 201. Further, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined period (for example, 20 msec) in cooperation with the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222. Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 225 at a predetermined timing to start outputting the image signal.

The process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail below. Prior to explaining the processing, the contents of the drawing list sent from the display CPU 201 to the VDP 205 will be explained. FIGS. 69(a) to 69(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. The header information is set with target buffer information, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 212a and second frame area 212b is to be created for one frame of images related to the drawing list. There is. Further, various kinds of designation information are set in the header information.

In addition to the above header information, the drawing list contains multiple types of image data that will be placed in the world coordinate system when creating the current drawing data, and information on the drawing order of each image data. Parameter information for each image data is set. Specifically, the drawing order information is set to be numerical information of serial numbers, and the parameter information is set in one-to-one correspondence to each numerical information.

In the drawing list in FIG. 69(a), the image data for the back surface is set as the first drawing target, and the background object A is set as the second object, the background object B as the third object, and so on. There is. In addition, image data for presentation is set after these background image data, for example, presentation object A is set as mth, presentation object B is set as m+1st, etc. There is. In addition, image data for symbols is set in order after these image data for production, and for example, symbol object A is set as nth, symbol object B is set as n+1, and so on. There is.

Note that the order in which each image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the above, and the order in which it is set may be the reverse of the above, and Image data for presentation or image data for background may be set after the data, and image data for design is set in the order between image data for predetermined presentation and image data for other presentations. may have been done.

Parameter information P(1), P(2), P(3),..., P(m), P(m+1),..., P(n), P(n+1),... , multiple types of parameter information are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the parameter information P(1) of the image data for the back side includes information on the address of the area where the image data for the back side is stored in the memory module 203, and information on the address of the area where the image data for the back side is stored. Coordinate information indicating the position in the world coordinate system (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) when setting image data for the background, and world coordinates when setting image data for the back side. Rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle within the system, scale information indicating the magnification when setting in the world coordinate system with respect to the scale set as the initial state of the image data for the back side, and the scale information for the back side. Uniform α value information indicating the entire transparency information (or transparency information) when setting image data is set.

Here, the coordinate information is individually set for all vertices of the object data. Furthermore, although this coordinate information is set for object data, it is not set for texture data. In the texture data, coordinate values of each pixel are determined in advance in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 203 in a state attached to the combination of object data and texture data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 205 when performing texture mapping.

Parameter information (P1) includes camera information including information on coordinates and orientation of a virtual camera when projecting image data for the back onto a virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing, and rendering image data for the back. Light information including information on the position and orientation of a virtual light source that determines the shadow in the case is set.

In the parameter information (P1), Z test designation information indicating whether or not to apply the Z buffer method, which is a type of hidden surface removal method, is set. The Z-buffer method is when many objects or two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system, each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) aligned on the Z-axis This is a processing method for depth adjustment in which the distance from the viewpoint is sequentially referred to, and the numerical information set in the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set in the corresponding unit area in the frame regions 212a and 212b.

In addition to the Z-buffer method, a Z-sort method is also set as a method for performing hidden surface removal. The Z sorting method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 212a and 212b for each pixel arranged on the Z axis. When applying the Z sorting method, the α value set for each pixel is referenced, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel lined up on the Z axis. In this state, addition processing and arithmetic processing for fusion of the numerical information are executed. Although a detailed explanation of the processing configuration of hidden surface processing using Z sorting will be omitted, it is activated when displaying an effect image.

The parameter information (P1) includes α data specification information indicating whether α data is applied and to which it is applied, and fog specification information indicating whether fog is to be applied and to which it is applied.

Here, the α value is the transmission information of the corresponding pixel. There are two ways to set this α value on the drawing list: a method of uniformly specifying the α value, and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 201. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of two-dimensional still image data or texture data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 203 as image data. The α data can have different transmission information for each pixel within the same still image data or the same texture data. This α data has a larger data capacity than program data for uniformly setting α values.

By uniformly setting the α value and α data as described above, the transparency of two-dimensional still image data and texture data can be uniformly controlled for all pixels instead of finely controlling it on a pixel-by-pixel basis. In situations where the situation is favorable, the required data capacity can be reduced by uniformly using the α value, and by applying the α data, it is also possible to finely control transparency on a pixel-by-pixel basis.

Fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a predetermined direction in the world coordinate system, specifically, a position in the Z-axis direction. Fog is used to represent fog or the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, the image for one frame will be fogged in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, if you apply the same fog as other objects to an object placed at the back in the Z-axis direction, it will be too dark and will not have a texture, so you may want to set a different fog for the object. It is good to have a configuration. Thereby, it is possible to obtain the effect of setting fog while not impairing the above-mentioned texture.

For other parameters such as parameter information P(2), as shown in FIG. 69(c), among the various information shown in FIG. 69(b), object information and texture are used instead of the information on the image data for the back side. information is set. As this information, information on addresses of areas where objects and textures are stored in the memory module 203 is set.

The drawing process in the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 70. Note that in the following description, the manner in which drawing data is created as the drawing process is executed will be explained with reference to FIG. 71.

First, it is determined whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 201 (step S2601). If a new drawing list has been received, background setting processing is executed (step S2602).

In the background setting process, among the image data specified in the current drawing list, image data for the back surface for displaying the background image and object data for displaying the character are grasped. Then, it is determined whether the image data and object data have already been arranged in the world coordinate system.

If it has not been placed, a free buffer area to be referred to for placement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a free buffer area is secured, initialization processing for that area is executed. After that, in the memory module 203, the address where the image data is stored is grasped and read out, and the coordinate values of the image data in the local coordinate system are set so that the coordinates, rotation angle, and scale specified in the drawing list are obtained. A world conversion process is executed to convert the data into coordinate values in the world coordinate system, and the result is set in the buffer area secured above.

If it is located, update processing of various parameters set in the already secured buffer area is executed. In addition, in the background setting process, a control end process is executed to delete background image data that is not specified in the current drawing list from among the image data already placed in the world coordinate system.

Thereafter, setting processing for presentation is executed (step S2603). In the effect setting process, object data for displaying the effect image is grasped from among the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether the grasped object data has already been placed in the world coordinate system. If it has not been placed, the process for starting placement is executed in the same way as described in the background setting process. If it is located, update processing of various parameters is executed. Furthermore, in the effect setting process, a control end process is executed to delete effect image data that is not specified in the current drawing list from among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

Thereafter, a symbol setting process is executed (step S2604). In the pattern setting process, object data for displaying a pattern is grasped from among the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether the grasped object data has already been placed in the world coordinate system. If it has not been placed, the process for starting placement is executed in the same way as described in the background setting process. If it is located, update processing of various parameters is executed. In addition, in the symbol setting process, a control end process is executed to delete image data for symbols that are not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

By executing the processing from step S2602 to step S2604, as shown in FIG. 71, the object is specified as a placement target by the drawing list within the world coordinate system defined by the X, Y, and Z axes. The scene setting is completed in which the image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged at the coordinates, rotation angle, and scale also specified by the drawing list. Note that FIG. 71 simply shows how the image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged.

Thereafter, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed (step S2605). In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the drawing list, and based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint, the world coordinate system is created with the viewpoint as the origin. Convert to camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 71, the viewpoint PC11 indicated by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding to the viewpoint PC11 is set.

Here, camera information is set for each individual image (image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10), and in reality, a camera coordinate system exists for each individual image. . By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, viewpoint switching can be performed individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 71 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

Thereafter, conversion processing to a visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed (step S2606). In the conversion process to a visual field coordinate system, each of the camera coordinate systems described above is converted to a visual field coordinate system corresponding to a visual field (viewing angle) from a viewpoint. As a result, for each individual image, if it is included in the visual field of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, and the individual images that are close to the viewpoint are enlarged, and the individual images that are far from the viewpoint are reduced.

After that, clipping processing is executed (step S2607). In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S2606 is grasped with the corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. Then, in this state, each individual image is extracted in step S2606 with reference to the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 71) corresponding to the frame areas 212a and 212b (that is, the pattern display device 41) to be drawn. to clip.

After that, writing processing is executed (step S2608). In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and shadows, reflections, etc. are calculated for each object extracted by the clipping process based on the virtual light source. .

Thereafter, color information setting processing is executed (step S2609). In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting color information for each object extracted by the clipping process in units of pixels (that is, units of polygons) or units of vertices. In the color information setting process, a texture mapping process is basically performed to paste corresponding texture data to each object data extracted by the clipping process. Further, depending on the situation, processing such as bump mapping or transparency mapping may be performed.

Thereafter, in steps S2610 and S2611, each individual image extracted in step S2607 and for which lighting processing and color information setting processing have been completed is projected (for example, perspective projection) onto the screen area PC12, which is a virtual two-dimensional plane. or parallel projection) to create drawing data.

Specifically, first, rendering data creation processing for effects and backgrounds is executed (step S2610). In the process of creating drawing data for effects and backgrounds, the image data and object data for the backmost image set as the background image are projected onto the screen area PC 12 while removing hidden surfaces. Create drawing data. Further, by projecting onto the screen area PC12 while removing hidden surfaces from object data set as a performance image, rendering data for performance is created.

Here, the VRAM 204 is provided with a screen buffer 214, as shown in FIG. A buffer and a symbol buffer into which symbol drawing data is written are set. In addition, an area with the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC12 is set in the buffer for effects and background, and the buffer for symbols. The background drawing data and effect drawing data created in step S2610 are stored in the effect and background buffer in such a way that some areas of the background drawing data are overwritten with the effect drawing data. written. Note that if background image data is not specified in the drawing list, background drawing data will not be created, and if presentation image data is not specified in the drawing list, the presentation image data will not be created. No drawing data is created.

After that, drawing data creation processing for the pattern is executed (step S2611). In the process of creating drawing data for symbols, object data set as symbols is projected onto the screen area PC 12 while erasing hidden surfaces, so that object data set as symbols is stored in the symbol buffer in the screen buffer 214. Create drawing data. In addition, if the image data for a symbol is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for a symbol is not created.

Thereafter, drawing data synthesis processing is executed (step S2612). In the drawing data synthesis process, the drawing data for effects and background, which have been individually created in the screen buffer 214 through the processes of steps S2610 and S2611, and the drawing data for symbols are synthesized, and the synthesis result is obtained. One frame's worth of drawing data is written in the frame areas 212a and 212b to be drawn.

In this case, the writing order is stipulated to be arranged from the back side to the front side in the order of rendering data for effects and background → drawing data for symbols. Therefore, to the frame areas 212a and 212b to be drawn, first, drawing data for effects and backgrounds are written, and then drawing data for symbols is written. At this time, if a fully transparent α value is set for the pixel to be drawn, the image at the back is used as is, and if a semitransparent α value is set, the α value is changed. The back image and the foreground image are merged at the standard ratio, and if the opaque alpha value is set, the foreground image is overwritten on the back image. , a blending operation is performed.

Incidentally, each drawing data is specified to have an area equivalent to one frame, but a completely transparent α value is set for a blank portion in which no projection is performed in the drawing data for a symbol.

The creation of the drawing data for one frame is completed within a period of 20 msec. Also, an image signal is output from the display circuit 225 to the pattern display device 41 based on the created drawing data, but as already explained, since the double buffer method is adopted, the output of the image signal is This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data corresponding to an update timing one frame later than the corresponding frame. Furthermore, the display circuit 225 has a selector circuit that alternately switches between the frame areas 212a and 212b to be referenced each time the output of one frame's worth of image signals is completed. The frame areas 212a and 212b that are drawing targets are regulated so that they do not become output targets for outputting image signals.

Note that steps S2602 to S2607 are the processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 221, and steps S2608 to S2612 are the processes executed by the rendering unit 222.

<Configuration for time-based production>
Next, a configuration for performing time-based effects will be described.

The time-based performance is a performance in which the pachinko machine 10 enters a time-based performance state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 minutes) every time a predetermined time arrives. The predetermined times may be set at one-hour intervals, such as 10 o'clock, 11 o'clock, 12 o'clock, etc., for example. In addition, regarding the time-based production state, specifically, a background image corresponding to the time is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the light emission mode in the display light emitting section 44 and the output mode of music from the speaker section 45 also correspond to the time. It becomes a mode. In addition, in the case of a time-based production state, a special corresponding image can be displayed in a game round that results in a jackpot, or the probability that a special corresponding image is displayed in a game round that results in a jackpot is changed depending on the time. It is higher than in the non-acting state. By configuring the pachinko machine 10 to enter a time-based production state when a predetermined time arrives, for example, if a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in a game hall, the pachinko machines 10 It becomes possible to simultaneously perform time-based effects.

In order to enable execution of time-based effects, the audio emission control device 60 is provided with an RTC 65, as shown in FIG. 66. The RTC 65 can output time information to the audio/light MPU 62. The RTC 65 is equipped with its own backup power source, and is able to manage the passage of time even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. By acquiring time information from the RTC 65 as necessary, the sound and light side MPU 62 can specify whether the time at the acquisition timing corresponds to the time corresponding to the start opportunity of the time-based production. Then, when the time information acquired from the RTC 65 corresponds to the time corresponding to the start opportunity of the time-based performance, the sound-light side MPU 62 executes processing for starting the time-based performance.

The manner in which the time-based effects are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72(a) shows a normal period in which time-based effects are not executed, FIG. 72(b) shows a preparation period that is part of the execution period of time-based effects, and FIG. 72(c) shows a preparation period that is a part of the execution period of time-based effects. It shows a special period that is part of the execution period of time-based effects and starts after the preparation period. Further, FIG. 73(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the normal period, and FIG. 73(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the preparation period. FIG. 73(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the special period.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), the time information supplied from the RTC 65 to the MPU 62 at timing t1 during the normal period in which the time-based performance is not executed becomes the time information corresponding to the start opportunity of the time-based performance. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b), the normal period ends and the preparation period starts at the timing t1. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the display mode corresponding to the normal period as shown in FIG. 73(a) to the display mode corresponding to the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73(b). .

The content of the backmost image displayed in the background image is different between the display mode corresponding to the normal period and the display mode corresponding to the preparation period, and the type of individual background image displayed in front of the backmost image. are different. Specifically, while there are two background individual images G61a and G61b displayed in the display mode corresponding to the normal period, there are two background individual images G62a to G62b displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preparation period. There are four G62d. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 becomes more flashy during the preparation period than during the normal period, making it possible to increase the player's attention to the symbol display device 41. Further, during the preparation period, a remaining time notification image G63 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 to notify information corresponding to the remaining time until the start of the special period. As the remaining time notification image G63, the remaining time until the start of the special period is displayed in a subtractive manner. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the start of the special period is approaching. Although the display mode of the symbols is the same in the normal period and the preparation period, the display mode of the symbols may be changed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 72(b) and 72(c), the preparation period ends and the special period begins at timing t2. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the display mode corresponding to the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73(b) to the display mode corresponding to the special period as shown in FIG. 73(c). .

The content of the backmost image displayed in the background image is different between the display mode corresponding to the preparation period and the display mode corresponding to the special period, and the type of the individual image for the background is displayed in front of the backmost image. are different. Specifically, while there are four background individual images G62a to G62d displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preparation period, there are four background individual images G64a to G62d displayed in the display mode corresponding to the special period. G64g has 7 pieces. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 becomes more flashy during the special period than during the preparation period, making it possible to increase the player's attention to the symbol display device 41. Further, during the special period, a special notification image G65 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 to notify that it is a special period. This makes it possible for players to clearly recognize that it is a special period. Although the display mode of the symbols is the same in the preparation period and the special period, the display mode of the symbols may be changed.

At timing t3, which is the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the special period, the special period ends as shown in FIG. 72(c), and returns to the normal period as shown in FIG. 72(a). . Thereafter, time-based effects are executed from timing t4 to timing t6, and from timing t7 to timing t9. In this case, the period from the start of the time-based performance in a predetermined execution time to the start of the time-based performance in the next execution time is constant at Tf1. In addition, the period from the start of the preparation period to the start of the special period in each execution time of the time-based production is also constant at Tf2. Thereby, it is possible to simultaneously start time-based performances in a plurality of pachinko machines 10, and it is also possible to simultaneously start a special period in a plurality of pachinko machines 10.

As mentioned above, the time-based performance will be executed periodically using the time information of the RTC 65, but if the timing to start the time-based performance occurs during the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode will continue. During this period, the backmost image for the preparation period and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period are not displayed as the background image of the symbol display device 41, and furthermore, they are not displayed as the background image of the symbol display device 41. The backmost image for the period and the background individual images G64a to G64g for the special period are not displayed. However, during the preparation period, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed superimposed on a part of the image for opening/closing execution mode from the front, and during the special period, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed overlapping a part of the image for opening/closing execution mode from the front. The special notification image G65 is displayed in an overlapping manner. As a result, by giving priority to execution of the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the player's satisfaction with the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is suitably increased, and the player is informed that the time-based performance is currently being executed. It becomes possible to make it recognized. In addition, even if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the game hall manager can understand that it is actually the execution period for the time-based performance, and can compare multiple pachinko machines 10 to detect abnormalities regarding the RTC 65. It becomes possible to perform the work of confirming whether or not this has occurred, regardless of whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.

On the other hand, the display mode in the display light emitting section 44 and the output mode of music from the speaker section 45 become time-based from the start timing of the time-based performance even during the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, the display mode in the display light emitting section 44 and the output mode of music from the speaker section 45 can be made the same in a time-corresponding manner in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

If the opening/closing execution mode ends in a situation where the start timing of the time-based production occurs during the opening/closing execution mode, which is normally the period during which the time-based production is being executed, the end timing corresponds to the preparation period. If so, the display of the backmost image for the preparation period and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period is started as the background image of the symbol display device 41, and the display of the remaining time notification image G63 is continued. In addition, if the end timing of the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the special period, the backmost image for the special period and the individual background images G64a to G64g for the special period are used as the background image of the symbol display device 41. As soon as the display starts, the display of the special notification image G65 continues. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the time-based performance according to the original execution mode.

The maximum duration of the opening/closing execution mode is longer than the preparation period but shorter than the special period. As a result, when it is time to start a time-based performance during the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode ends in the middle of the execution of the time-based performance. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the time-based performance according to the original execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the longest duration period of the opening/closing execution mode may be longer than the execution period of the time-based performance.

If it is time to start a time-based performance while a game-only performance is being executed, the time-based performance will be started in a situation where the game-time performance is not being executed and the opening/closing mode performance is not being executed. The start mode of the time-based performance is different from the case where the start timing of the performance has arrived. Specifically, when the time-based effect is started while the game repeat effect is being executed, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 74, the background image, effect image, and symbol image are The display mode of the performance for the game round is continued. That is, the display of the backmost image for the preparation period and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period as background images of the symbol display device 41 is not started. However, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed from the front on a part of the background image that is displayed as an effect of the game repetition. Incidentally, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as not to overlap with the symbol so as not to reduce the visibility of the symbol.

Hereinafter, the manner in which the time-based performance is executed in relation to the execution status of the performance for the game round will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 75. FIG. 75(a) shows the start timing of the time-based effects, and FIG. 75(b) shows the execution period of the demonstration display that is executed in a situation where neither the game repeat effect nor the opening/closing execution mode effect is being executed. , FIG. 75(c) shows the execution period of the game replay, FIG. 75(d) shows the preparation period, and FIG. 75(e) shows the delay period during which the image display as shown in FIG. 74 is performed. FIG. 75(f) shows a display period of a preparation period image in which an image as shown in FIG. 73(b) is displayed as a background image, and FIG. 75(g) shows a special period. (h) indicates a time-based light emission control period.

First, a case will be described in which the start timing of the time-based performance occurs in a situation where the performance for the game round and the performance for the opening/closing execution mode are not being executed.

As shown in FIG. 75(b), the timing t1 in the execution period of the demonstration display is the start timing of the time-based performance as shown in FIG. 75(a). In this case, at the timing t1, the preparation period starts as shown in FIG. 75(d), and the display of the preparation period image starts as shown in FIG. 75(f). Further, at the timing of t1, the display light emitting section 44 starts emitting light in a time-based manner as shown in FIG. 75(h). Note that the speaker unit 45 also starts outputting music in a time-based manner at the timing t1.

Thereafter, at timing t2, which is in the middle of the preparation period, the performance of the game round is started as shown in FIG. 75(c). In this case, the variable display of symbols is started while the background image for the preparation period is being displayed. In other words, the variable display of symbols is started while the background image for the preparation period continues to be displayed in a manner consistent with the previous display pattern.

Thereafter, at timing t3 during the execution of the performance for the game round, the preparation period ends as shown in FIG. 75(d) and the special period begins as shown in FIG. 75(g). In this case, the display of the background image for the special period is started while the symbols continue to be displayed variably in accordance with the previous display pattern. Then, at timing t4, when the demo display is being executed as shown in FIG. 75(b), the execution period guaranteed as the special period passes, and as shown in FIG. 75(g), The special period has ended, and with it, the time-based effects for the current run will end. At the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 75(h), the display light emitting section 44 finishes emitting light in a time-based manner. Note that the speaker unit 45 also stops outputting music in a time-based manner at the timing t4. In addition, if the execution period guaranteed as a special period has passed while a game replay is being executed, the game replay will end and a new game replay will start. The special period ends when the demo display starts.

Next, a case will be described in which the time-based performance is started in a situation where the performance for the game round is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 75(c), the timing of t5 in the execution period of the performance for the second game is the start timing of the time-based performance as shown in FIG. 75(a). In this case, at the timing of t5, the preparation period starts as shown in FIG. 75(d), but the display of the background image for the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73(b) does not start. , a delay period starts as shown in FIG. 75(e). During the delay period, as already explained, the remaining time notification image G63 is added while the image display of the game replay effect according to the previous display pattern is continued.

On the other hand, at the timing t5, the display light emitting section 44 starts emitting light in a manner corresponding to time, as shown in FIG. 75(h). Note that the speaker unit 45 also starts outputting music in a time-based manner at the timing t5. As a result, the display mode in the display light emitting section 44 and the output mode of music from the speaker section 45 can be made the same in a time-corresponding manner in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

Thereafter, at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 75(c), the performance for the game run that has been executed up to that point ends, and at the same time, at the timing t7, a new performance for the game run is started. At the timing t7, the delay period ends as shown in FIG. 75(e), and the display of the background image for the preparation period starts as shown in FIG. 75(f). In other words, if it is time to start a time-based effect during the execution of a game-based effect, the background image for the preparation period will not be displayed until the game-based effect ends, and the background image for the preparation period will not be displayed. When a performance for a game run ends and a new performance for a game run is started, display of a background image for a preparation period is started. Furthermore, when the performance for a game run ends and a new performance for a game run is not started, the display of the background image for the preparation period is started when the demonstration display is started. As a result, the background image for the preparation period starts to be displayed during the period from the end of the game replay to the start of a new game replay or the start of the demo display. It can be used as a control period for Note that the demonstration display is started when 0.5 sec has elapsed without starting a new game-time performance or opening/closing execution mode performance after the game-time performance ends.

Thereafter, at timing t8 during the performance of the game round, the preparation period ends as shown in FIG. 75(d) and the special period begins as shown in FIG. 75(g). In this case, the display of the background image for the special period is started while the symbols continue to be displayed variably in accordance with the previous display pattern. Then, at timing t9, when the demo display is being executed as shown in FIG. 75(b), the execution period guaranteed as the special period passes, and as shown in FIG. 75(g), The special period has ended, and with it, the time-based effects for the current run will end. At the timing t9, as shown in FIG. 75(h), the display light emitting section 44 finishes emitting light in a time-based manner. Note that the speaker section 45 also stops outputting music in a time-based manner at the timing t9.

As described above, when the time-based effect comes to start in a situation where the game replay effect is being executed, the background image, the effect image, and the symbol image will continue to display the previous game replay effect. At the same time, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed from the front on a part of the background image that is being displayed as an effect of the game round. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the time-based performance is being executed while maintaining the display of images according to the content that has already been determined as the performance for the game round.

In particular, if you try to start displaying the background image for the preparation period in a situation where a super reach character image is displayed as a game rendition and a super reach character image is displayed as a performance for the game round, if you try to start displaying the background image for the preparation period, the image will be displayed on the symbol display device 41. There is a risk that the number of types of image data used will be extremely large, resulting in an extremely high processing load. On the other hand, if it is time to start a time-based effect in a situation where a game-based effect is being executed, simply adding the remaining time notification image G63 is enough to determine that the time-based effect has already been determined as a game-based effect. The display of the image is maintained according to the content. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely high as described above.

Here, the duration Tf3 of the preparation period is constant, and the duration Tf3 is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected in the game repeat performance. As a result, even if the start timing of a time-based effect occurs while a game-based effect is being executed, regardless of the variable display time of the game-based effect and the start timing of the time-based effect, The performance of the game replay that is in progress ends before the preparation period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to secure a period during which the background image for the preparation period is displayed before the special period starts.

By securing a period in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed in this way, when the special period starts, the background image for the special period as shown in FIG. 73(c) is displayed from the start timing. It becomes possible to start displaying. This makes it possible for multiple pachinko machines 10 to easily start displaying background images for the special period at the same time.

Next, a data structure for executing time-based effects will be explained.

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 76(a), a data table 231 for time-based effects is stored in advance in the sound-light side ROM 63. The data table 231 for time-based effects is a table that is referred to in order to control the execution of time-based effects in the sound and light side MPU 62. FIG. 76(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data table 231 for time-based effects.

In the data table 231 for time-based production, pointer information corresponding to the update timing of one frame of images is set, and information on various timings, light emission data, and sound output data are set in correspondence with each pointer information. A combination has been set. By referring to various timing information corresponding to the referenced pointer information, the start timing of the preparation period, the transfer timing of the image data group 233 for the special period, the end timing of the preparation period, and the start timing of the special period can be determined. It becomes possible for the sound and light MPU 62 to specify the return timing of the image data group for normal performance and the end timing of the execution period guaranteed as the special period. In addition, by controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 using the light emission data (PD(0), PD(1), etc.) corresponding to the pointer information that is the reference target, the display light emitting unit 44 can be controlled. It is now possible to make the light emission mode correspond to the time, and the speaker section 45 can be controlled by using the sound output data (SD(0), SD(1)...) corresponding to the pointer information being referenced. By executing the sound output control, it becomes possible to make the output mode of the sound from the speaker section 45 correspond to the time.

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 77, the memory module 203 of the display control device 200 includes an image data group 232 for the preparation period, an image data group 233 for the special period, a remaining time correspondence table 234, and a table 235 for the preparation period. , a special notification correspondence table 236, and a special period table 237 are stored in advance. The image data group 232 for the preparation period includes image data for displaying the backmost image for the preparation period, image data for displaying background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period, and remaining time notification. Image data for displaying image G63 is included. The image data group 233 for the special period includes image data for displaying the backmost image for the special period, image data for displaying background individual images G64a to G64g for the special period, and a special notification image. Contains image data for displaying G65.

The remaining time correspondence table 234 is data for controlling the display of the remaining time notification image G63 during the preparation period regardless of whether it is a delay period or not, and is data for each pointer information corresponding to the update timing of one frame of image. Correspondingly, parameter information applied to the image data for displaying the remaining time notification image G63 is set. The preparation period table 235 is data for controlling the display of a background image for the preparation period in a preparation period that is not a delay period. Parameter information applied to image data for displaying a background image for a period is set. Since the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 are provided separately, display control for the preparation period can be performed during the delay period in which the background image for the preparation period is not displayed even during the preparation period. By referring only to the remaining time correspondence table 234, it is possible to display the remaining time notification image G63 in a situation where the background image for the preparation period is not displayed. On the other hand, during the preparation period and other than the delay period, by referring to both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235, the remaining time is notified in a situation where the background image for the preparation period is displayed. It becomes possible to display image G63.

The special notification correspondence table 236 is data for controlling the display of the special notification image G65 during the special period regardless of whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode, and is data for controlling the display of the special notification image G65 in the special period, regardless of whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode. Correspondingly, parameter information applied to the image data for displaying the special notification image G65 is set. The special period table 237 is data for controlling the display of a background image for a special period in a special period that is not in the opening/closing execution mode, and corresponds to each pointer information corresponding to the update timing of one frame of image. Parameter information applied to image data for displaying a background image for the special period is set. Since the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237 are provided separately, it is possible to perform display control for the special period during a period in which the background image for the special period is not displayed even during the special period. By referring only to the special notification correspondence table 236, it is possible to display the special notification image G65 in a situation where the background image for the special period is not displayed. On the other hand, in the special period and not in the opening/closing execution mode, by referring to both the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237, the special notification can be made in the situation where the background image for the special period is displayed. It becomes possible to display image G65.

As already explained, the special period will end when the execution period guaranteed as the special period has passed, but if the effect for the game round is being executed or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. In the case where the execution period guaranteed as the special period has passed, the performance for the game run in the middle of execution or the performance for the open/close execution mode will end and a new performance for the game run will start. or when the demo display is started anew. Then, when the special period ends, it will return to normal production. Correspondingly, the special period table 237 is set to correspond to a period longer than the longest period that the special period can continue. Thereby, even if the end timing of the special period occurs irregularly, it is possible to continue the special period until the end timing occurs.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing time-based effects will be explained. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing RTC compatible processing executed by the audio-optical side MPU 62. Note that the RTC compatible process is executed in the table setting process of step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

If it is the start timing of the preparation period (step S2701: YES), a setting process for starting the preparation period is executed (step S2702). In the setting process for starting the preparation period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 79, the data table 231 for time-based effects is first read out from the sound and light side ROM 63 to the sound and light side RAM 64 (step S2801). Thereafter, a read instruction command for preparation period data is sent to the display CPU 201 (step S2802).

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the command corresponding processing executed by the display CPU 201. Note that the command corresponding processing is executed in step S2405 of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 67). When the display CPU 201 receives a command for reading data for the preparation period (step S2901: YES), the display CPU 201 transfers data other than texture data from the image data group 232 for the preparation period from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. The data is transferred (step S2902). Note that the texture data among the image data group 232 for the preparation period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. By executing the process of step S2902, all of the image data group 232 for the preparation period is stored in the VRAM 204 at the start of the preparation period, regardless of whether or not the delay period starts when the preparation period starts. It is in a state where it has been read into the expansion buffer 211. This makes it possible to smoothly update the background image for the preparation period and update the remaining time notification image G63 during the preparation period.

Returning to the explanation of the preparation period start setting process (FIG. 79), after executing the process of step S2802, it is determined whether the current situation is a delay target situation (step S2803). A situation where a performance for the game round is being executed or a situation where a performance for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed corresponds to the delay target situation. If the situation is to be delayed (step S2803: YES), the delaying flag provided in the audio/light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S2804). The delay flag is a flag used by the audio and optical side MPU 62 to specify that it is a delay period. Thereafter, a delay command is sent to the display CPU 201 (step S2805).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the delay command (step S2903: YES), the display CPU 201 causes the remaining time correspondence table 234 to be transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2904). As a result, display of the remaining time notification image G63 will start on the symbol display device 41.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for starting the preparation period (FIG. 79), if the current situation is not a delay target situation (step S2803: NO), the preparation display flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 64 is set to "1". (Step S2806). The preparation display flag is a flag for specifying in the sound/light side MPU 62 that the background image for the preparation period is being displayed. Thereafter, a preparation display start command is sent to the display CPU 201 (step S2807).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the preparation display start command (step S2905: YES), it executes read processing for the preparation period (step S2906). In the read processing for the preparation period, if the remaining time correspondence table 234 has already been read out to the work RAM 202, the preparation period table 235 is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202, so that the remaining time correspondence table 234 is read out from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202. It is assumed that both the table 234 and the preparation period table 235 have been read. In addition, in the read processing for the preparation period, if the remaining time correspondence table 234 is not read out to the work RAM 202, both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 are read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202. . By reading both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 to the work RAM 202, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed in a situation where the background image for the preparation period is displayed.

Returning to the description of the RTC compatible process (FIG. 78), if the preparation period is in progress (step S2703: YES), the setting process during the preparation period is executed (step S2704). In the setting process during the preparation period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. If "1" is set (step S3003: YES), it is determined whether it is time to cancel the delay (step S3004). If a delay period occurs due to the start timing of a time-based performance in a situation where a performance for a game run is being executed, the performance for that game run ends and a new game run is started. or when the demonstration display has started, it is determined that it is time to cancel the delay. In addition, if a delay period occurs due to the start timing of a time-based performance in a situation where a performance for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the performance for the opening/closing execution mode ends and a new game is started. It is determined that it is time to cancel the delay when the replay performance or demonstration display is started.

If it is time to release the delay (step S3004: YES), the delayed flag in the sound-light side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3005), and the preparation display flag in the sound-light side RAM 64 is set to "1" ( Step S3006). Thereafter, a preparation display start command is sent to the display CPU 201 (step S3007). The processing content of the display CPU 201 when the preparation display start command is received is as already described.

In the setting process during the preparation period, if it is determined that it is the data transfer timing based on the data table 231 for time-based effects (step S3002: YES), a special period data read instruction command is sent to the display CPU 201 ( Step S3008). As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period data read instruction command (step S2907: YES), the display CPU 201 transfers data other than texture data from the special period image data group 233 to the memory module. 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2908). Note that the texture data among the image data group 233 for the special period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. By executing the process in step S2908, all of the image data group 233 for the special period will be read into the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 before the special period starts. This makes it possible to start displaying the background image for the special period and the special notification image G65 early at the start of the special period, and also to update the background image for the special period and the special notification image G65 during the special period. This makes it possible to carry out the process smoothly.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process during the preparation period (FIG. 81), if it is determined that it is the end timing of the preparation period based on the data table 231 for time-based effects (step S3001: YES), the sound and light side RAM 64 is delayed. The flag and the preparation display flag are cleared to "0" (step S3009), and the special period flag provided in the sound/light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3010). The special period flag is a flag used by the audio and optical side MPU 62 to specify that it is a special period. Thereafter, a special period start command is sent to the display CPU 201 (step S3011).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period start command (step S2909: YES), it transfers the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237 from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2909: YES). S2910). By reading the special notification correspondence table 236 into the work RAM 202, the display of the special notification image G65 will be started on the symbol display device 41 regardless of whether or not it is in the opening/closing execution mode. Further, if the situation is not the opening/closing execution mode, display of a background image for special effects will be started on the symbol display device 41.

Returning to the explanation of the RTC compatible process (FIG. 78), if it is during the special period (step S2705: YES), the setting process during the special period is executed (step S2706). In the setting process during the special period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82, if it is not the end timing of the special period (step S3101: NO), it is determined whether it is the data return timing based on the data table 231 for time-based effects. is determined (step S3102). If it is determined that it is the data restoration timing (step S3102: YES), a normal period data read instruction command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3103).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the normal period data read instruction command (step S2911: YES), the display CPU 201 displays a background image for the normal effect in a situation where the time-based effect is not executed. The data other than the texture data among the image data group for image processing is transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2912).

Returning to the explanation of the setting process during the special period (FIG. 82), if it is determined that it is the end timing of the execution period guaranteed as the special period based on the data table 231 for time-based effects (step S3101: YES), The process advances to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not it is possible to return from the time-based performance to the normal performance. If the demo display is being performed at the end of the execution period that is guaranteed as a special period, the return possibility status is the end timing of the execution period that is guaranteed as the special period, and the end timing of the execution period that is guaranteed as the special period. If a game run performance or an opening/closing execution mode performance is being executed in , the game play performance or opening/closing execution mode performance that is in progress will end and a new game play performance will start. This is the timing when the demo display is started or the demo display is started.

If the situation is such that recovery is possible (step S3104: YES), the light emission control and sound output control for the special period are ended (step S3105). As a result, the display light emitting section 44 is controlled to emit light in the normal presentation mode in a situation where the time-based presentation is not being executed, and the speaker section 45 is controlled to be in the normal presentation mode in a situation where the time-based presentation is not being executed. Sound output control is resumed. Thereafter, the special period flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3106), and a special period end command is sent to the display CPU 201 (step S3107).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period end command (step S2913: YES), the display CPU 201 creates a table for displaying a background image for normal effects in a situation where time-based effects are not being executed. is transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2914). As a result, the display of the background image for the special period is ended on the symbol display device 41, and the display of the background image for the normal performance is restarted. In addition, in the command corresponding process, when another command is received, the corresponding process is executed (step S2915).

Next, the table setting process in this embodiment executed by the audio/light side MPU 62 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. executed.

If the variation command and type command have been received from the main MPU 52 (step S3201: YES), storage processing of game results is executed (step S3202). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, the results of the jackpot occurrence lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 52 at the start of the current game round are identified, and the results are identified. The information is written to the sound-light side RAM 64.

After that, if the variable display time corresponding to the variation command received this time from the main MPU 52 is the variable display time corresponding to the occurrence of a reach effect (step S3203: YES), a lottery process is performed to determine the type of reach effect. The selection process of the lottery table to be used is executed. Specifically, regarding the selection process of the lottery table, if the preparation display flag in the sound-light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3204: YES), the lottery table for the preparation period is selected in the sound-light side ROM 63. The data is read out to the sound/light side RAM 64 (step S3205). Furthermore, if the special period flag in the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3206: YES), the special period lottery table is read from the sound and light side ROM 63 to the sound and light side RAM 64 (step S3207). . Further, if neither the preparation display flag nor the special period flag is set to "1" (step S3206: NO), the normal period lottery table is read from the sound-light side ROM 63 to the sound-light side RAM 64. Then, out of the preparation period lottery table, the special period lottery table, and the normal period lottery table, the lottery table selected for use this time is used to execute the reach effect lottery process (step S3209). In the reach effect lottery process, the value of the reach lottery counter at that time is acquired, and the acquired value is compared against the lottery table selected for use this time. Then, the reach lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the reach lottery counter is acquired as the result of the current reach effect lottery process.

Here, a plurality of types of ready-to-reach effects are set, and each type of ready-to-win effect has a different processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying images for the ready-to-reach effect on the symbol display device 41. Note that the difference in processing load occurs depending on the type of image data and the size of the image data used to display the reach effect image. The reach effect includes a heavy load effect, which requires the highest processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying the reach effect image, and a medium load effect, which requires a smaller processing load on the VDP 205 to display the reach effect image than the high load effect. , and a low-load performance in which the processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying images for a reach performance is smaller than the medium-load performance. In this case, the normal period lottery table includes all of the types of reach effects to be selected, such as large load effects, medium load effects, and small load effects. On the other hand, the preparation period lottery table does not include large load effects and medium load effects, but includes small load effects as types of reach effects to be selected. In addition, the special period lottery table does not include large load effects as types of reach effects to be selected, but includes medium load effects and small load effects.

During the special period, as already explained, the background image for the special period is displayed, so the processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 is greater than during the preparation period and the normal period. On the other hand, during the special period, the heavy load performance is not selected as the reach performance. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a large load effect is displayed while displaying a background image for the special period during the special period, and a situation in which the processing load on the VDP 205 becomes extremely large can be prevented. It is possible to prevent this from occurring.

When starting a special period, it is necessary to initialize all the image data necessary to display the background image for the special period to the world coordinate system, so the VDP205 is smaller than when updating the special period. The processing load increases accordingly. On the other hand, during the preparation period that occurs before the special period, the high load performance and medium load performance are not selected as the reach performance. As a result, even if a transition to a special period occurs in a situation where a game repeat performance that started during the preparation period is being executed, the transition to the special period will occur during the execution of a heavy load performance or a medium load performance. It is possible to prevent this from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load on the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

As already explained, the execution period of the preparation period is set to be longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected as a performance for the game round. Thereby, even if a large load performance or a medium load performance may be executed as a ready-to-win performance in a game repeat performance started in the normal period, these ready-to-win performances are completed by the end timing of the preparation period. As already explained, the heavy load performance and the medium load performance are not selected in the game repeat performance started during the preparation period. This makes it possible to prevent transition to the special period from occurring in a situation where a heavy load performance or a medium load performance is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load on the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

In addition, the lottery table for the special period includes a reach effect in which a special compatible image is displayed as a reach effect that can be selected in the game round that results in a jackpot, and the lottery table for the regular period and the lottery table for the preparation period include a reach effect that can be selected in the game round that results in a jackpot. The reach effect in which the special compatible image is displayed is not included. This makes it possible to set effects that occur only during the special period.

If a negative determination is made in step S3203, or if the process in step S3209 is executed, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S3210). The contents of the stop symbol determination process are the same as step S407 of the table setting process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

Thereafter, control pattern table setting processing is executed (step S3211). The control pattern table setting process corresponds to the combination of the presence or absence of a ready-to-win effect, the result of the ready-to-win effect lottery process (step S3209), and the result of the stop symbol determination process (step S3210) if a ready-to-win effect occurs. The control pattern table is read from the audio-optical side ROM 63 and stored in the audio-optical side RAM 64.

Thereafter, a process for determining a variable display time is executed (step S3212). In this process, the information on the variable display time of the current game round is specified from the content of the variable command currently received from the main side MPU 52, and the information on the specified variable display time is stored in the sound-light side RAM 64. Set in the variable time counter. The variable time counter is a counter for specifying the timing at which the sound-light side MPU 62 ends the variable display of symbols on the symbol display device 41 and starts the fixed display of the symbols in the current game round. The value set in the variable time counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated in the audio-light side MPU 62, that is, each time 4 msec elapses.

Thereafter, a variable pattern command including information corresponding to the control pattern table selected in step S3211 is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3213). Thereby, the display CPU 201 starts the performance of the game repetition on the symbol display device 41, and also advances the performance of the game repetition in a manner according to the performance content determined by the sound and light side MPU 62. In this case, if it is determined that a ready-to-win effect will occur in the current game round, the selected ready-to-win effect is executed on the symbol display device 41 in step S3209. Note that in the table setting process, in addition to the above-mentioned processes, other processes are executed in step S3214. Other contents of the process are the same as step S415 of the table setting process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

As described above, when the time information of the RTC 65 is the time corresponding to the start opportunity of the time-based performance, the time-based performance is started. This makes it possible to execute a predetermined effect upon reaching a predetermined time. Further, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in a game hall, it is possible to simultaneously start time-based performances on the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

In this case, when the time-based production is started, a preparation period occurs first, and when the preparation period has passed, the display content of the image on the symbol display device 41 becomes more flashy than during the preparation period. A period occurs. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the special period is about to occur, and it becomes possible to gradually increase expectations for the special period to occur. Further, during the preparation period, a remaining time notification image G63 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and in the remaining time notification image G63, the remaining time until the special period starts is displayed in a subtractive manner. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the start of the special period is approaching.

When the timing to start the time-based production occurs while the production for the game cycle is being executed, the display mode of the background image, production image, and symbol image is continued while the display mode of the production for the game cycle is continued. The remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed from the front on a part of the background image displayed as a replay effect. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the time-based performance is being executed while maintaining the display of images according to the content that has already been determined as the performance for the game round.

In particular, if you try to start displaying a background image for the preparation period in a situation where a super reach character image is displayed as a game rendition, and a super reach character image is displayed as a performance for the game, if you try to start displaying the background image for the preparation period, the image will not be displayed on the symbol display device 41. There is a risk that the number of types of image data used will be extremely large, resulting in an extremely large processing load. On the other hand, if it is time to start a time-based effect in a situation where a game-based effect is being executed, simply adding the remaining time notification image G63 is enough to determine that the time-based effect has already been determined as a game-based effect. The display of the image is maintained according to the content. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely large as described above.

The duration of the preparation period is constant, and the duration is set as a longer time than the longest variable display time that can be selected in the game repeat performance. As a result, even if the start timing of a time-based effect occurs while a game-based effect is being executed, regardless of the variable display time of the game-based effect and the start timing of the time-based effect, The performance of the game replay that is in progress ends before the preparation period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to secure a period during which the background image for the preparation period is displayed before the special period starts.

By securing the period in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed in this way, when the special period starts, it is possible to start displaying the background image for the special period from the start timing. Become. This makes it possible for multiple pachinko machines 10 to easily start displaying background images for the special period at the same time.

Since a background image for the special period is displayed during the special period, the processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 is greater than during the preparation period and the normal period. On the other hand, during the special period, the heavy load performance is not selected as the reach performance. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a large load effect is displayed while displaying a background image for the special period during the special period, and a situation in which the processing load on the VDP 205 becomes extremely large can be prevented. It is possible to prevent this from occurring.

When starting a special period, it is necessary to initialize all the image data necessary to display the background image for the special period to the world coordinate system, so the VDP205 is smaller than when updating the special period. The processing load increases accordingly. On the other hand, during the preparation period that occurs before the special period, the high load performance and medium load performance are not selected as the reach performance. As a result, even if a transition to a special period occurs in a situation where a game repeat performance that started during the preparation period is being executed, the transition to the special period will occur during the execution of a heavy load performance or a medium load performance. It is possible to prevent this from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load on the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

The execution period of the preparation period is set to be longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected as a performance for the game repeat. Thereby, even if a large load performance or a medium load performance may be executed as a ready-to-win performance in a game repeat performance started in the normal period, these ready-to-win performances are completed by the end timing of the preparation period. In addition, the heavy load performance and the medium load performance are not selected in the game repeat performance started during the preparation period. This makes it possible to prevent transition to the special period from occurring in a situation where a heavy load performance or a medium load performance is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load on the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

The display light emitting unit 44 emits light in a time-based manner and the speaker unit 45 outputs sound in a time-based manner depending on whether or not the game round performance is in the middle of execution when the time-based performance starts. It will start regardless. As a result, if it is time to start a time-based presentation in a situation where a presentation for a game run is being executed, the background image for the preparation period on the symbol display device 41 will remain unchanged until the presentation for that game play ends. Even if the contents of the background images on the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are not the same due to the display being delayed, the contents of the light emitted by the display light emitting section 44 and the contents of the sound output from the speaker section 45 will be the same as those of the plurality of pachinko machines. This makes it possible to start both machines 10 at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that time-based presentations have started simultaneously on a plurality of pachinko machines 10.

<Another form of time-based production>
- In addition to or in place of the configuration in which a background image for the preparation period is displayed on the symbol display device 41 during the preparation period, the display mode of the symbols that are variably displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is the display for the preparation period. Alternatively, a predetermined character image may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the preparation period. Also, during the special period, in addition to or in place of the configuration in which the background image for the special period is displayed on the pattern display device 41, the display mode of the symbols variably displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is changed to the display mode for the special period. The display mode may be a display mode, or a predetermined character image may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the special period.

- If the execution period guaranteed as the special period has passed in a situation where a demonstration display is being performed on the symbol display device 41, if a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the timing at which the execution period has elapsed. It may also be configured such that the special period ends and the normal performance returns. In this case, it becomes possible to return the image data group for normal effects to the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 using the predetermined time, and also set the image data group for normal effects to the world coordinate system. It is now possible to make initial settings for

・If the execution period guaranteed as a special period has elapsed in a situation where the performance for the game round is being executed, even if the performance for the open/close execution mode is executed following the performance for the game round. , the special period may be configured to end when the performance of the game round ends. This makes it possible to prevent the special period from continuing for an extremely long time.

・The configuration is not limited to using the RTC 65 to specify the start timing of the time-based performance. For example, a timer counter provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 can be used to specify the start timing of the time-based performance since the last time the time-based performance was started. It may be configured such that the elapsed time is measured, and when the measured elapsed time becomes a time corresponding to the generation cycle of the time-based performance, the sound and light side MPU 62 identifies that it is the start timing of the time-based performance. .

- All of the texture data is not read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 starts, but when it becomes necessary to use the texture data, the texture data to be used is It may also be configured to be read each time. In this case, in step S2902 in the command response process (FIG. 80), all of the image data group 232 for the preparation period is read out, in step S2908, all of the image data group 233 for the special period is read out, and in step S2912, all of the image data group 233 for the special period is read out. All of the image data group for displaying the background image for normal performance will be read out.

- During the preparation period, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 84, the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are displayed in the compartment display area G66 set in a part of the symbol display device 41, and the symbols in the area other than the compartment display area G66 are displayed. A configuration may also be adopted in which a background image for the preparation period is displayed. This makes it possible to emphasize and display the fact that it is a preparation period.

- A configuration may be adopted in which the start of a new game performance is restricted during the preparation period, and the restricted state is canceled when the special period starts. This makes it possible to prevent the special period from starting during the execution of the performance for the game round.

・When it is time to start the time-based performance, if neither the game run performance nor the opening/closing execution mode performance has been executed, the special period will start without going through the preparation period, and the time-based performance will start. When it is time to start the production, if a production for the game round or a production for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, there will be a preparation period while these productions are being executed, and the production that was in the middle of execution will be canceled. A configuration may also be adopted in which the special period starts when the special period ends.

- At least one of the time-based light emission control period in the display light emitting unit 44 and the time-based sound output control period in the speaker unit 45 is performed after a predetermined second has elapsed with respect to the start timing of the time-based production in the symbol display device 41. The configuration may be started. In this case, it is preferable that the control period to be started after the predetermined second has passed is started before the special period starts in the symbol display device 41.

<Another form of time-based production>
・In this alternative form, if the timing to start a time-based performance occurs in a situation where a game play performance or opening/closing execution mode performance is being executed, the game play performance or opening/closing execution mode that is in the middle of its execution No images for the preparation period, including the remaining time notification image G63, are displayed until the performance for the preparation period ends. The processing configuration for producing this effect will be described below. Note that the description of the same configurations as those of the above embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the setting process for starting the preparation period in this alternative embodiment.

First, the data table 231 for time-based effects is read from the ROM 63 to the RAM 64 (step S3301). Thereafter, a read instruction command for preparation period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3302). As a result, similarly to the embodiment described above, the display CPU 201 causes data other than the texture data among the image data group 232 for the preparation period to be transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. Note that the texture data among the image data group 232 for the preparation period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started.

After executing the process in step S3302, it is determined whether the current situation is a delay target situation (step S3303). A situation where a performance for the game round is being executed or a situation where a performance for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed corresponds to the delay target situation. If the situation is to be delayed (step S3303: YES), the delayed flag provided in the audio/light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3304).

If the current situation is not a delay target situation (step S3303: NO), the preparation display flag provided in the audio/light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3305). Thereafter, a duration period for displaying the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 as a preparation display is calculated (step S3306). This time, the preparation period starts at the start timing of the time-based performance, so the duration of the preparation display is the time from the start timing of the time-based performance to the start timing of the special period. Then, the information corresponding to the duration of the preparation display calculated in step S3306 is set in the preparation display start command read from the sound-light side ROM 63 (step S3307), and the preparation display start command is sent to the display CPU 201. Transmit (step S3308).

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing command corresponding processing in this alternative embodiment. When the display CPU 201 receives the preparation display start command (step S3401: YES), the display CPU 201 determines the remaining period of the preparation period from the preparation display start command (step S3402). Then, when displaying a subtraction of the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 from a fixed start value (for example, "60") to a fixed end value (for example, "0") within the remaining period of the preparation period, The update cycle of the count value is set (step S3403). Specifically, the display of the count value is started from a fixed starting value, and while the update cycle of the count value and the subtraction value (specifically "1") of the count value in one update cycle are constant, The update cycle of the count value necessary for the count value to reach a fixed end value during the remaining period of the preparation period is calculated. Then, the preparation period table corresponding to the calculation result is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S3404). Thereby, the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is updated according to the update cycle calculated in step S3403. Note that in the command-compatible processing, processing other than the above-mentioned processing is also executed.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the setting process during the preparation period in this alternative embodiment.

If it is neither the end timing of the preparation period nor the data transfer timing (step S3501 and step S3502: NO), and the delayed flag of the audio-optical side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3503: YES), the delay occurs. It is determined whether it is the release timing (step S3504). If a delay period occurs due to the start timing of a time-based performance in a situation where a game replay is being executed, the game replay ends and a new game replay is started. or when the demonstration display has started, it is determined that it is time to cancel the delay. In addition, if a delay period occurs due to the start timing of a time-based performance in a situation where a performance for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the performance for the opening/closing execution mode ends and a new game is started. It is determined that it is time to cancel the delay when the replay performance or demonstration display is started.

If it is time to cancel the delay (step S3504: YES), the delayed flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3505), and the preparation display flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3506). Thereafter, the duration period for displaying the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 as a preparation display is calculated (step S3507). This time, since the preparation period starts at a later timing than the start timing of the time-based performance, the remaining period up to the start timing of the special period becomes the duration of the preparation display. Then, the information corresponding to the duration period for the preparation display calculated in step S3507 is set in the preparation display start command read from the sound-light side ROM 63 (step S3508), and the preparation display start command is sent to the display CPU 201. Send (step S3509). As a result, the processing of steps S3402 to S3404 already explained in the command corresponding processing (FIG. 86) in the display CPU 201 is executed, so that the count in the remaining time notification image G63 is performed during the remaining period of the preparation period as already explained. The value is subtracted from a fixed starting value until it reaches a fixed ending value.

Note that the processing contents of steps S3510 to S3513 are the same as the processing contents of steps S3008 to S3011 in the setting process during the preparation period (FIG. 81) in the above embodiment.

As mentioned above, when the time-based performance is started in a situation where the game run performance or the opening/closing execution mode performance is being executed, if the time-based performance is started, The display of images for the preparation period, including the remaining time notification image G63, does not start until the presentation is completed. As a result, for example, in a situation where expectations for a jackpot result are high due to a predetermined reach effect being executed, the display of images for the preparation period suddenly starts, and the display of images for the predetermined reach effect is increased. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a phenomenon in which the player's attention level decreases.

In addition, in this configuration, the display of images for the preparation period including the remaining time notification image G63 does not start until the performance for the game round in the middle of execution or the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is completed. When the presentation for the game round or the presentation for the opening/closing execution mode ends and the display of the image for the preparation period starts, the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is changed in relation to the remaining duration of the preparation period. Update cycle is set. As a result, even if the display of the image for the preparation period starts at a timing later than the start timing of the time-based production, the display of the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 can be changed from the fixed starting value to the fixed starting value. It is possible to continue until the end value is reached.

<Configuration for performing separate storage performance>
Next, a configuration for performing separate storage performance will be described.

Separately saved rendering is when drawing data created by projecting 3D image data arranged in the world coordinate system onto a virtual 2D plane is saved as separate saved data, and after that, the separately saved data is By setting it as plate-shaped object data, it is placed in the world coordinate system, and drawing data is created by projecting the separately saved data onto a virtual two-dimensional plane along with other image data placed in the world coordinate system. This is an effect that displays an image by doing this. In addition, during the period when images are displayed using drawing data created based on arranging separately saved data in the world coordinate system, when creating separately saved data, the projection target on a virtual two-dimensional plane Mask control is performed to exclude the three-dimensional image data from being projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane. Image data that is excluded from being projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane during mask control may be configured so that it is not placed in the world coordinate system, and the placement position and shape of the image data that is placed in the world coordinate system is not updated. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the image is further excluded from the projection target without being affected. By creating drawing data using separately stored data and performing mask control in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the VDP 205 even when the number of types of images to be displayed increases. becomes.

FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the specific content of the separate save effect, and FIG. 88 (a1) and FIG. 88 (b1) show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system. 88(a2) and FIG. 88(b2) show the contents of an image displayed using drawing data created by projecting onto a virtual two-dimensional plane.

In a situation where the separate save effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 88(a1), the backmost image data 241 is placed at the farthest position when the viewpoint PC11 is used as a reference, and the backmost image data 241 is placed at the farthest position in front of it. Image data 242 for the first background individual image and image data 243 for the second background individual image are arranged, and image data 244 for the performance character is further arranged on the near side. Note that the image data 241 for the backmost surface is image data in which texture data for the backmost surface is pasted to plate-shaped object data (that is, plate polygon). The plate-shaped object data is thin object data, and has a smaller data capacity and a smaller processing load during geometry calculation and rendering in the VDP 205 than thick three-dimensional object data.

When the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 88(a1), projection onto a virtual two-dimensional plane is performed to create drawing data, as shown in FIG. 88(a2). It becomes possible to display such a one-frame image on the pattern display device 41. In the image for one frame, a first background individual image G72 and a second background individual image G73 are displayed in front of the backmost image G71, and a performance character image G74 is displayed further in front of it. Then, between the update timings of a plurality of images, the arrangement position and shape in the world coordinate system of the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the production character, etc. By changing , it becomes possible to change the display position, shape, etc. of the first background individual image G72, second background individual image G73, and performance character image G74 in one frame of images.

In a state where the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 88(a1), the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data for the second background individual image 243 as the projection target, while not projecting the performance character image data 244 on the virtual two-dimensional plane, the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72 and Two-dimensional drawing data that enables the display of a still image of the second background individual image G73 can be created as the first separate storage data. By pasting the first separate saved data to the plate-shaped polygon data, it is placed in the world coordinate system as the first separate saved image data 245, and in front of it are the image data 244 for the performance character and the image for the additional individual image. By arranging the data 246, the state shown in FIG. 88(b1) is obtained. In this state, the first separate saved image data 245, the image data 244 for the performance character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual images are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data. This makes it possible to display one frame of image on the symbol display device 41 as shown in FIG. 88(b2). In the image for one frame, a first background individual image G72 and a second background individual image G73 are displayed in front of the backmost image G71, and a production character image G74 and an additional individual image G75 are further displayed in front of it. Is displayed.

However, since the image data for displaying the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 is arranged as a still image in the world coordinate system using the first separate saved image data 245, The arrangement position, shape, etc. of the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 cannot be changed individually between update timings. On the other hand, since the image data for displaying the performance character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are individually arranged in the world coordinate system as the image data 244 for the performance character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image, multiple It becomes possible to individually change the arrangement position, shape, etc. of the performance character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 between the image update timings.

When drawing data is created using the first separate saved image data 245 as described above, the first separate saved image data 245 is the backmost image data when creating the first separate saved data in the world coordinate system. The image data 241 for the first background individual image, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are placed closer to the front than the positions where the image data 241 for the first background individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are placed. Then, the space MS1 located further back than the first separate saved image data 245 is excluded from the projection target onto the virtual two-dimensional plane by mask control. As a result, when creating drawing data using the first separate saved image data 245, the virtual two-dimensional image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 are The number of image data to be projected onto a plane is reduced, and the processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying these images G71 to G73 is reduced. Therefore, even if the additional individual image G75 is newly added as a display target, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load on the VDP 205.

By executing the mask control, the image data 241 of the backmost image, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are excluded from being projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. Regardless of the situation, parameter information such as coordinate information and scale information for these image data 241 to 243 is stored and held in the work RAM 202. This secures an area in the work RAM 202 for updating the parameter information of these image data 241 to 243 when returning to the period in which images are displayed by projecting these image data 241 to 243 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane. There is no need to perform any processing to do so. In order to newly set the parameter information of image data as an update target, initial steps such as a search process of the storage area of the work RAM 202 for storing the parameter information and a process of clearing the storage area searched by the search process are necessary. It becomes necessary to execute setting processing, and the processing load of the initial setting processing is greater than the processing load for updating parameter information. Under such circumstances, the parameter information of the image data 241 to 243 that are subject to mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202, so that the processing load on the display CPU 201 becomes extremely large when the mask control is canceled. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Furthermore, even in a situation where each of the image data 241 to 243 is excluded from being projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane by executing mask control, the display CPU 201 controls the image data for these first background individual images. 242 and the image data 243 for the second background individual image. As a result, immediately after the period during which images are displayed using the first separate saved image data 245 ends, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 are changed from the state immediately before the start of the period. The first background individual image is created from the state when the movement is not restarted, but the change in movement continues for the duration of the period according to the display pattern up to that point, with respect to the display state immediately before the start of the period. It becomes possible to restart the movement of G72 and the second background individual image G73.

Furthermore, by executing the mask control, the image data 241 of the backmost image, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are excluded from being projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in a situation where the image data 241 to 243 are placed in the world coordinate system, the buffer area in which the information referred to for arranging the image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system is stored is retained. As a result, when returning to the period in which images are displayed by projecting these image data 241 to 243 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane, the information referenced for arranging these image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system. There is no need to execute processing for securing a buffer area for storage in the VRAM 204. In order to secure the buffer area, it is necessary to perform initial setting processing such as searching the storage area of the VRAM 204 and clearing the storage area searched by the search process, but it is subject to mask control. By retaining the buffer area of the image data 241 to 243 as is in the VRAM 204, it is possible to prevent the processing load on the VDP 205 from becoming extremely large when the mask control is canceled.

Here, in a situation where mask control is being executed, if it becomes necessary to create separate save data using image data that is excluded from the projection target due to the mask control, that image data will be excluded from the projection target. Therefore, it is not possible to create separate saved data using the image data. A case where such an event occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 89(a) to 89(c). 89(a1) to 89(c1) show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system, and FIG. 89(a2) to FIG. 89(c2) show the arrangement of three-dimensional image data on a virtual two-dimensional plane. This shows the content of the image displayed using the drawing data created in .

As shown in FIG. 89(a1), the backmost image data 241 is arranged at the farthest position in the world coordinate system, and in front of it are the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the image data 242 for the second background individual image. The image data 243 of the image shown in FIG. It becomes possible to display one frame worth of images as shown in (a2) on the pattern display device 41. In this case, the drawing data created in the arrangement state of each of the image data 241 to 244 as shown in FIG. 89(a1) is saved as the second separately saved data.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89(b1), by pasting the second separate saved data to the plate-shaped polygon data, it is placed in the world coordinate system as the second separate saved image data 247, and the second separate saved data is Effect image data 248 for displaying effect image G76 is placed before saved image data 247. Then, by projecting the second separately saved image data 247 and the effect image data 248 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data, one frame of data as shown in FIG. 89(b2) is created. It becomes possible to display the image on the symbol display device 41. Note that the effect image data 248 is data in which texture data for an effect image is pasted onto plate-shaped polygon data, and the effect image data 248 has an α value set to be transparent or semi-transparent as a whole, making it opaque. Since the α value is not set, the effect image data 248 is overwritten with the second separately stored image data 247 subjected to the transparent processing or semi-transparent processing.

When drawing data is created using the second separate saved image data 247 as described above, the second separate saved image data 247 is the backmost image data when creating the second separate saved data in the world coordinate system. The image data 241 for the first background individual image, the image data 242 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the performance character are arranged on the nearer side than the positions where they were arranged. Then, the space MS2 located further back than the second separate stored image data 247 is excluded from the projection target onto the virtual two-dimensional plane by mask control. As a result, when creating drawing data using the second separate saved image data 247, the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 are displayed. Therefore, the number of image data to be projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane is reduced, and the processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying these images G71 to G74 is reduced. Therefore, even if the effect image G76 is newly added as a display target, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load on the VDP 205.

However, immediately after the image is displayed using the second separate saved image data 247, the first separate saved image data 245, the image data 244 for the performance character, and the additional individual image as shown in FIG. 88(b1) are displayed. When it becomes necessary to display an image using the second image data 246, the backmost image data 241 and the first background are Since mask control is being performed on the image data 242 for the individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the first separate saved image data 245 cannot be created. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 88(c1), the first separate saved image data 245 cannot be placed behind the image data 244 for the performance character and the image data 246 for the additional individual images in the world coordinate system. , the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are displayed while the background image is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 88(c2). For example, in the world coordinate system, not only the image data 244 for the production character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image, but also the image data 241 for the backmost image, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the second background individual image If an attempt is made to create drawing data by arranging image data 243 and projecting all of the image data 241 to 244, 246 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane, the processing load on the VDP 205 will increase. As a case where such a situation occurs, in this pachinko machine 10, when the performance operation device 48 is operated, an operation corresponding performance occurs in which an image is displayed using the second separate saved image data 247. In such a configuration, there is a case where it is necessary to display an image using the first separately saved image data 245 immediately after the operation-corresponding effect is completed.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to display an image using the first separate saved image data 245 immediately after the image using the second separate saved image data 247 is displayed. The structure is as follows. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 90, a description will be given of how the separate storage effect is performed. FIG. 90 is a time chart showing how the separate storage effect is performed. FIG. 90(a) shows a normal drawing period in which mask control is not executed, and FIG. 90(b) shows a mask control period in which mask control is executed. 90(c) shows the timing at which separate storage of at least one of the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data is executed, and FIG. 90(d) shows the timing when the first separate storage data is provided in the VRAM 204. 90(e) shows a period during which the second separate storage data is stored and held in the second separate storage buffer 252 provided in the VRAM 204, FIG. 90(f) shows the effective period of operation of the production operating device 48, FIG. 90(g) shows the operation timing of the production operating device 48, and FIG. 90(h) shows the execution period of the operation-corresponding production.

First, a case where an image is displayed using the first separately saved image data 245 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), during the normal drawing period in which mask control is not performed, timing t1 becomes the storage execution timing of the first separate storage data as shown in FIG. 90(c). In this case, first separate storage data is created as shown in FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b), and the first separate storage data is stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251 of the VRAM 204. As a result, the first separate storage image data 245 is stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251 at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 90(d).

Thereafter, at timing t2, a period for displaying an image using the first separate saved image data 245 becomes a period, and a period for performing mask control as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). . In this case, even during the period when the mask control is performed, each of the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 to be displayed in the first separate saved image data 245 corresponds to Various parameter information regarding the image data 241 to 243 to be displayed is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and updating processing of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201.

Thereafter, at timing t3, the period for displaying the image using the first separate saved image data 245 ends, and the mask control ends as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). It returns to the normal drawing period in which mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, even during the mask control period, the CPU 201 displays various parameter information regarding the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, respectively. Since the update process continues, the display of these images G71 to G73 starts from a display mode corresponding to the timing when the execution period of mask control has elapsed from the timing when mask control was started.

Next, a case will be described in which an image using the first separate saved image data 245 is displayed immediately after an image using the second separate saved image data 247 is displayed. Note that in the following description, FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c) will be referred to as appropriate. 91(a) to 91(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how an image is displayed using the first separate saved image data 245 and an image is displayed using the second separate saved image data 247. 91(a1) to 91(c1) show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system, and FIG. 91(a2) to FIG. 91(c2) show the arrangement of three-dimensional image data on a virtual two-dimensional plane. This shows the content of the image displayed using the drawing data created by doing this.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), during the normal drawing period in which mask control is not performed, timing t4 is the start timing of the valid operation period of the production operating device 48, as shown in FIG. 90(f). In this case, separate storage is executed at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 90(c). At this timing of separately saving, both the first separately saving data and the second separately saving data are to be executed separately.

The manner in which both the first separate save data and the second separate save data are created will be described with reference to FIG. 91(a). As shown in FIG. 91(a1), the backmost image data 241 is arranged at the farthest position in the world coordinate system, and in front of it are the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the image data 242 for the second background individual image. The image data 243 of FIG. It becomes possible to display one frame worth of images as shown in (a2) on the pattern display device 41. In this case, drawing data created by projecting all of the image data 241 to 244 shown in FIG. 91(a1) onto a virtual two-dimensional plane is stored as second separate storage data in the second separate storage buffer 252. Ru. The second separate storage data is data that enables the display of still images of the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74.

Furthermore, in a state where the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. By performing projection processing onto a virtual two-dimensional plane by setting the image data 243 as the projection target and excluding the image data 244 for the performance character as the projection target, the backmost image G71 and the first background individual Two-dimensional drawing data that enables the display of still images of the image G72 and the second background individual image G73 is created as the first separate storage data. Then, the first separate storage data is saved in the first separate storage buffer 251.

Returning to the explanation with reference to FIG. 90, by creating the first separate save data and the second separate save data at timing t4, the first separate save data is stored in the first separate save buffer 251 as shown in FIG. 90(d). The separate save data is stored and held, and the second separate save data is also stored in the second separate save buffer 252 as shown in FIG. 90(e).

Thereafter, at the timing t5, the performance operation device 48 is operated as shown in FIG. 90(g), and thereby the operation corresponding performance is started as shown in FIG. 90(h). In this case, as shown in FIG. 91(b1), the second separately saved data is pasted to the plate-shaped polygon data and placed in the world coordinate system as the second separately saved image data 247. Effect image data 248 for displaying the effect image G76 is arranged before the saved image data 247. Then, by projecting these second separately saved image data 247 and effect image data 248 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data, one frame worth of data as shown in FIG. 91(b2) is created. It becomes possible to display the image on the symbol display device 41.

By starting the operation corresponding performance at the timing t5, a period in which mask control is performed at the timing t5 occurs as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). In this case, even during the period when the mask control is performed, the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image that are to be displayed in the second separate saved image data 247 Various parameter information regarding the image data 241 to 244 corresponding to each of G74 is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and updating processing of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201.

Thereafter, at timing t6, the operation corresponding performance ends as shown in FIG. 90(h). In this case, display of the image using the first separate saved image data 245 is started at the timing t6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 91 (c1), the first separate saved data is pasted to the plate-shaped polygon data and placed in the world coordinate system as the first separate saved image data 245, and in front of it is image data 244 and image data 246 for additional individual images are arranged. In this state, the first separate saved image data 245, the image data 244 for the performance character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual images are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data. This makes it possible to display one frame of image on the symbol display device 41 as shown in FIG. 91(c2). In this case, as described above, even during the mask control period, the display CPU 201 continues to update the parameter information regarding the image data 244 for the performance character, and therefore the display of the performance character image G74 is performed even during the mask control period. The display mode starts from the timing corresponding to the timing at which the execution period of the mask control has elapsed.

By starting displaying an image using the first separate saved image data 245 at timing t6, mask control is continued as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). However, the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 are subject to mask control, and the image data 241 to 243 respectively correspond to the production character image G74 and additional individual images. Image data 244 and 246 corresponding to image G75 are not subject to mask control. Various parameter information regarding image data 241 to 243 corresponding to images G71 to G73 that are subject to mask control are stored and held in the work RAM 202, and updating processing of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201. Ru.

Thereafter, at timing t7, the period for displaying the image using the first separate saved image data 245 ends, and the mask control ends as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). It returns to the normal drawing period in which mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, even during the mask control period, the CPU 201 displays various parameter information regarding the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, respectively. Since the update process continues, the display of these images G71 to G73 starts from a display mode corresponding to the timing when the execution period of mask control has elapsed from the timing when mask control was started. Thereby, it becomes possible to match the performance contents with a performance execution device other than the symbol display device 41, such as the speaker section 45.

Next, although both the first separate saved data and the second separate saved data are saved separately, the first separate saved image data 245 is used without displaying an image using the second separate saved image data 247. A case in which an image is displayed will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), in the normal drawing period in which mask control is not performed, the effective period of operation of the production operating device 48 becomes the start timing at timing t8, as shown in FIG. 90(f). In this case, as in the case of the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 90(c), the timing for performing separate storage for both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data is reached. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90(d), the first separate save data is stored in the first separate save buffer 251, and the second separate save data is stored in the second separate save buffer 252 as shown in FIG. 90(e). 2. The separately stored data is now stored and held.

However, as shown in FIGS. 90(f) and 90(g), at timing t9, the operation valid period passes without operating the production operating device 48. In this case, since no image is displayed using the second separately stored image data 247, mask control is not performed from timing t8 to timing t9. Therefore, at timing t9, the first separate storage data to be used thereafter is created again. In other words, the first separate save data created at the timing t8 and stored in the first separate save buffer 251 is erased, and the first separate save data created at the timing t9 is stored in the first separate save buffer 251. A new memory is retained. This makes it possible to display each of the images G71 to G73 in a display mode closer to the timing when the first separate saved image data 245 is used, using the first separate saved image data 245. Become. Note that the timing at which the first separate saved data is newly created is the update timing for the next image with respect to the update timing for the image whose operation validity period has passed.

Thereafter, at timing t10, display of an image using the first separate saved image data 245 is started, and mask control is started as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). However, the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 are subject to mask control, and the image data 241 to 243 respectively correspond to the production character image G74 and additional individual images. Image data 244 and 246 corresponding to image G75 are not subject to mask control. Various parameter information regarding image data 241 to 243 corresponding to images G71 to G73 that are subject to mask control are stored and held in the work RAM 202, and updating processing of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201. Ru.

Thereafter, at timing t11, the period for displaying the image using the first separate saved image data 245 ends, and the mask control ends as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). It returns to the normal drawing period in which mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, even during the mask control period, the CPU 201 displays various parameter information regarding the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, respectively. Since the update process continues, the display of these images G71 to G73 starts from a display mode corresponding to the timing when the execution period of mask control has elapsed from the timing when mask control was started. Thereby, it becomes possible to match the performance contents with a performance execution device other than the symbol display device 41, such as the speaker section 45.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the separate save effect will be explained. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for another storage effect executed by the display CPU 201. Note that the calculation process for the separate save effect is executed in the background calculation process of step S2503 in the task process (FIG. 68) in the game round in which the separate save effect is to be executed.

First, by updating the pointer information to be referenced in the execution target table read out to the work RAM 202 in order to control the performance of the current game round, the content of the data to be referred to in the execution target table is updated this time. The data corresponds to the processing time (step S3601). Thereafter, if neither the operation corresponding performance is being executed nor the operation valid period (step S3602 and step S3603: NO), it is determined whether or not the first separate storage data usage period has come (step S3604). If the usage period of the first separate saved data is a game session in which the operation validity period does not occur and a separate saved effect occurs, the usage period for the first separate saved data will occur when the elapsed time of the game session reaches a predetermined time. If it is a game round in which an operation valid period occurs, this occurs when the operation valid period has elapsed without the operation corresponding performance being executed or when the operation corresponding performance has ended.

If it is not the usage period of the first separate saved data (step S3604: NO), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is determined based on the currently set execution target table (step S3605). The image data includes image data 241 for the backmost image, image data 242 for the first background individual image, image data 243 for the second background individual image, and image data 244 for the performance character. After that, parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the image data 244 for the performance character, the image data 241 for the backmost image, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and The derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 202 in correspondence with each of the image data 241 to 244 (steps S3606 and S3607). Thereafter, the non-use instruction information of the separately saved data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3608). If it is time to create the first separate save data (step S3609: YES), the first create instruction information for the separate save data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3610).

When the calculation process for separate storage effects is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407) includes the various image data 241 to 244 grasped in step S3605. is set to be placed in the world coordinate system. Further, parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244 is set in the drawing list. In addition, non-use instruction information for separately saved data is set in the drawing list, and if this is the timing for creating the first separately saved data, first creation instruction information for separately saved data is set.

If the first separate save data is in the usage period in the calculation process for the separate save effect (step S3604: YES), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is selected based on the currently set execution target table. Understand (steps S3611 to S3613). The image data includes first separate storage data stored in the first separate storage buffer 251, image data 244 for performance characters, and image data 246 for additional individual images. After that, image data 244 for the production character, image data 241 for the backmost image, image data 242 for the first background individual image, image data 243 for the second background individual image, image data 246 for the additional individual image, and image data 246 for the first background individual image. Parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the separately stored data, and the derived parameter information is written in the areas secured in the work RAM 202 corresponding to each of these image data 241 to 244, 246 (steps S3614 to S3617). . In this case, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are not to be placed in the world coordinate system, but these image data 241 to 244, The storage retention of the parameter information regarding H.246 in the work RAM 202 and the updating of the parameter information are continued. Thereafter, the usage instruction information of the separately saved data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3618).

When the calculation process for separate storage effects is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407) includes various image data grasped in steps S3611 to S3613. 241 to 244 and 246 are set as placement targets in the world coordinate system. Further, parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244 and 246 is set in the drawing list. Further, use instruction information of separately saved data is set in the drawing list.

In the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect, if the operation is valid (step S3603: YES), processing is executed during the operation valid period in step S3618, and if the operation compatible effect is in progress (step S3602: YES), in step S3619, the operation corresponding production process is executed. The processing during the operation valid period and the processing during the operation corresponding performance will be explained below.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing processing during the valid operation period.

If it is the start timing of the operation validity period (step S3701: YES), second creation instruction information of separately saved data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3702). When the process of step S3702 is executed, or when it is not the start timing of the operation valid period and the production operation device 48 is not operated (step S3701 and step S3703: NO), based on the currently set execution target table. , the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S3704). The image data includes image data 241 for the backmost image, image data 242 for the first background individual image, image data 243 for the second background individual image, and image data 244 for the performance character. After that, parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the image data 244 for the performance character, the image data 241 for the backmost image, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and The derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 202 in correspondence with each of the image data 241 to 244 (steps S3705 and S3706). Thereafter, the validity period information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3707). Further, if it is the end timing of the operation validity period (step S3708: YES), the first creation instruction information of separate save data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3709).

When the process is executed during the valid operation period as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407) includes the various image data 241 to 244 grasped in step S3704. Set as a placement target in the coordinate system. Further, parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244 is set in the drawing list. In addition, valid period information is set in the drawing list, and if this is the start timing of the operation valid period, second creation instruction information of separately saved data is set, and even if this is the end timing of the operation valid period, the second creation instruction information is set in the drawing list. First creation instruction information for separately saved data is set.

When the production operation device 48 is operated during processing during the operation validity period (step S3703: YES), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S3710 and step S3711). The image data includes second separate storage data and effect image data 248 stored and held in the second separate storage buffer 252 . After that, the image data 244 for the production character, the image data 241 for the backmost image, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the effect image data 248, and the second separate saved data. Parameter information is calculated and derived for each, and the derived parameter information is written in areas secured in the work RAM 202 corresponding to each of these image data 241 to 244, 248 (steps S3712 to S3715). In this case, the image data 244 for the performance character, the image data 241 for the backmost image, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are not subject to placement in the world coordinate system. , storage and retention of parameter information regarding these image data 241 to 244 in the work RAM 202 and updating of the parameter information are continued. Thereafter, the operation corresponding performance information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3716).

When the arithmetic processing for separate storage effects is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) includes various image data grasped in steps S3710 and S3711. 248 is set as a placement target in the world coordinate system. Further, parameter information applied to the image data 248 is set in the drawing list. In addition, operation corresponding performance information is set in the drawing list.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing processing during operation-compatible presentation.

First, based on the currently set execution target table, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is determined (steps S3801 and S3802). The image data includes second separate storage data and effect image data 248 stored in the second separate storage buffer 252 . After that, the image data 244 for the production character, the image data 241 for the backmost image, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the effect image data 248, and the second separate saved data. Parameter information is calculated and derived for each, and the derived parameter information is written in areas secured in the work RAM 202 corresponding to each of these image data 241 to 244, 248 (steps S3803 to S3806). In this case, the image data 244 for the production character, the image data 241 for the backmost image, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are not subject to placement in the world coordinate system. , storage and retention of parameter information regarding these image data 241 to 244 in the work RAM 202 and updating of the parameter information are continued. Thereafter, the operation corresponding performance information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3806).

When the calculation process for separate storage effects is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407) includes various image data grasped in steps S3801 and S3802. 248 is set as a placement target in the world coordinate system. Further, parameter information applied to the image data 248 is set in the drawing list. In addition, operation corresponding performance information is set in the drawing list.

Next, the setting process for separate storage display executed by the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 95. The separate save display setting process is executed as a part of the background setting process executed in step S2602 of the drawing process (FIG. 70). Furthermore, when separately saved data non-use instruction information, separately saved data use instruction information, validity period information, or operation corresponding performance information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for separately saved display is executed.

If the usage instruction information for separately saved data is not set in the current drawing list, and furthermore, the operation compatible effect information is not set in the current drawing list (step S3901: NO), the latest drawing list is used based on the current drawing list. The image data 241 for the back surface, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the performance character are grasped as objects to be placed in the world coordinate system (step S3902). . Further, parameter information to be applied to the image data 241 to 244 is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3903). Then, the process of setting the world coordinate system is executed with the parameter information grasped this time being applied to the image data 241 to 244 to be arranged (step S3904). As a result, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91(a2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

If the use instruction information for separate saved data is set in the current drawing list (step S3905: YES), based on the current drawing list, the first separate saved data, the image data 244 for the performance character, and the additional individual image data The image data 246 of is grasped as a target to be placed in the world coordinate system (steps S3906 to S3908). Further, parameter information to be applied to the first separate saved data, the image data 244 for the performance character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3909). Then, with the parameter information grasped this time applied to the first separate saved data, the image data 244 for the performance character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed (step S3904). As a result, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91(c2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

If the operation-compatible production information is set in the current drawing list (step S3905: NO), the second separate save data and effect image data 248 are determined to be placed in the world coordinate system based on the current drawing list. (Step S3910 and Step S3911). Further, parameter information to be applied to the second separate storage data and the effect image data 248 is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3912). Then, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed with the parameter information grasped this time being applied to the second separate saved data and the effect image data 248 (step S3904). As a result, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91(b2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the drawing data creation process for separate storage and display executed by the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The process of creating drawing data for separate storage and display is executed as a part of the process of creating drawing data for effects and backgrounds executed in step S2610 of the drawing process (FIG. 70). In addition, if separately saved data non-use instruction information, separately saved data use instruction information, validity period information, or operation compatible effect information is set in the drawing list, the drawing data creation process for separately saved display is executed. Ru.

If the first creation instruction information of separately saved data or the second creation instruction information of separately saved data is set in the current drawing list (step S4001: YES), the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image The image data 242 for the second background individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create first separate storage data (step S4002). Then, the created first separate storage data is written into the first separate storage buffer 251 of the VRAM 204 (step S4003). As a result, the first separate storage data is stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251.

If a negative determination is made in step S4001 or if the process in step S4002 is executed, drawing data for displaying any of the images in FIG. 91(a2), FIG. 91(b2), and FIG. 91(c2) is created. (Step S4004). The drawing data is used in the drawing data synthesis process of step S2612 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) in order to display one frame of image.

After that, if the second creation instruction information for separately saved data is set in the current drawing list (step S4005: YES), the drawing data created in the immediately previous step S4004 is set as the second separate save data in the second separate save data in the VRAM 204. It is written to the separate storage buffer 252 (step S4006). As a result, the second separate storage data is stored and held in the second separate storage buffer 252. Further, since the second separately saved data is the drawing data used for displaying one frame of image as is, it is possible to suppress the processing load for creating the second separately saved data.

As described above, when displaying an image using the first separate saved data, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image It becomes possible to display the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 while performing mask control. This reduces the processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, and even if the additional individual image G75 is newly added as a display target. , it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load on the VDP 205. In addition, when displaying an image using the second separate saved data, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the production character It becomes possible to display the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 while performing mask control on the image data 244 for the image. As a result, the processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 is reduced, and the effect image G76 is newly added as a display target. Even if this happens, it is possible to prevent the processing load on the VDP 205 from increasing.

Parameter information of image data that is excluded from being projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane due to execution of mask control is stored and retained without being deleted from the work RAM 202. As a result, when returning to the period in which the image is displayed by projecting the image data onto a virtual two-dimensional plane, processing is executed to secure an area in the work RAM 202 for updating the parameter information of the image data. There is no need to do so. In order to newly set the parameter information of image data as an update target, initial steps such as a search process of the storage area of the work RAM 202 for storing the parameter information and a process of clearing the storage area searched by the search process are necessary. It becomes necessary to execute setting processing, and the processing load of the initial setting processing is greater than the processing load for updating parameter information. Under such circumstances, parameter information of image data subject to mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202, resulting in an extremely large processing load on the display CPU 201 when the mask control is canceled. It is possible to prevent this.

Furthermore, even in a situation where the predetermined image data is excluded from the projection target onto the virtual two-dimensional plane due to execution of mask control, the display CPU 201 updates the parameter information regarding the predetermined image data. continue. As a result, immediately after the period during which an image is displayed using the first separate saved data or the second separate saved data ends, the image corresponding to the predetermined image data moves from the state immediately before the start of the period. is not restarted, but the predetermined image data is changed from the state where the change in movement continues for the duration of the period according to the display pattern up to that point, with respect to the display state immediately before the start of the period. It becomes possible to restart the movement of the corresponding image. This makes it possible to match the presentation contents with presentation execution devices other than the symbol display device 41, such as the speaker section 45.

Furthermore, by executing the mask control, the image data 241 of the backmost image, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are excluded from the projection target onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in a situation where the image data 241 to 243 are placed in the world coordinate system, the buffer area in which the information referenced for arranging the image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system is stored is retained. As a result, when returning to the period in which images are displayed by projecting these image data 241 to 243 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane, the information referenced to arrange these image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system is There is no need to execute processing for securing a buffer area for storage in the VRAM 204. In order to secure the buffer area, it is necessary to perform initial setting processing such as searching the storage area of the VRAM 204 and clearing the storage area searched by the search process, but it is subject to mask control. By retaining the buffer area of the image data 241 to 243 as is in the VRAM 204, it is possible to prevent the processing load on the VDP 205 from becoming extremely large when the mask control is canceled.

Immediately after the period for displaying images using the second separately saved data ends, if a period for displaying images using the first separately saved data may occur, the images using the second separately saved data will be displayed. Not only the second separate save data but also the first separate save data is created before the period starts. As a result, even if the mask control is performed on the image data 241 to 243 for creating the first separate saved data during the period in which an image using the second separate saved data is displayed, the second separate saved data Immediately after the period for displaying the image using the saved data ends, it becomes possible to display the image using the first separate saved data.

Furthermore, even if the first separate save data is created before the period for displaying images using the second separate save data starts, the period for displaying images using the second separate save data will not start. If the mask control is not performed on the image data 241 to 243 for creating the first separate saved data due to the occurrence of no masking, the first separate saved data is 1 Separate save data is newly created. This makes it possible to display each of the images G71 to G73 in a display mode with a timing closer to the timing of using the first separate saved data as an image using the first separate saved data.

<Another form of separate preservation performance>
-Instead of a configuration in which both the first separate save data and the second separate save data are stored and held when the operation valid period starts, the first separate save data is stored at a predetermined timing before the operation valid period starts. and the second separate save data, one of the separate save data is stored and held, and the other separate save data is stored at a timing after the predetermined timing and before the start of the operation valid period or at a start timing of the operation valid period. It is also possible to maintain the configuration. In this case, compared to a configuration in which both the first separately stored data and the second separately stored data are stored and held in the same processing cycle, it is possible to distribute the processing load.

- When mask control is executed, the image data that is the target of the mask control is not placed in the world coordinate system, but the image data that is the target of the mask control is also placed in the world coordinate system. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the objects placed on the virtual two-dimensional plane are excluded from being projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. In this case, when the mask control ends, there is no need to execute a process for re-arranging the image data that was the target of the mask control in the world coordinate system. Furthermore, in this configuration, the image data that is subject to mask control may be arranged in the world coordinate system, but the parameter information applied to the image data in the VDP 205 may not be changed. However, it is preferable that the update of the parameter information of the image data in the display CPU 201 is continued.

-Instead of the configuration in which the display CPU 201 continues to update the parameter information regarding the image data that is the target of mask control, the parameter information is updated in the display CPU 201 for the image data that is the target of mask control. A configuration may also be adopted in which this is not performed. In this case, the operation of the image corresponding to the image data that was subject to mask control will be restarted from the display state of the image corresponding to the separately saved data. Note that even with this configuration, it is preferable that the state in which parameter information to be subjected to mask control is stored in the work RAM 202 is stored and retained during execution of mask control.

- Separately saved data that is separately saved in advance is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. Furthermore, the mask control configuration described above may be applied to a configuration in which there is only one type of separately saved data.

<Configuration for performing angle display performance>
Next, a configuration for performing angle display effects will be described.

Angle display performance is the use of multiple types of videos that can display a display target whose movement changes with the passage of time, each viewed from a different angle, and the display that is used based on the operation of the performance operation device 48. This is a performance that changes the target video to a video from a different angle than the original video. The specific display contents of the angle display effect will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b). As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), in the angle display effect, the live-action video is displayed as a moving image. In this live-action video, a person is displayed as a live-action character image G81, and the movement of this live-action character image G81 is displayed as a moving image. Further, FIG. 97(a) corresponds to a video in which the person of the live-action character image G81 is captured from angle A, which is a predetermined angle for the live-action character image G81, and FIG. It corresponds to a video in which a live-action character image G81 of a person is captured from an angle. In addition to the A-angle video and the B-angle video, there is also a video in which the person of the live-action character image G81 is captured from the C angle, which is different from the A angle and the B angle.

The contents of the data stored in advance in the memory module 203 for executing the angle display effect will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 98.

The memory module 203 contains a first video data group 261 of the A angle, a second video data group 262 of the A angle, and a second video data group 262 of the A angle as video data for displaying the video of the A angle. A third video data group 263 of angles is stored in advance. The memory module 203 also stores, as video data for displaying the B-angle video, a B-angle first video data group 264, a B-angle second video data group 265, and a B-angle third video data group 266. is stored in advance. The memory module 203 also stores, as video data for displaying the C-angle video, a C-angle first video data group 267, a C-angle second video data group 268, and a C-angle third video data group 269. is stored in advance.

FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each video data group 261 to 269. FIG. 99(a) shows the first video data group 261 of the A angle, and FIG. 99(b) shows the second video data group of the A angle. 99(c) shows the third moving image data group 263 of the A angle, FIG. 99(d) shows the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle, and FIG. 99(e) shows the third moving image data group 263 of the A angle. 99(f) shows the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle, FIG. 99(g) shows the first moving image data group 267 of the C angle, and FIG. ) shows the second moving image data group 268 of the C angle, and FIG. 99(i) shows the third moving image data group 269 of the C angle.

As shown in FIGS. 99(a) to 99(i), each moving image data group 261 to 269 has a plurality of moving image data 271a to 273c, respectively. As described above, the moving image data 271a to 273c are image data that has been compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of differential data based on one frame of still image data, and encoded using, for example, the MPEG2 method. . When the moving image data 271a to 273c are decoded, they are developed into multiple frames of still image data.

Each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c, and the amount of data is set such that the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. is set. Specifically, regarding the minimum unit number of still image data, each of the moving image data 271a to 273c can reproduce 48 pieces of still image data, in other words, it is possible to update the image 48 times (update of 48 frames). It becomes. Each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has the same number (specifically, 20 pieces) of such moving image data 271a to 273c.

The A-angle first video data group 261, the A-angle second video data group 262, and the A-angle third video data group 263 all correspond to the A-angle, showing how the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern. This is for displaying a series of videos as viewed from different angles. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 271a to 271c in each of the A angle moving image data groups 261 to 263. In this case, in each of the A-angle video data groups 261 to 263, the order to be decoded is the last still image data among the video data 271a to 271c in a predetermined order, and the next still image data in the predetermined order. The still image data in the first order among the sequential moving image data 271a to 271c has continuity in the movement of the live-action character image G81 in the above-described predetermined movement pattern. Therefore, in the case of the first video data group 261 of the A angle, the video data 271a included in the first video data group 261 of the A angle is sequentially decoded according to a predetermined decoding order, and the image is displayed. This makes it possible to display a series of movements in which the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern when viewed from an angle corresponding to the A angle. Furthermore, in the case of the second moving image data group 262 of the A angle, the moving image data 271b included in the second moving image data group 262 of the A angle is sequentially decoded according to a predetermined decoding order, and the image is displayed. This makes it possible to display a series of movements in which the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern when viewed from an angle corresponding to the A angle. Further, in the case of the third video data group 263 of the A angle, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the video data 271c included in the third video data group 263 of the A angle according to a predetermined decoding order. This makes it possible to display a series of movements in which the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern when viewed from an angle corresponding to the A angle.

The first video data group 264 of the B angle, the second video data group 265 of the B angle, and the third video data group 266 of the B angle all correspond to the B angle, showing how the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern. This is for displaying a series of videos as viewed from different angles. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 272a to 272c in each of the B angle moving image data groups 264 to 266. In this case, in each of the B-angle video data groups 264 to 266, the order to be decoded is the last still image data in the video data 272a to 272c in a predetermined order, and the next still image data in the predetermined order. The still image data in the first order among the sequential moving image data 272a to 272c has continuity in the movement of the live-action character image G81 in the above-described predetermined movement pattern. Therefore, in the case of the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle, the moving image data 272a included in the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle is sequentially decoded according to a predetermined decoding order, and the image is displayed. This makes it possible to display a series of movements in which the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern when viewed from an angle corresponding to angle B. Furthermore, in the case of the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle, the image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 272b included in the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle according to a predetermined decoding order. This makes it possible to display a series of movements in which the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern when viewed from an angle corresponding to angle B. Further, in the case of the third video data group 266 of the B angle, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the video data 272c included in the third video data group 266 of the B angle according to a predetermined decoding order. This makes it possible to display a series of movements in which the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern when viewed from an angle corresponding to angle B.

The C-angle first video data group 267, the C-angle second video data group 268, and the C-angle third video data group 269 all correspond to the C-angle, showing how the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern. This is for displaying a series of videos as viewed from different angles. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 273a to 273c in each of the C angle moving image data groups 267 to 269. In this case, in each of the C-angle video data groups 267 to 269, the order to be decoded is the last still image data among the video data 273a to 273c in a predetermined order, and the next still image data in the predetermined order. The still image data in the first order among the sequential moving image data 273a to 273c has continuity in the movement of the live-action character image G81 in the above-described predetermined motion pattern. Therefore, in the case of the C-angle first video data group 267, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the video data 273a included in the C-angle first video data group 267 according to a predetermined decoding order. This makes it possible to display a series of movements in which the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern when viewed from an angle corresponding to the C angle. Further, in the case of the second moving image data group 268 of the C angle, the image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 273b included in the second moving image data group 268 of the C angle according to a predetermined decoding order. This makes it possible to display a series of movements in which the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern when viewed from an angle corresponding to the C angle. Further, in the case of the C-angle third video data group 269, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the video data 273c included in the C-angle third video data group 269 according to a predetermined decoding order. This makes it possible to display a series of movements in which the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern when viewed from an angle corresponding to the C angle.

Since still image data is derived from the moving image data 271a to 273c by performing decoding processing, it is not possible to start displaying an image from a timing in the middle of the moving image data 271a to 273c. When displaying an image is started from a timing in the middle of the data 271a to 273c, a processing waiting time occurs until the still image data at the timing in the middle is derived. In this case, since each video data group 261 to 269 has a plurality of video data 271a to 273c, the video data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the video data 271a to 273c in the next order It becomes possible to use the switching timing as the angle change timing. Therefore, it is possible to change the type of angle among A angle, B angle, and C angle during execution of angle display performance.

Here, in the angle display production, the opportunity to change the angle is generated by operating the production operation device 48. In this case, unless the angle is changed early with respect to the operation timing of the production operation device 48, it will be difficult to give the player the impression that the angle has been changed as a result of the operation of the production operation device 48. Put it away. On the other hand, as already explained, there are a plurality of video data groups 261 to 269, specifically three, for displaying the same video in each of the angles A to C. Furthermore, the number of updates (frame number) of the image after the start of the angle display effect corresponding to the first order still image data in any of the moving image data 271a to 273c is different between the moving image data groups 261 to 269 within the same angle. They are different.

Specifically, in each of the angles A to C, the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267 is such that the first moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a has the first still image data at the start of the angle display effect. The moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the subsequent order corresponds to the timing, and the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the subsequent order is different from the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the previous order, to the still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. This corresponds to the timing when the display of the video has progressed by the number of minutes corresponding to the minimum unit number. In this case, the A-angle first video data group 261, the B-angle first video data group 264, and the C-angle first video data group 267 have the same number of video data 271a, 272a, 273a, and , among the moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a in the mutually corresponding order, the number of updates of the image after the start of the angle display performance corresponding to the still image data in the first order is the same.

In the second video data groups 262, 265, 268 for each angle from A to C, the still image data in the first order among the video data 271b, 272b, and 273b in each order is the first video data group for each angle from A to C. Corresponding to the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed by the first reference period K1 with respect to the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the corresponding order in the data groups 261, 264, 267. There is. In other words, the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 in each angle A to C is the first moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b, and the first still image data is the start timing of the angle display effect. This corresponds to the timing when the display of the video has progressed by the first reference period K1 minutes, and the video data 271b, 272b, 273b in the subsequent order are different from the video data 271b, 272b, 273b in the previous order. This corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed by a number of minutes corresponding to the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. In this case, each video data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the second video data group 262, 265, 268 is a video image included in the first video data group 261, 264, 267 at the same angle. Among the data 271a, 272a, and 273a, the contents of the moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a in the corresponding order and the still image data created by decoding processing partially overlap. Furthermore, all the still image data created by one piece of moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 is It is included in the still image data created by two consecutive moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a included in.

In the third video data group 263, 266, 269 for each angle A to C, the first order still image data in each order video data 271c, 272c, 273c is the second video data group for each angle A to C. Corresponding to the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed by the second reference period K1 with respect to the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in the corresponding order in the data groups 262, 265, 268. There is. In other words, in each of the angles A to C, the third video data group 263, 266, 269 is the first video data 271c, 272c, 273c, and the first still image data is the start timing of the angle display effect. This corresponds to the timing when the display of the video has progressed by a second reference period K2, which is twice the first reference period K1, and the video data 271c, 272c, and 273c in the subsequent order are the same as the previous order. This corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed by a number of minutes corresponding to the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to the moving image data 271c, 272c, and 273c. In this case, each video data 271c, 272c, 273c included in the third video data group 263, 266, 269 is a video image included in the first video data group 261, 264, 267 at the same angle. The data 271a, 272a, 273a have a part of content that overlaps with the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the corresponding order and the still image data created by decoding processing, and the second moving image data at the same angle Among the moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b included in the groups 262, 265, and 268, the contents of the moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b in the corresponding order and the still image data created by decoding processing partially overlap. are doing. Furthermore, all the still image data created by one piece of moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c included in the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 is Two consecutive moving images included in the still image data created by two consecutive moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a included in the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 It is included in still image data created by image data 271b, 272b, and 273b.

The number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the number of still image data that can be reproduced by one of the moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data 271a to 273c. In other words, the number of times the image is updated (the number of frames) in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the number of times the image is updated by one of the moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data 271a to 273c. Furthermore, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. Specifically, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is 16, and the number of image updates in the first reference period K1 is 16.

The number of still image data that can be reproduced in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the number of still image data that can be reproduced by one of the moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data 271a to 273c. In other words, the number of times the image is updated (the number of frames) in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the number of times the image is updated by one of the moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data 271a to 273c. Furthermore, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. Specifically, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is 32, and the number of times that images are updated in the first reference period K1 is 32.

As described above, a plurality of video data groups 261 to 269 are provided for displaying the same video in each of the angles A to C. Also, in each angle, the second video data groups 262, 265, 268 are smaller in number than the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as video data 271a to 273c with respect to the first video data groups 261, 264, 267. The third video data groups 263, 266, 269 are still images that can be set as video data 271a to 273c with respect to the second video data groups 262, 265, 268. The first reference period K1 corresponds to a number smaller than the minimum data unit number. As a result, it is possible to generate many switching timings between the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order at each angle. This makes it possible to change the angle at an early stage.

Next, the progress of the angle display effect will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 100. 100(a) shows the operation timing of the production operating device 48, FIG. 100(b) shows the waiting period until the angle is switched in response to the operation of the production operating device 48, and FIG. 100(c) shows the operation timing of the production operating device 48. Fig. 100(d) shows the period during which the A-angle video is displayed, and Fig. 100(e) shows the timing when the angle can be switched. FIG. 100(f) shows a period during which the moving image data 271a to 271c are being read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, FIG. 100(f) shows a period during which the moving image of angle B is displayed, and FIG. indicates a period during which one piece of moving image data 272a to 272c included in the B angle moving image data group 264 to 266 is read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. In the following description, a case will be explained in which the angle is changed from angle A to angle B, but the same applies to other patterns of changing the angle.

As shown in FIG. 100(d), in a situation where a video is displayed using the first video data group 261 of the A-angle video data groups 261 to 263, as shown in FIG. 100(c), At timing t1, a timing at which switching to the second video data group 265 of the B angle is possible occurs, and at the same time, at timing t2, a timing at which switching to the third video data group 266 from the B angle is possible occurs. However, since the presentation operating device 48 has not been operated by each of these timings t1 and t2, the angle does not change.

Incidentally, the switching of angles triggered by the operation of the production operating device 48 is performed in a loop among the A angle, B angle, and C angle in a predetermined order. Specifically, the A angle is selected at the start timing of the angle display performance, and then, triggered by the operation of the performance operation device 48, the A angle → B angle → C angle → A angle → B angle → C angle → A Angle switching occurs in the order of angle →...

Thereafter, at timing t3, it is the timing to read and decode the next sequential moving image data 271a in the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle that is the target of moving image display. Therefore, at the timing t3, the next sequential moving image data 271a is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, as shown in FIG. Decoding processing is started for image data 271a. In this case, only one piece of moving image data 271a is read out from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and decoding processing is started. Then, the plurality of still image data after the decoding process is written into the moving image data area 211b. In addition, when reading and decoding the one piece of moving image data 271a, the area for moving image data 211b is set so that the still image data created from the one piece of moving image data 271a that is currently being displayed is not erased. The data is set.

Thereafter, at timing t4, which is the timing at which the decoding process is completed, a timing at which switching to the first video data group 264 of the B angle is possible occurs, as shown in FIG. 100(c). However, since the production operation device 48 has not been operated by the timing of t4, the switching of angles does not occur, and the video of the first video data group 261 of the A angle that has been decoded at the timing of t4. Display of a moving image using the data 271a is started.

Thereafter, at timing t5, the effect operation device 48 is operated as shown in FIG. 100(a). In this case, since the moving image of the moving image data 271a currently being displayed is being displayed and it is not the timing to switch to the moving image data group 264 to 266 of the B angle, the angle is changed as shown in FIG. The state is such that the switching is on standby.

Thereafter, at timing t6, the switch is made a period before the timing t7, which is the timing at which switching to the B-angle video data group 264 to 266 is possible, by a period that enables decoding of one video data 271a to 273c. This is the timing at which decoding can be started. Therefore, at the timing t6, decoding of the switching destination moving image data 272b is started in the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle, as shown in FIG. 100(g). Specifically, in the second video data group 265 of the B angle, the current switching destination video data 272b is read from the memory module 203 to the video data area 211b, and the video data 272b is decoded. Begins. Then, the plurality of still image data after the decoding process is written into the moving image data area 211b. In addition, when reading and decoding the one piece of moving image data 272b, the area for moving image data 211b is set so that the still image data created from the one piece of moving image data 271a that is currently being displayed is not erased. The data is set. Note that the period between the timing at which decoding can be started and the timing at which switching is possible is shorter than the period in which a video is displayed using one piece of video data 271a to 273c. For example, the timing at which decoding can be started is the timing at which switching is possible immediately after. This corresponds to the update timing of the image two times earlier than the possible timing.

Thereafter, at timing t7, which is the timing at which the decoding process is completed, display of the moving image using the moving image data 272b of the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle whose decoding was completed at the timing t7 is started. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 100(f), display of the B-angle moving image is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100(c), at timing t8, a timing at which switching to the third C-angle moving image data group 269 is possible occurs. However, since the production operation device 48 has not been operated by the timing of t8, the angle does not change, and the second video data group 265 of the B angle, which has been decoded at the timing of t7, is The display of the moving image using the moving image data 272b continues.

As mentioned above, the angle is changed based on the operation of the production operation device 48, but the operation timing of the production operation device 48 is such that the decoding process of the switching destination moving image data 271a to 273c is performed. Even if the decoding process is started, if the decoding process is not completed by the next angle's switchable timing, the angle will not be switched at the next angle's switchable timing, and the next angle's switchable timing will continue. The angle is switched at . This operation will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 100(d), in a situation where a moving image is being displayed using the first moving image data group 261 among the A-angle moving image data groups 261 to 263, at timing t9, the image shown in FIG. 100(a) is displayed. The performance operation device 48 is operated as shown. In this case, the moving image of the moving image data 271a that is currently being displayed is being displayed, and it is not the timing to switch to the moving image data group 264 to 266 of the B angle, so the angle is changed as shown in FIG. The state is such that the switching is on standby.

Thereafter, at timing t10, it becomes possible to switch to the B-angle video data group 264 to 266, as shown in FIG. 100(c). However, during the period between the timing t9 when the production operation device 48 is operated and the timing t10 when switching to the B angle video data group 264 to 266 is possible, one video data 271a to 271 This is less than the period required to complete the decoding process for H.273c. Therefore, at the timing t10, switching to the B angle video data group 264 to 266 does not occur. Note that at the timing t10, reading and decoding processing of the B-angle moving image data 272a to 272c has not yet started.

Thereafter, at the timing t11, the switch is made by the period before the timing t12, which is the timing at which switching to the B angle video data group 264 to 266 is possible, by a period that enables decoding of one video data 271a to 273c. This is the timing at which decoding can be started. Therefore, at timing t11, decoding of the switching destination moving image data 272c is started in the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle, as shown in FIG. 100(g). Specifically, in the third video data group 266 of the B angle, the current switching destination video data 272c is read out from the memory module 203 to the video data area 211b, and the video data 272c is decoded. Begins. Then, the plurality of still image data after the decoding process is written into the moving image data area 211b. In addition, when reading and decoding the one piece of moving image data 272c, the area for moving image data 211b is set so that the still image data created from the one piece of moving image data 271a that is currently being displayed is not erased. The data settings are performed.

Thereafter, at timing t12, which is the timing at which the decoding process is completed, display of the moving image using the moving image data 272c of the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle whose decoding was completed at the timing t12 is started. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 100(f), display of the B-angle moving image is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100(c), at timing t13, a timing at which switching to the C-angle first moving image data group 267 is possible occurs. However, since the production operation device 48 has not been operated by the timing of t13, the angle does not change, and the third video data group 266 of the B angle, which has been decoded at the timing of t12, is The display of the moving image using the moving image data 272c continues.

As described above, when the production operation device 48 is operated immediately before the timing at which the angle can be switched, the angle is switched at the next timing at which the angle can be switched. The angle is switched at the timing when the decoding of the data 271a to 273c is completed. This makes it possible to prevent decoding waiting time for the moving image data 271a to 273c from occurring when switching angles.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the angle display effect will be explained. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the calculation process for angle display effect executed by the display CPU 201. Note that the calculation process for angle display effect is executed in the calculation process for effect in step S2504 in the task process (FIG. 68) in the opening/closing execution mode in which the angle display effect is to be executed.

If it is the opening period immediately before starting the angle display effect (step S4101: YES), opening processing is executed (step S4102). The opening period is a period that is set before the display of the video from any of the A angles to C angles starts, and during the opening period, the video display from any of the A angles to C angles will start. It is notified that the angle can be changed by operating the production operation device 48. Furthermore, during the opening period, it is possible to select an angle to be displayed at the start timing of video display based on the operation of the production operation device 48.

The opening process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 102. First, it is determined whether it is a reading period for the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4201). In the opening period, an angle selection period is first set that allows selection of an angle, and then a reading period of the moving image data 271a to 273c is set. If it is the angle selection period (step S4201: NO), it is determined whether an operation generation command has been received from the audio/light side MPU 62 (step S4202). The performance operation device 48 is electrically connected to the sound and light side MPU 62, and when the performance operation device 48 is operated, an operation generation command is transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 201.

If an operation generation command has been received from the sound/light side MPU 62 (step S4202: YES), an update process for the angle counter provided in the work RAM 202 is executed (step S4203). The angle counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which angle of the moving image data 271a to 273c is to be read out at the timing of reading out the moving image data 271a to 273c. When the value of the angle counter is "0", it corresponds to the A angle, when the value of the angle counter is "1", it corresponds to the B angle, and when the value of the angle counter is "2". The case corresponds to the C angle. When the opening period has started, the value of the angle counter is "0", and when the operation generation command is received, the process of step S4203 is executed and 1 is added to the value of the angle counter. Further, when the value of the angle counter after adding 1 becomes "3", the value of the angle counter is cleared to "0".

On the other hand, if it is the period for reading the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4201: YES), the moving image data 271a to 273c corresponding to the current value in the angle counter of the work RAM 202 is grasped (step S4204). In this case, if the value of the angle counter is "0", the first moving image data 271a in the first moving image data group 261 of angle A is grasped, and if the value of the angle counter is "1", the moving image data 271a of angle B is grasped. The first moving image data 272a in the first moving image data group 264 is grasped, and if the value of the angle counter is "2", the first moving image data 273a in the first moving image data group 267 of the C angle is grasped. do. Thereafter, the decoding designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4205).

If a negative determination is made in step S4202, if the process of step S4203 is executed, or if the process of step S4205 is executed, various image data necessary to display the image corresponding to the current update timing during the opening period (Step S4206), and calculates and derives parameter information to be applied to the image data (Step S4207). The opening information is then stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4208).

When the opening process is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407) includes the arrangement of the various image data grasped in step S4206 in the world coordinate system. Set as a target. Further, parameter information applied to these various image data is set in the drawing list. Additionally, opening information is set in the drawing list. By executing the drawing process (FIG. 70) in the VDP 205 according to the drawing list, the image for the opening period will be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

Further, if the decoding designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201, the decoding designation information is set in the drawing list, and the moving image data 271a to 273c grasped in step S4204 are stored. Information about the address of the memory module 203 that is located therein and the address of the area where the moving image data 271a to 273c are developed as still image data in the moving image data area 211b are set. In this case, the VDP 205 reads the moving image data 271a to 273c specified in the drawing list from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

Specifically, the addresses of the moving image data 271a to 273c are grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S4301), and the moving image data 271a to 273c are converted into still images from the information specified in the drawing list. The address of the area to be expanded as data is grasped (step S4302). Then, the moving image data 271a to 273c are read out from the address of the memory module 203 grasped in step S4301, and the moving image data 271a to 273c are decoded. Then, the still image data group resulting from the decoding is written into each area of the address of the moving image data area 211b grasped in step S4302 (step S4303).

Returning to the explanation of the calculation process for angle display performance (FIG. 101), if it is not the opening period (step S4101: NO), the operation generation command is received from the sound and light side MPU 62 (step S4103: YES). ), sets the operation acceptance flag provided in the work RAM 202 to "1" (step S4104). The operation acceptance flag is a flag used by the display CPU 201 to specify that the angle should be switched. Only one operation reception flag is provided, and even if the production operation device 48 is operated multiple times before the angle change occurs, the operation will not be accepted for the second and subsequent operations of the production operation device 48. The state in which the flag is set to "1" is simply maintained. As will be described in detail later, if the operation acceptance flag is set to "1", no matter how many times the production operation device 48 is operated before the angle change occurs, the next order will be changed from the current angle. A switch occurs for the angle. As a result, when switching of angles occurs, the angles are switched in a predetermined order as the content of the angle display effect displayed on the symbol display device 41.

In the calculation process for angle display effect, it is determined in step S4105 whether or not it is the timing to start decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c. The timing at which the decoding can be started is the timing at which the angle can be switched that occurs thereafter (timing at t1, timing at t2, timing at t4, timing at t7, timing at t8, timing at t10, timing at t12, timing at t13 in FIG. 100). The image update timing is set a predetermined period of time before (timing), in other words, a predetermined number of times before. More specifically, the period between the timing at which decoding can be started and the timing at which switching is possible is shorter than the period in which a moving image is displayed using one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c, for example, the timing at which decoding can be started is corresponds to the update timing of the image two times before the immediately next switchable timing. Note that whether or not it is the timing to decode the moving image data is determined based on the execution target table for the angle display effect read out from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 when starting the angle display effect.

If it is the timing to start decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4105: YES), it is determined whether the operation acceptance flag of the work RAM 202 is set to "1" (step S4106). If the operation acceptance flag is not set to "1" (step S4106: NO), the value of the timing counter provided in the work RAM 202 is subtracted by 1 (step S4107). In the case where the display of a moving image using one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c for the same moving image data group 261 to 269 continues without changing the angle, the timing counter measures the same moving image data group 261. This counter is used by the display CPU 201 to specify the timing at which the next sequence of moving image data 271a to 273c in 269 is to be decoded. The timing counter is set to "3" when the moving image data 271a to 273c are newly decoded, and when the same moving image data 271a to 273c are used, the timing counter is set to "3". The value of the timing counter is decremented by "1" each time the decoding timing is reached. Note that at the timing when the opening period ends in the angle display performance, the value of the timing counter is "3".

If the value of the timing counter after subtracting "1" is "0" (step S4108: YES), at the timing to decode the next sequential video data 271a to 273c in the same video data group 261 to 269. It means something. In this case, processing for decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c shown in steps S4109 to S4112 is executed.

Specifically, first, the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the current value of the angle counter is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S4109). As already explained, the angle counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which angle of the moving image data 271a to 273c is to be read out at the reading timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c. The moving image correspondence table 275 is stored in advance in the memory module 203 in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the A angle, B angle, and C angle. In the video correspondence table 275, the relationship between the timing at which switching to new video data 271a to 273c can occur and the type of video data 271a to 273c to which switching is made at the switching timing is predetermined. Also, at each angle, the first video data group 261, 264, 267, the second video data group 262, 265, 268, and the third video data group 263, 266, 269 are used to create new video data 271a to 273c. Since the timing at which switching can occur is different and the types of video data 271a to 273c to which switching is to be made are also different, the above data is set in the video correspondence table 275 for each video data group 261 to 269 to be used. There is.

FIG. 104(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the A angle. Note that the contents of the video correspondence table corresponding to the B angle and the video correspondence table corresponding to the C angle are the same as those in FIG. 104(a).

As shown in FIG. 104(a), pointer information corresponding to switching is set as information for specifying the timing at which switching to new moving image data 271a to 271c may occur. The pointer information corresponds to the number of times the image was updated using the moving image data 271a to 271c, and specifically, each time the image was updated using the moving image data 271a to 271c. The pointer information of the reference object is incremented by 1. Further, when the display of an image using the first moving image data 271a to 271c is started in the angle display performance, the pointer information of the reference target is "0". Then, the updating of the pointer information of the reference object is continued without being cleared to "0" midway until the display of the image using the moving image data 271a to 271c in the angle display effect is completed. Therefore, if the pointer information is "16", it means that the image has been updated 16 times using the video data 271a to 271c, and if the pointer information is "32", it means that the video data 271a to 271c have been updated 16 times. This means that the image has been updated 32 times using 271a to 271c.

One type of moving image data 271a to 271c is set corresponding to each pointer information corresponding to switching. As already explained, in the first video data group 261, the video data 271a in the first order corresponds to the start timing of the angle display effect, and the video data 271a in the subsequent order corresponds to the video data 271a in the previous order. In contrast, this corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed by the number of still image data that can be displayed using one piece of moving image data 271a. Therefore, for the first moving image data group 261, the first moving image data 271a is not set in the moving image correspondence table 275, and the number of still image data that can be displayed using one moving image data 271a is Pointer information corresponding to each value multiplied by an integer is set as pointer information corresponding to switching. Then, for each of the pointer information corresponding to each switching, information about the type of the corresponding moving image data 271a, specifically information about the area in which each moving image data 271a is expanded in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204. Address information is set.

As already explained, each moving image data 271b of the second moving image data group 262 corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed by the first reference period K1 minutes with respect to each moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261. are doing. Therefore, for the second video data group 262, the pointer information corresponding to switching of the video data 271b in the first order is the timing when the video display has progressed by the first reference period K1 minutes with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. Pointer information is set. Furthermore, for the moving image data 271b after the first order in the second moving image data group 262, pointer information corresponding to each switching set in the moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261 is used as pointer information corresponding to switching. , pointer information is set at the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed by the first reference period K1 minutes.

As already explained, each moving image data 271c of the third moving image data group 263 corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed by the second reference period K2 with respect to each moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261. are doing. Therefore, for the third video data group 263, the pointer information corresponding to the switching of the video data 271c in the first order is the timing when the video display has progressed by the second reference period K2 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. Pointer information is set. Furthermore, for the moving image data 271c after the first order in the third moving image data group 263, pointer information corresponding to each switching set in the moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261 is used as pointer information corresponding to switching. , pointer information is set at the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed by the second reference period K2 minutes.

Returning to the explanation of the calculation process for angle display effect (FIG. 101), after reading the video correspondence table 275, the video data 271a to 273c to be read and decoded this time is grasped (step S4110). In this determination, reference is made to a target moving image counter provided in the work RAM 202. The target video counter is a counter used by the display CPU 201 to specify which video data group 261 to 269 is to be read at the timing of reading the video data 271a to 273c. The case where the value of the target video counter is "0" corresponds to the first video data group 261, 264, 267, and the case where the value of the target video counter is "1" corresponds to the second video data group 262, 265. , 268, and the case where the value of the target video counter is "2" corresponds to the third video data group 263, 266, 269. In step S4110, the types of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be read are specified in the moving image correspondence table 275 read out in step S4109, based on the value of the target moving image counter. Then, among the pointer information compatible with switching set for the video data group 261 to 269 that is the readout target, the current pointer information is a value larger than the current pointer information in the angle display effect. The information of the moving image data 271a to 273c set in correspondence with the pointer information corresponding to switching with the closest value is grasped. This allows the display CPU 201 to grasp information about the moving image data 271a to 273c that should be read this time and subjected to decoding processing.

Thereafter, the timing counter of the work RAM 202 is set to "3" (step S4111), and the decoding designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4112). When these processes are executed, decoding designation information is set in the current drawing list, as well as information on the address of the memory module 203 storing the video data 271a to 273c grasped in step S4110, and the video In the data area 211b, the address of the area where the moving image data 271a to 273c are developed as still image data is set. The VDP 205 that has received the drawing list reads the video data 271a to 273c to be read from the memory module 203 into the video data area 211b by executing the decoding process (FIG. 103) as described above. Then, each still image data after the decoding process is written into a designated area in the moving image data area 211b.

On the other hand, in the calculation process for angle display effect (FIG. 101), if it is the decoding start possible timing and the operation acceptance flag of the work RAM 202 is set to "1" (step S4105 and step S4106: YES), the corresponding operation The reception flag is cleared to "0" (step S4113), and the switching reference table 276 is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S4114). The switching reference table 276 shows the angle and types of video data groups 261 to 269 to be switched to in relation to the current angle and types of video data groups 261 to 269 when changing the angle based on the operation of the production operation device 48. This is a table for specifying.

FIG. 104(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the switching reference table 276. As shown in FIG. 104(b), pointer information corresponding to switching is set as information for specifying the timing at which switching to new moving image data 271a to 273c can occur. The contents of the pointer information are the same as those described for the moving image correspondence table 275 in FIG. 104(a). The pointer information corresponding to switching is set corresponding to the switchable timing of each of the first video data group 261, 264, 267, the second video data group 262, 265, 268, and the third video data group 263, 266, 269. has been done. Specifically, the pointer information corresponding to the first switching is set to the pointer information at the timing when the display of the video has progressed for a first reference period K1 minutes with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect, and the pointer information corresponding to the subsequent switching is set. The pointer information is set to the pointer information at the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed by the first reference period K1 with respect to the pointer information corresponding to the immediately previous switching.

For the pointer information corresponding to each switching, information on the correspondence between the current angle, the switching destination angle, and the combination of the video data groups 261 to 269 is set. Specifically, as already explained, when the angle is changed by operating the production operation device 48, A angle → B angle → C angle → A angle → B angle → C angle → A angle →... Angle switching occurs in this order. Also, the timing at which switching to the first video data group 261, 264, 267 is possible, the timing at which switching to the second video data group 262, 265, 268 is possible, and the timing at which switching to the third video data group 263, 266, 269 is possible are as follows. The contents are as described for the moving image correspondence table 275 in FIG. 104(a). Therefore, the correspondence relationship is as shown in FIG. 104(b).

Returning to the explanation of the calculation process for angle display effect (FIG. 101), after reading the switching reference table 276, setting processing of the angle counter and the target video counter is executed based on the switching reference table 276 (step S4115). In this setting process, among the pointer information compatible with switching set in the switching reference table 276, the value that is closest to the current pointer information and is larger than the current pointer information in the angle display effect is selected. The pointer information corresponding to the switching is specified, and the information set corresponding to the current angle is specified in the pointer information corresponding to the switching. For example, if the current pointer information in the angle display effect is "10" and the current angle is the A angle, based on the switching reference table 276, the information on the B angle is specified as the information on the switching destination angle, and the switching is performed. Information on the second video data group 265 is specified as information on the previous video data groups 261 to 269. Further, for example, if the current pointer information in the angle display performance is "68" and the current angle is the C angle, information on the A angle is specified as the switching destination angle information based on the switching reference table 276, Information on the third video data group 263 is specified as information on the video data groups 261 to 269 to which switching is to be made. The specified switching destination angle information is set in the angle counter, and the information on the specified switching destination video data groups 261 to 269 is set in the target video counter.

After executing the processing from step S4113 to step S4115, the processing from step S4109 to step S4112 already described is executed. In this case, in step S4109, the video correspondence table 275 corresponding to the value of the angle counter newly set in step S4115 is read, and in step S4110, the video correspondence table 275 corresponding to the value of the target video counter newly set in step S4115 is read. The moving image data 271a to 273c are grasped.

In the calculation process for angle display effect, it is determined whether it is the timing to change the type of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4116). When the processes from step S4109 to step S4112 are executed, the change trigger flag provided in the work RAM 202 is set to "1". In step S4116, when the change trigger flag is set to "1" and it is the timing to change the video data 271a to 273c, the timing to change the type of the video data 271a to 273c is determined. Assuming that, an affirmative judgment is made. The timing at which the video data 271a to 273c can be switched is as described above, and the first timing at which switching is possible corresponds to the timing at which the display of the video has progressed by the first reference period K1 minutes with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. The subsequent switchable timing corresponds to the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed by the first reference period K1 with respect to the immediately previous switchable timing.

If it is time to change the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4116: YES), the value of the frame counter provided in the work RAM 202 is cleared to "0" (step S4117). Note that when an affirmative determination is made in step S4116, the change trigger flag is cleared to "0". The frame counter is a counter used by the display CPU 201 to specify which still image data of the moving image data 271a to 273c developed in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204 is to be used. It is. When the value of the frame counter is "0", the still image data in the first order among the developed moving image data 271a to 273c is determined to be used. In addition, when the still image data is determined to be used in step S4118, which will be described later, the value of the frame counter is incremented by 1, and in the next step S4118, the still image in the order corresponding to the value of the frame counter after the increment of 1 is added. Data is understood to be used.

If a negative determination is made in step S4116, or if the process in step S4117 is executed, the still image data corresponding to the value of the frame counter in the work RAM 202 is grasped as the image data to be used at the current update timing (step S4118). . In this case, 1 is added to the value of the frame counter. Additionally, other image data necessary to display the image corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S4119), and parameter information to be applied to the image data grasped in steps S4118 and S4119 is calculated. (Step S4120). Then, the angle effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4121).

When the calculation process for angle display effect is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407) includes various image data grasped in steps S4118 and S4119. is set to be placed in the world coordinate system. Further, parameter information applied to these various image data is set in the drawing list. Further, angle effect information is set in the drawing list.

When the VDP 205 receives the drawing list, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 105 as a setting process for angle display effect, it first grasps the still image data grasped in step S4118 (step S4401), and then in step S4119. The other image data grasped in step S4402 is grasped. Further, the parameter information obtained in step S4120 is grasped (step S4403). Then, the image data obtained in steps S4401 and S4402 is set in the world coordinate system with the parameter information obtained in step S4403 applied (step S4404). As a result, the drawing data for displaying the image for angle display effect is finally created, and the image for angle display effect is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Note that the setting process for angle display effect is executed in the setting process for effect in step S2603 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) when a drawing list in which angle effect information is set is received.

As described above, each video data group 261 to 269 has a plurality of video data 271a to 273c, so that video data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and video data 271a to 273c in the next order can be It becomes possible to use the switching timing as the angle change timing. Therefore, it is possible to change the type of angle among A angle, B angle, and C angle during execution of angle display performance.

Further, the amount of data of these moving image data 271a to 273c is set so that the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. This makes it possible to set many timings at which the moving image data 271a to 273c to be used can be switched. Further, according to the configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data read out at one time.

A plurality of video data groups 261 to 269 are provided for displaying the same video at each angle A to C. Also, in each angle, the second video data groups 262, 265, 268 are smaller in number than the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as video data 271a to 273c with respect to the first video data groups 261, 264, 267. The third video data groups 263, 266, 269 are still images that can be set as video data 271a to 273c with respect to the second video data groups 262, 265, 268. The first reference period K1 corresponds to a number smaller than the minimum unit number of data. As a result, it is possible to generate many switching timings between the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order at each angle. This makes it possible to change the angle at an early stage.

The moving image data 271a to 273c are not read out all at once for each selected angle, but in a situation where one moving image data 271a to 273c is decoded and used, the moving image data 271a to 273c are read out next to each selected angle. When the time comes to decode the moving image data 271a to 273c, one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c to be used is read out and decoded. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to read the video data 271a to 273c in the video data area 211b of the VRAM 204.

In a situation where one moving image data 271a to 273c is decoded and used, the next moving image data 271a to 273c to be used is read out and decoded. This makes it possible to avoid waiting time for decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c when new moving image data 271a to 273c are to be used.

In a configuration in which the angle is changed based on the operation of the production operation device 48, even if the operation timing of the production operation device 48 is before the timing at which switching of the moving image data 271a to 273c is possible, it is after the timing at which decoding can be started. In this case, the change in the angle for the operation of the production operating device 48 occurs not at the immediately subsequent switchable timing, but at the next switchable timing with respect to the immediately subsequent switchable timing. Thereby, it becomes possible to smoothly switch the angle for the operation of the production operation device 48.

<Another form of angle display performance>
- The number of images that can be displayed by one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c is not limited to the same number of images, and the number of images that can be displayed by at least some of the moving image data is different from that of other moving images. The configuration may be different from that of the data. In this case, the timing at which switching to new video data 271a to 273c can be performed and the timing at which decoding can be started must be set according to the type of each video data 271a to 273c.

- In a configuration in which a video display using video data is started when the performance operation device 48 is operated during the valid operation period, the video display starts from the timing corresponding to the elapsed time from the start timing of the valid operation period. A video data group that makes it possible to display a series of specific videos for the configuration to be started, and another video data group that makes it possible to display a video that starts at a timing in the middle of the specific video. A configuration may also be applied in which these are provided separately.

- The number of video data groups prepared for one angle is not limited to three types, and may be two types, or four or more types. Further, the number of types of angles is not limited to three types, and may be two types, or four or more types.

<Configuration for performing special video production>
Next, a configuration for performing a special video performance will be described.

The special animation use effect is an effect that uses the special moving image data 282 when displaying an image on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the special moving image data 282. FIG. 106(a) shows normal moving image data 281 such as the already explained moving image data 271a to 273c, and FIG. 106(b) indicates special moving image data 282.

As shown in FIG. 106(a), in the normal moving image data 281, file data is set at the first address, followed by compressed data for each frame. Note that a frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data includes one frame of I picture data corresponding to reference data, multiple frames of P picture data corresponding to first difference data, and multiple frames of B picture data corresponding to second difference data. It has .

I-picture data is data that can create one frame of still image data by itself when decoding. P-picture data is data that can create one frame of still image data by performing forward prediction with reference to I-picture data or P-picture data one or more frames before when decoding. . During decoding, B-picture data is bidirectionally predicted by referring to I-picture data or P-picture data one or more frames before, and I-picture data or P-picture data one or more frames later. , is data with which one frame of still image data can be created.

In the compressed data in the normal moving image data 281, I picture data is set as the first frame data. Further, B picture data is set as data for the second frame, . . . , m-1 frame. Further, P picture data is set as the m-th frame data. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the m+1th frame, . . . , the n−1th frame. Further, P picture data is set as the n-th frame data. Note that the arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above-mentioned arrangement pattern and may be arbitrary.

By performing decoding processing on the normal moving image data 281, still image data 283a to 283d (hereinafter referred to as normal decoded image data 283a to 283d) for a plurality of update timings are stored in the VRAM 204 from the normal moving image data 281. This will be created in the video data area 211b. In this case, these normal decoded image data 283a to 283d are image data in which the contents of some images among the images displayed by these normal decoded image data 283a to 283d are different from each other.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106(b), in the special moving image data 282, file data is set at the first address, followed by one frame of I picture data corresponding to reference data. , no compressed data other than the I picture data is set. By performing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282, still image data 284 (hereinafter referred to as special decoded image data 284) corresponding to a plurality of update timings from the special moving image data 282 are stored in the moving image data area of the VRAM 204. 211b. However, these special decoded image data 284 are image data whose contents of images displayed by these special decoded image data 284 are all the same.

The amount of special moving image data 282 is set so that the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. Specifically, regarding the still image data for the minimum unit number, the special moving image data 282 can reproduce 48 pieces of still image data, in other words, it is possible to update the image 48 times (update of 48 frames). ing. Therefore, when the special moving image data 282 is decoded, a minimum number of pieces of special decoded image data 284 having the same image content are created. As already explained, the amount of data of the moving image data 271a to 273c corresponding to the normal moving image data 281 is set so that the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. However, the amount of normal moving image data 281 other than the moving image data 271a to 273c is set so that it is possible to create still image data in a number larger than the minimum unit number that can be set as moving image data. There is.

The special moving image data 282 is stored in advance in the memory module 203 like the normal moving image data 281, but a plurality of types of special moving image data 282 are stored in the memory module 203. The content of the image based on the special decoded image data 284 after the decoding process differs depending on the type of special moving image data 282.

Special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data. In this case, predetermined object data for applying the special decoded image data 284 as texture data is stored in the memory module 203 in advance. The type of image displayed using the special decoded image data 284 and predetermined object data is arbitrary, but for example, character images of animals such as humans, cats, fish, and dogs may be displayed; The configuration may also be such that an individual image representing an object is displayed.

By setting the special moving image data 282 as described above, it becomes possible to store one piece of texture data as moving image data in the memory module 203. As already explained, the texture data stored in advance in the memory module 203 as still image data is read out from the memory module 203 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started, and stored in the VRAM 204 for expansion. It is written to the texture area 211a in the buffer 211. In this case, as the types of texture data increase, the storage capacity required in the texture area 211a increases. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to change the type of texture data read into the texture area 211a every time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load on the VDP 205 will increase.

On the other hand, by storing some of the texture data as special moving image data 282, it is possible to read out some of the texture data to the VRAM 204 as needed while eliminating the need to replace the texture area 211a. becomes. Furthermore, since it is not stored in the memory module 203 as texture data but as special moving image data 282, texture data can be created from the special moving image data 282 using the area 211b for moving image data. becomes possible. Furthermore, when the video data area 211b is also used as an area for using texture data, the special video data 282 is read out to the video data area 211b instead of the texture data itself. There is no need to change the handling of the video data area 211b in the VDP 205 depending on the type of data read to the video data area 211b.

Next, the manner in which the special video performance is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 107. FIG. 107(a) shows the start timing of supply of operating power, FIG. 107(b) shows the reading period of texture data from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a, and FIG. 107(c) shows the timing for starting the supply of operating power. 107(d) shows the start timing of the special moving image use effect, and FIG. 107(e) shows the execution period of the special moving image use effect during which the special moving image data 282 is used. 107(f) shows a reading period of the special moving image data 282 from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and FIG. 107(g) shows a usage period of the special moving image data 282. .

At the timing t1, the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 starts as shown in FIG. 107(a), so that the texture data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a as shown in FIG. 107(b). The reading of the texture data is started, and the reading of the texture data is completed at timing t2. As a result, all the texture data previously stored in the memory module 203 is stored and held in the texture area 211a while the supply of operating power to the VRAM 204 continues, as shown in FIG. 107(c). . Note that since backup power is not supplied to the VRAM 204, if the supply of operating power to the display control device 200 is stopped, texture data cannot be stored and held in the texture area 211a.

Thereafter, at timing t3, the special video use effect is started as shown in FIG. 107(d). However, use of the special video data 282 is not started at the timing t3. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the object data read from the memory module 203 to areas other than the texture area 211a and the video data area 211b in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, and the texture when the supply of operating power starts. Drawing data is created using the texture data read out to the storage area 211a, and an image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 using the drawing data.

Thereafter, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 107(f), the special moving image data 282 is read out, and reading of the special moving image data 282 from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b starts. At the same time, decoding processing is performed on the special moving image data 282 read into the moving image data area 211b. Then, at timing t5, the decoding process of the special moving image data 282 is completed, and a plurality of pieces of special decoded image data 284 created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282 are used for moving image data. It is written to area 211b.

At timing t5 when the decoding process of the special moving image data 282 is completed, display of an image using the special decoded image data 284 is started as shown in FIG. 107(g). In this case, the special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data to be pasted onto predetermined object data, and the predetermined object data and special decoded image data 284 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane. Drawing data is created. Then, by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 using the drawing data, an image using the special decoded image data 284 is displayed. Thereafter, at timing t6, the display of the image using the special moving image data 282 ends.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the special video use effect will be explained. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for a special video use effect executed by the display CPU 201. Note that the calculation process for the special video use effect is executed in the performance calculation process of step S2504 in the task process (FIG. 68) in the game round in which the special video use effect is to be executed.

If it is not the period of use of the special moving image data 282 (step S4501: NO), the special moving image data 282 is It is determined whether it is read timing (step S4502). If it is the timing to read the special moving image data 282 (step S4502: YES), the special moving image data 282 to be read out this time and subjected to decoding processing is grasped (step S4502). Note that there are multiple types of special video effects, and the type of special video data 282 to be used is different for each type of special video use effect. Further, the decoding designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4504).

Thereafter, various types of image data necessary to display the image corresponding to the current update timing are grasped (step S4505), and parameter information to be applied to the image data is calculated and derived (step S4506). Then, the special moving image use effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4507). Note that the various image data grasped in step S4505 include the object data stored in the memory module 203, as well as the texture data read out to the texture area 211a.

When the arithmetic processing for the special video use effect is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) includes the various image data grasped in step S4505. Set as a placement target in the coordinate system. Further, parameter information applied to these various image data is set in the drawing list. In addition, special moving image use effect information is set in the drawing list.

Further, if the decoding designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201, the decoding designation information is set in the drawing list, and the special moving image data 282 grasped in step S4503 is stored. Information on the address of the memory module 203 and the address of the area where the special moving image data 282 is developed as special decoded image data 284 in the moving image data area 211b are set. In this case, the VDP 205 reads the special moving image data 282 of the type specified in the drawing list from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b and executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

Specifically, the address of the special moving image data 282 is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S4301), and the special moving image data 282 is converted into special decoded image data from the information specified in the drawing list. The address of the area to be developed as H.284 is grasped (step S4302). Then, the special moving image data 282 is read from the address of the memory module 203 grasped in step S4301, and the special moving image data 282 is decoded. Then, a plurality of pieces of special decoded image data 284 resulting from the decoding are written into each address area of the video data area 211b grasped in step S4302 (step S4303). As a result, all the special decoded image data 284 created from the special moving image data 282 are written in the moving image data area 211b.

Returning to the explanation of the arithmetic processing for the special video usage effect (FIG. 108), if it is the usage period of the special video data 282 (step S4501: YES), the special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter of the work RAM 202 is grasped as the image data to be used at the current update timing (step S4508). The frame counter is used to specify by the display CPU 201 which special decoded image data 284 of the special video data 282 developed in the video data area 211b is to be used. It is a counter. The frame counter is also used when normal moving image data 281 is used, such as in angle display effects. Furthermore, when the usage period of the special moving image data 282 has started, the value of the frame counter is "0", and when the value of the frame counter is "0", the first order in the special moving image data 282 is set. The special decoded image data 284 is determined to be used. Further, when the special decoded image data 284 is recognized as a target to be used in step S4508, the value of the frame counter is incremented by 1, and in the next step S4508, special decoding is performed in the order corresponding to the value of the frame counter after the increment of 1. The image data 284 is recognized as the object to be used.

Here, as already explained, the plurality of special decoded image data 284 created by performing decoding processing on one type of special moving image data 282 are all the same image data, and the special decoded image data 284 is The content of the images displayed using these two methods is the same. On the other hand, when special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data, instead of always using one piece of special decoded image data 284, special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter is used. This makes it possible to use the same processing configuration as when displaying an image using the normal moving image data 281.

Thereafter, other image data necessary for displaying the image corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S4509). In this case, the image data includes predetermined object data to which special decoded image data 284 is applied. Thereafter, the parameter information to be applied to the image data grasped in steps S4508 and S4509 is calculated and derived (step S4510), and the special moving image data use instruction information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4511).

When the calculation process for the special video use effect is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407) includes various images grasped in steps S4508 and S4509. The data is set to be placed in the world coordinate system. Further, parameter information applied to these various image data is set in the drawing list. In addition, special moving image data use instruction information is set in the drawing list.

When the VDP 205 receives a drawing list in which special moving image use effect information or special moving image data use instruction information is set, the VDP 205 executes a setting process for special moving image use effect. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 109, in the setting process for the special video usage effect, if the use instruction information for special video data is set (step S4601: YES), the special decoding grasped in step S4508 is performed. The image data 284 is grasped (step S4602). Further, other image data obtained in step S4509 is obtained (step S4603), and parameter information obtained in step S4510 is obtained (step S4604). Then, the image data obtained in steps S4602 and S4603 is set in the world coordinate system with the parameter information obtained in step S4604 applied (step S4605). As a result, drawing data for displaying an image for a special video effect using the special decoded image data 284 as texture data is finally created, and the image for the special video use effect is displayed on the pattern display device 41. It will be done. Note that the setting process for the special video use effect is performed in step S2603 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) when a drawing list in which special video use effect information or special video data use instruction information is set is received. This is executed in the setting process.

By setting the special moving image data 282 as described above, it becomes possible to store one piece of texture data as moving image data in the memory module 203. As already explained, the texture data stored in advance in the memory module 203 as still image data is read out from the memory module 203 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started, and stored in the VRAM 204 for expansion. It is written to the texture area 211a in the buffer 211. In this case, as the types of texture data increase, the storage capacity required in the texture area 211a increases. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to change the type of texture data read into the texture area 211a every time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load on the VDP 205 will increase.

On the other hand, by storing some of the texture data as special moving image data 282, it is possible to read out some of the texture data to the VRAM 204 as needed while eliminating the need to replace the texture area 211a. becomes. Furthermore, since it is not stored in the memory module 203 as texture data but as special moving image data 282, texture data can be created from the special moving image data 282 using the area 211b for moving image data. becomes possible. Furthermore, when the video data area 211b is also used as an area for using texture data, the special video data 282 is read out to the video data area 211b instead of the texture data itself. There is no need to change the handling of the video data area 211b in the VDP 205 depending on the type of data read to the video data area 211b.

The number of special decoded image data 284 created by executing decoding processing on special moving image data 282 is one type. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary image data from being created.

A plurality of pieces of special decoded image data 284 created by performing decoding processing on one type of special moving image data 282 are all the same image data, and the image displayed using the special decoded image data 284 is The contents are the same. On the other hand, when special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data, instead of always using one piece of special decoded image data 284, special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter is used. This makes it possible to use the same processing configuration as when displaying an image using the normal moving image data 281.

The special moving image data 282 includes only I picture data and does not include differential data such as B picture data or P picture data. This makes it possible to simplify the data structure of the special moving image data 282.

The special moving image data 282 is set as the smallest unit data amount that can be set as moving image data. This makes it possible to keep the data capacity of the special video data 282 small.

<Another form of special video production>
- Not only the texture data but also the object data may be read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. In this case, since there is no need to read the object data to the VRAM 204 at appropriate timings, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the VDP 205 at each drawing data creation timing.

- Although a plurality of types of image data are created by executing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282, a configuration may be adopted in which only one type or a part of the types is used. Even in this case, texture data can be treated as moving image data.

- A configuration may be adopted in which only one piece of image data is created by executing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282. In this case, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing image data created by performing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282.

- The special moving image data 282 may have a configuration in which a plurality of identical I picture data are set, and when decoding processing is performed on the special moving image data 282, image data for the number of I picture data is created. .

- A plurality of image data of the same type are created by executing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282, but only one of the image data may be used. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which only one piece of image data among a plurality of pieces of image data created by executing the decoding process is stored and held in the video data area 211b, and the rest are deleted.

- A separate storage area is provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, and all or part of the image data created in the video data area 211b is stored in the separate storage area by decoding the special video data 282. It may also be configured to be transferred. In this case, even after using the image data, it is possible to store it in a separate storage area, and the image data can be read from the separate storage area when used next time, so that the special moving image data 282 There is no need to perform decoding processing again.

- Although the special moving image data 282 has difference data such as B picture data and P picture data, it may be configured such that these difference data are set so that the difference is "0". Even in this case, it is possible to create a plurality of pieces of special decoded image data 284 of the same type.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiments described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. Incidentally, the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

(1) The processing configuration of the sound and light side MPU 62, the processing configuration of the display CPU 72, and the processing configuration of the VDP 76 in the first embodiment are changed to a configuration that displays a 3D image on the symbol display device 41 as in the second embodiment. May be applied to Furthermore, the processing configuration of the sound-light side MPU 62, the processing configuration of the display CPU 201, and the processing configuration of the VDP 205 in the second embodiment are changed to a configuration for displaying 2D images on the symbol display device 41 as in the first embodiment. May be applied.

(2) In the second embodiment, the camera (viewpoint) is set individually for each image data placed in the world coordinate system. A configuration may also be adopted in which a single camera is commonly set for image data.

(3) In the second embodiment described above, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is projected in units of background image, effect image, and pattern image, but is summarized in units of background image and effect image. It may be possible to have a configuration in which the images are projected together, a configuration in which the performance images and symbol images are projected together, or a configuration in which all of the effect images and pattern images are projected together.

(4) In the second embodiment, when performing the color information setting process (step S2609), the configuration may be such that the color information is set, such as pasting a texture only on the surface on which the image is projected. In this case, the processing load of rendering can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of setting color information such as texture mapping before projection, a configuration may be adopted in which color information such as texture mapping is set after projection. In this case, upon projection, coordinate information of each pixel constituting the projection plane may be stored, and color information such as texture mapping may be set based on the coordinate information.

(5) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the audio emission control device 60 based on the command sent from the main control device 50, the display control device 90 is controlled based on the command sent from the main control device 50. A configuration may be adopted in which the device 90 controls the audio emission control device 60. Further, instead of the configuration in which the audio emission control device 60 and the display control device 90 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be may be integrated into the main control device 50, or both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 50. Furthermore, the structure of the commands sent from the main control device 50 to the audio emission control device 60 and the structure of the commands sent from the audio emission control device 60 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

(6) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is established on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body, which is supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage section and a retrieval device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are retrieved by the retrieval device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, structures corresponding to each of the above embodiments are indicated in parentheses as appropriate, but the present invention is not limited to the specific structures shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. Display means (design display device 41) having a display section (liquid crystal display section 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
Equipped with
The display storage means stores special moving image data (special moving image data 282), which is created by performing a decoding process and has one type of image data to be used by the display control means. A gaming machine characterized by being stored in a memory.

According to feature A1, by providing special moving image data in which only one type of image data is subjected to decoding processing and is to be used by the display control means, one type of image data after decoding is used as a special moving image data. It becomes possible to handle it as image data. This makes it possible to use one type of image data without increasing the capacity of image data similar to the one type of image data after decoding.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the special moving image data is moving image data for which one type of image data is created by executing the decoding process.

According to feature A2, when special moving image data is decoded, one type of image data is created instead of multiple types of image data, so unnecessary image data is created. It is possible to achieve the above-mentioned effects while preventing the damage from occurring.

Feature A3. The game according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the special moving image data is data in which a plurality of special image data (still image data 284) having the same content are created by executing the decoding process. Machine.

According to feature A3, when decoding processing is performed on special video data, multiple pieces of special image data with the same content are created. , it becomes possible to use special image data with the same content at multiple image update timings.

Feature A4. The display control means uses the special image data in a predetermined order created from the special moving image data when the image update timing is a predetermined update timing, and uses the special image data in a predetermined order created from the special moving image data, and The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein when the update timing is the update timing, the special image data in the next order with respect to the predetermined order is used.

According to feature A4, a plurality of pieces of special image data having the same content are created by executing decoding processing on the special moving image data, and these pieces of special image data are used in a predetermined order. As a result, special image data created by performing decoding processing on special video data can be treated as image data created by performing decoding processing on video data other than special video data. It is possible to handle them in the same way.

Feature A5. Video data other than the special video data includes reference data (I picture data) that serves as a reference when creating the image data by performing the decoding process on the video data, and the reference data. has difference data (B picture data, P picture data) that can be applied to create image data different from the image data created by the reference data,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the special moving image data includes the reference data and does not include the difference data.

According to feature A5, since the special moving image data has reference data and does not have difference data, the data structure of the special moving image data is such that only one type of image data is created when decoding processing is executed. It becomes possible to make it simple. Furthermore, it is possible to keep the data capacity of special moving image data small.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the special moving image data is set as a minimum unit data amount that can be set as moving image data.

According to feature A6, it is possible to keep the data volume of special moving image data small.

Feature A7. The display control means includes a predetermined process execution means (steps in the VDP 205) that displays an image corresponding to the predetermined image data by executing a predetermined process on the predetermined image data (texture data) stored in the display storage means. function to execute the process of S2609),
When displaying an image corresponding to special image data created by performing the decoding process on the special video data, the predetermined process is executed on the special image data by the predetermined process execution means. and
When the image data is used in the display control means, the image data is read from the display storage means to the readout storage means (VRAM 204),
The reading storage means includes a first reading area (texture area 211a) from which the predetermined image data is read, and a second reading area (moving image data area 211b) from which the special moving image data is read. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6.

According to feature A7, when image data is used in the display control means, the image data is not used directly from the display storage means, but is used after being read out to the readout storage means. Therefore, by reading the image data into the reading storage means in advance, when the image data is used in the display control means, it becomes possible to use the image data immediately. Furthermore, the readout storage means is provided with a first readout area from which predetermined image data is read out and a second readout area from which special moving image data is readout, so that the readout storage means can be read out according to each purpose. The area is set, and when the image data is used in the display control means, it becomes possible to specify the area according to the type of the image data.

In this case, even though only one type of special image data is to be used in the display control means, the display control means is provided with the configuration of feature A1, and the special image data is used for display as special moving image data instead of as predetermined image data. stored in the storage means. As a result, the special image data is read out to the second readout area instead of the first readout area, so there is no need to reserve an area for using the special image data in the first readout area. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the first read area.

Feature A8. A plurality of types of the predetermined image data are stored in the display storage means,
The gaming machine is
a first readout execution unit (a function for executing the process of step S2402 in the display CPU 201) that reads out all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data into the first readout area when a predetermined readout timing comes;
When image data corresponding to the special moving image data is stored in the second reading area in a situation where image data corresponding to moving image data other than the special moving image data is stored in the second reading area, a second reading execution means (a function of executing decoding processing in the VDP 205) that overwrites the image data already stored in the second reading area;
The gaming machine according to feature A7, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A8, since all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data are read out to the first readout area, there is no need to read out the predetermined image data as needed. On the other hand, moving image data is read out into the second reading area as needed, and when new moving image data is read out, the second reading area is overwritten. This makes it possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the second read area. In this case, even though only one type of special image data is to be used in the display control means, the display control means is provided with the configuration of feature A1, and the special image data is used for display as special moving image data instead of as predetermined image data. stored in the storage means. As a result, the special image data is read out to the second readout area instead of the first readout area, so there is no need to reserve an area for using the special image data in the first readout area. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the first read area.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the first reading execution means reads all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data into the first reading area when supply of operating power is started.

According to feature A9, it is possible to quickly create a state in which all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data are read out to the first readout area.

Feature A10. According to any one of features A1 to A9, the special image data created by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data is texture data used for displaying a three-dimensional image. The game machine described.

According to feature A10, when using texture data, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features A1 to A10, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. Display means (design display device 41) having a display section (liquid crystal display section 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Data that determines the display mode of the individual images at each image update timing when displaying a specific variation on the individual images (symbols displayed in symbol rows Z1 to Z3) over a predetermined period on the display unit. Information storage means (memory module) that stores in advance the mode determination information (execution target table T10 for acceleration period, execution target table T11 for first high speed period, execution target table T12 for first low speed period) in which 74),
The display control means includes:
Target determining means (display CPU 72 function of executing the processing of step S908 and step S1011);
an application execution unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S1012 to S1014 in the display CPU 72) that performs the specific variation display by applying the mode determination information according to the content determined by the target determination unit;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, the aspect determining information is commonly applied to multiple types of individual images. As a result, it becomes possible to use the form determining information in common for various situations in which specific variation display is executed, and it becomes possible to reduce the number of form determining information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storing the mode determination information in the information storage means.

Feature B2. When the specific variable display is newly started, the display is controlled so that the individual image of the type to be displayed at the start starts the variable display according to a predetermined variation start mode, and the display is controlled to be displayed at the start. The type of the individual image to be displayed has a variable configuration,
As the mode determining information, at least information for causing the individual image to display a variation according to the predetermined variation start mode is set;
The target determining means determines the type of the individual image to which the mode determining information is applied in the plurality of types of the individual images and the plurality of types of the individual images, depending on the type of the individual image displayed at the start of the specific variation display. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that at least one of the order in which the mode determining information is applied in the individual images is determined.

According to feature B2, by making the mode of the variable display constant at the start of the specific variable display in a predetermined variation start mode, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the specific variable display has started. . In addition, even if the form of the variable display at the start of the specific variable display is fixed in this way, if the type of individual image displayed at the start may change, the specific variable display may be started. It becomes possible to diversify the aspects of.

In this configuration, the mode determination information is set with information for displaying the individual images in a predetermined variation start mode at the start of the specific variation display, and is also displayed at the start of the specific variation display. At least one of the type of individual image and the order of the individual images to which the aspect determination information is applied is determined in a manner corresponding to the type of individual image. As a result, even if the configuration is such that the type of individual image displayed at the start of the specific variation display can change, it is possible to commonly use the mode determining information for performing the specific variation display.

Feature B3. The individual image of a type corresponding to the type of the individual image that was displayed when the specific variation display ended last time is displayed at the start of the specific variation display in the next execution time. The gaming machine described in feature B2.

According to feature B3, since the type of individual image corresponding to the type of individual image that was displayed when the specific variation display ended last time is displayed at the start of the specific variation display in the next execution time, the specific variation display When the display is repeatedly executed, it is possible to provide continuity to each execution of the specific variable display. In this case, at the start of the specific variation display, the type of individual image for which the variation display is started will be different depending on the predetermined variation start mode, but by having the configuration of feature B2 above, the specific Even in a configuration where the type of individual image displayed at the start of the variable display can change, it is possible to commonly use the information for determining the mode for performing the specific variable display.

Feature B4. In the mode determination information, mode information (task content) for determining the mode of the specific variation display is set in chronological order,
The target determining means determines the type of the individual image to which each of the aspect information is applied, and the type of the individual image to which the specific variable display is executed changes as the specific variable display progresses. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that the game machine is determined in accordance with the above.

According to feature B4, even if the type of individual image to be executed for specific variation display is configured to change as the specific variation display progresses, the aspect information set in time series in the aspect determination information is applied. The types of individual images to be processed are determined. This makes it possible to commonly use the aspect determination information even in a configuration in which the type of individual image to be subjected to specific variation display changes as the specific variation display progresses.

Feature B5. Any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that the mode determining information is set as information corresponding to a period longer than the longest duration assumed as a situation in which the mode determining information is used. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature B5, the mode determining information can be used in common regardless of the duration of various situations in which the mode determining information is used.

Feature B6. The duration of the situation in which the aspect determining information is used is a predetermined timing from one switching timing to the next switching timing of the individual image type to which the aspect determining information is applied. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the gaming machine is set so that the use of the mode determining information ends.

In the case of a configuration in which the mode determination information is set corresponding to the duration of various situations in which the mode determination information is used, the mode determination is performed in the middle of the chronological information set in the mode determination information. It is assumed that the use of the control information has come to an end, and the next control information will be used. In this case, according to feature B6, the end timing of the use of the aspect determining information is determined in advance from the switching timing of one type of individual image to which the aspect determining information is applied to the next switching timing. The timing is perfect. This makes it possible to keep the situation in which the use of the next control information is started constant, thereby facilitating the design of the control information.

Note that "a predetermined timing from one switching timing to the next switching timing of the type of individual image to which the relevant aspect determining information is applied" includes "the applicable target of the applicable aspect determining information." It also includes the timing at which the type of the individual image is switched.

Feature B7. The mode determining information is
a mode information group (task content) in which mode information for determining the mode of the specific variation display is set in chronological order;
a target information group (display pattern adjustment area) in which a plurality of target information to which information about the type of the individual image to which the aspect information is applied is set in correspondence with the aspect information;
Equipped with
A feature characterized in that the target determining means sets information on the type of the individual image for each of the target information included in the target information group when starting to use the mode determining information. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B6.

According to feature B7, since a mode information group and a target information group are set in the mode determination information, individual targets to which mode information is applied at each update timing can be determined simply by referring to the mode determination information. It becomes possible to understand the type of image. In this case, when starting to use the aspect determining information, information on the type of individual image is set for each piece of target information included in the target information group of the aspect determining information. Thereby, there is no need to perform processing for adjusting the type of individual image to be applied during the execution of the specific variation display, so it is possible to simplify the processing configuration during the execution of the specific variation display.

Feature B8. The specific variable display is configured to be performed in each of a plurality of variable display areas,
The game according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the mode determining information is commonly used as information for controlling the specific variable display in each of the plurality of variable display areas. Machine.

According to feature B8, since the aspect determining information is commonly used for the specific variable display in each of the plurality of variable display areas, it is possible to suppress the number of aspect determining information.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features B1 to B8, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Display means (design display device 41) having a display section (liquid crystal display section 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means includes a simultaneous display control means (in the display CPU 72 Equipped with a function to execute arithmetic processing for character loops and arithmetic processing for background loops, VDP76),
The gaming machine includes first mode determining information (character movement table 123) in which first mode information for determining the display mode of the first type image is set in chronological order, and a display mode of the second type image. and information storage means (memory module 74) for storing in advance second mode determining information (background table 124) in which second mode information for determining the second mode is set in chronological order,
When simultaneously displaying the first type image and the second type image on the display section, the simultaneous display control means determines a display mode of the first type image according to the first mode determination information, and A gaming machine characterized in that a display mode of the second type image is determined according to second mode determination information.

According to feature C1, in a configuration in which a first type image and a second type image are displayed simultaneously, the mode determination information for determining the display mode of the first type image and the second type image is one mode. Rather than being provided as determining information, first aspect determining information for determining the display aspect of the first type image and second aspect determining information for determining the display aspect of the second type image are provided. are provided separately. As a result, in a situation where one of the first type image and the second type image is displayed in a static state, the other image is displayed in a variable manner, and then the image on the side that is displayed in a static state changes from its statically displayed state. Even in the case of restarting the display, it is possible to independently control the display of each type of image using each of the first aspect determining information and the second aspect determining information. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably control a display effect in which both the first type image and the second type image are displayed simultaneously.

Feature C2. The first aspect determining information is
a first reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of first reference information are set, the reference target of which is sequentially updated by the simultaneous display control means each time the first type image is updated;
First aspect information for determining the display aspect of the first type image at each update timing of the first type image is a first aspect information group (of a task) set in correspondence with each of the first reference information. content) and
Equipped with
The second aspect determining information is
a second reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of second reference information are set, in which a reference target by the simultaneous display control means is sequentially updated each time the second type image is updated;
Second mode information for determining the display mode of the second type image at each update timing of the second type image is a second mode information group (of a task) set corresponding to each of the second reference information. content) and
The gaming machine according to feature C1, comprising:

According to feature C2, a dedicated first reference information group is set for the first mode determination information, and a dedicated second reference information group is set for the second mode determination information. As a result, it is possible to continue updating the reference information that is the reference target of the other while not using one of the first aspect determination information and the second aspect determination information, or to update the reference information that is the reference target of the other. It becomes possible to hold the information in predetermined reference information.

Feature C3. The first mode determining information is information in which the first mode information for displaying the first type image in a first variation mode is set in chronological order,
The information storage means stores third mode determining information (character stop table 122) in which information for displaying the first type image in a variation mode different from the first variation mode is set in chronological order. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the gaming machine stores in advance.

According to feature C3, even when displaying the first type image, different aspect determination information is provided corresponding to different contents of the variation aspect. As a result, when switching between a situation in which a first type image is displayed in a first variation mode and a situation in which a first type image is displayed in a variation mode different from the first variation mode, the mode to be used is determined. It is only necessary to switch the usage information between the first mode determining information and the third mode determining information, and it is possible to suitably switch between these variable modes.

Feature C4. The simultaneous display control means
A first simultaneous display control means (step S1102 to step S1104, step S1109 to step S1113 and step (a function to execute the processing from S1202 to S1206);
A second simultaneous display control means (steps S1105 to S1113 in the display CPU 72 and A function to execute the processing of steps S1207 to S1208);
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized by comprising:

According to feature C4, there are a situation in which both the first type image and the second type image are displayed in a variable manner, and a situation in which one of the first type image and the second type image is displayed in a variable manner and the other is displayed in a static manner. By generating this, it becomes possible to diversify the display mode even in a situation where both the first type image and the second type image are displayed. In this case, since the configuration of feature C1 is provided and the first aspect determining information and the second aspect determining information are provided separately, when switching the display statuses, the first aspect determining information and the second aspect determining information are provided separately. It is only necessary to switch the usage status of the second mode determining information, and it is possible to suitably switch these display statuses.

Feature C5. The first simultaneous display control means controls the display unit so that the first type of image is displayed in a first variation mode, and the second type of image is displayed in a second variation mode;
The second simultaneous display control means controls the display unit so that the first type image is displayed in a variation mode different from the first variation mode, and the second type image is displayed in a stopped state;
The first mode determining information is information in which the first mode information for displaying the first type image in the first variation mode is set in chronological order,
The information storage means stores in advance third mode determining information (character stop table 122) in which information for displaying the first type image in the different variation modes is set in chronological order. The gaming machine according to feature C4.

According to feature C5, a situation in which the first type image is displayed in a variable manner according to the first variation mode and the second type image is displayed in a variable manner according to the second variation mode is different from the first type image in the first variation mode. Due to the occurrence of a situation in which the second type image is displayed in a variable manner depending on the variation mode and the second type image is stopped and displayed, the display mode is diversified even in a situation where both the first type image and the second type image are displayed. It becomes possible to aim for. In this case, information for determining the first aspect and information for determining the third aspect are individually provided for the first type image, and information for determining the second aspect is individually provided for the second type image. ing. As a result, when switching between these display situations, the target of use for the first type image is switched between the first aspect determination information and the third aspect determination information, and the second aspect determination information is used for the second type image. It is only necessary to switch between updating and fixing the information to be used in the usage information. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably switch between these display situations.

Feature C6. The information for determining the first mode is set in chronological order as information necessary for causing the first type image to be displayed in a series of first variation modes for one round;
The simultaneous display control means is capable of repeatedly displaying the series of first variation modes using the first type images by repeatedly using the first mode determination information. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C5.

According to feature C6, by repeatedly using the first mode determining information, it is possible to repeatedly display a series of first variation modes on the first type image. If the information for displaying the first type image in a variable manner and the information for displaying the second type image in a variable manner are integrated and set as one aspect determining information, a series of first type images in the first type image When one round of display in a variable mode ends and the next round starts, unless the display content is such that one round of display starts also in the second type image, the first type image has no display content. It becomes necessary to set more information than one round for displaying one variation mode. In this case, information for more than one round is wasted. On the other hand, since the configuration of feature C1 is provided and the first aspect determination information and the second aspect determination information are provided separately, there is no need to set such useless information.

Feature C7. The information for determining the second mode is set in chronological order as information necessary for causing the second type image to display one cycle of a series of second variation modes;
The simultaneous display control means is capable of repeatedly displaying the series of second variation modes using the second type images by repeatedly using the second mode determination information,
The number of update timings of the first type image necessary for displaying the first type image in the first variation mode for one round, and the number of update timings for the first type image necessary to display the first type image in the second variation mode once The gaming machine according to feature C6, characterized in that the number of update timings of the second type image required to perform the game every round is different from that of the second type image.

According to feature C7, since the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information are provided separately, only information corresponding to one round of each of the first variation mode and the second variation mode is provided. can be set in each aspect determination information, and there is no need to set useless information.

Feature C8. The simultaneous display control means
When starting the display of the first type image according to the first aspect determination information, start information is set in the start information storage means (linkage flag 125), and the first type image according to the first aspect determination information is set. means for erasing the start information from the start information storage means when the display of the first type image is ended (a function for executing the processing of step S1103 and step S1107 in the display CPU 72);
When the start information is set in the start information storage means, means for displaying the second type image according to the second aspect determining information (an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 in the display CPU 72) function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, characterized by comprising:

According to feature C8, start information is set when the display of the first type image according to the first mode determination information is started, and when the display is ended, the start information is erased, and the start information is set, the second type image is displayed according to the second mode determination information, so as long as the information on the timing to start using the first mode determination information is prepared in advance. , it becomes possible to use the second aspect determining information in accordance with the use of the first aspect determining information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information on the usage start timing in a configuration in which the first aspect determination information and the second aspect determination information are provided separately.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features C1 to C8, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Display means (design display device 41) having a display section (liquid crystal display section 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Creating drawing data based on setting the image data in the setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means. display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit based on the display unit;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means includes:
A first setting range control means (display CPU 72 A function to execute the processing of steps S1307 to S1309 in VDP76);
a second setting range control means for displaying a second setting range image by setting a range to be set in the setting storage means in the specific image data to a second setting range different from the first setting range; (Function to execute the processing of steps S1311 to S1313 in the display CPU 72, VDP 76);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1, by changing the range set in the setting storage means between the first setting range and the second setting range while using the same specific image data, the first setting range image and the second setting range can be changed. It becomes possible to display each of the two setting range images. This makes it possible to change the content of the displayed image even in a situation where there are only a few types of image data.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the first setting range and the second setting range partially overlap.

According to feature D2, since the first setting range and the second setting range partially overlap, the first setting range image and the second setting range image can be changed while using the same specific image data. It becomes possible to cause slight changes in the image.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the second setting range image is displayed at the update timing of the next image after the first setting range image is displayed.

According to feature D3, by displaying the second setting range image at the update timing of the next image after the first setting range image is displayed, the first setting range image and the second setting range image are combined into a series of images. It becomes possible to use it as

Feature D4. The first setting range image and the second setting range image both include a predetermined individual image (group display character G11) as a display target, and the predetermined individual image is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction. The first setting range image and the second setting range image are displayed on the screen,
The display position of the predetermined individual image included in the second setting range image with respect to the display position of the predetermined individual image included in the first setting range image is such that the predetermined individual image has moved in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the first setting range and the second setting range are set to correspond to a display position.

According to feature D4, it is possible to display an image in which a predetermined individual image is displayed moving in a predetermined direction using a small number of image data.

Feature D5. The first setting range image and the second setting range image are images that display a large number of the predetermined individual images during a performance period in which a large number of the predetermined individual images are displayed. Game machine.

According to feature D5, since the first setting range image and the second setting range image are displayed using the same specific image data in a situation where a large number of predetermined individual images are displayed, the same specific image data is used. It becomes difficult to notice what you are doing.

Feature D6. The data size of the specific image data is set in the setting storage means to be larger than the data size of an area to be displayed on the display unit,
Any of the features D1 to D5, wherein the first setting range and the second setting range correspond to a range that fills the entire area to be displayed on the display unit in the setting storage means. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature D6, it is possible to make it less noticeable that the first setting range image and the second setting range image are displayed using the same specific image data.

Feature D7. According to any one of features D1 to D6, the specific image data is image data created by performing a decoding process on moving image data stored in the display storage means. The game machine described.

Even if the number of image data created by performing decoding processing on moving image data is small with respect to the image update timing, it is possible to use the same specific image data with the configuration of feature D1 above. Since it is possible to display different images such as the first setting range image and the second setting range image using this function, it is possible to prevent the same image from being displayed between multiple update timings. .

Feature D8. The plurality of image data created by performing the decoding process on the moving image data is image data for displaying predetermined individual images moving in a predetermined direction, including the specific image data. and
Feature D7 is characterized in that the first setting range control means and the second setting range control means apply the first setting range and the second setting range to each of the plurality of image data. The game machine described.

According to feature D8, it is possible to deal with a situation where the number of image data created by executing decoding processing on moving image data is small with respect to the image update timing while using the same processing configuration. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature D9. The plurality of image data created by performing the decoding process on the moving image data is image data for displaying predetermined individual images moving in a predetermined direction, including the specific image data. and
the second setting range image is displayed at the update timing of the next image after the first setting range image is displayed;
The second display position of the predetermined individual image included in the second setting range image with respect to the first display position of the predetermined individual image included in the first setting range image is such that the predetermined individual image is in the predetermined position. The first setting range and the second setting range are set to correspond to the display position moved in the direction,
In the image to be displayed next to the second setting range image using next-use image data to be used after the specific image data among the plurality of image data, the display position of the predetermined individual image is the same or approximately the same amount of movement as the movement amount from the first display position to the second display position with respect to the display position of the predetermined individual image in the second setting range image, and the predetermined individual image The gaming machine according to feature D7 or D8, wherein the display position is moved in the predetermined direction.

According to feature D9, even when displaying the first setting range image and the second setting range image from the same specific image data, the amount of movement of a predetermined individual image in a predetermined direction between multiple update timings is calculated. It becomes possible to keep it constant.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features D1 to D9, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Display means (design display device 41) having a display section (liquid crystal display section 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means includes:
When the predetermined individual image (validity period image G22) is caused to display changes in a predetermined manner, the first display contents (size position information of the band image G24 and position information of the blinking image G25) of the predetermined individual image at each update timing are , a first determining means (steps in the display CPU 72) that determines the first predetermined mode information that determines the first display content using the first predetermined mode determining information (band display table 145) set in chronological order. a function of executing the processes of S1606, S1615 and S1616);
When the predetermined individual image is caused to display a change according to the predetermined mode, the second display content (the type of image data for displaying the blinking image G25) of the predetermined individual image at each update timing is set according to the first predetermined mode. a second determining means (a function of executing the processing of step S1608 and step S1613 in the display CPU 72) that determines without using the determining information;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, when causing a predetermined individual image to be displayed in a changed manner in a predetermined manner, it is possible to independently control the first display content and the second display content of the predetermined individual image. As a result, when diversifying the display mode of change display according to a predetermined mode in a predetermined individual image, it becomes possible to control the first display content and the second display content independently and individually. It becomes easier.

Feature E2. The second determining means determines a second display content of the predetermined individual image at each update timing in a case where the predetermined individual image is changed to be displayed in the predetermined manner, in a second predetermined manner that determines the second display content. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that the information is determined using second predetermined mode determining information (blinking display table 146) set in chronological order.

According to feature E2, the first predetermined mode determining information that determines the first display content and the second predetermined mode determining information that determines the second display content are separately provided, so that each predetermined mode is It becomes possible to control the first display content and the second display content independently and individually while making it possible to execute display control according to the usage information.

Feature E3. The first predetermined mode determining information is:
A first predetermined reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of first predetermined reference information are set, in which a reference target by the first determining means is sequentially updated each time the first display content of the predetermined individual image is updated. and,
a first predetermined manner in which the first predetermined aspect information for determining the first display content of the predetermined individual image at each update timing of the first display content is set to correspond to each of the first predetermined reference information; Aspect information group (size information and tip position information),
Equipped with
The second predetermined mode determining information is:
a second predetermined reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of second predetermined reference information are set, in which a reference target by the second determining means is sequentially updated each time the second display content of the predetermined individual image is updated; and,
a second predetermined mode in which the second predetermined aspect information for determining the second display content of the predetermined individual image at each update timing of the second display content is set to correspond to each of the second predetermined reference information; Aspect information group (image data information),
The gaming machine according to feature E2, comprising:

According to feature E3, a dedicated first predetermined reference information group is set for the first predetermined mode determination information, and a dedicated second predetermined reference information group is set for the second predetermined mode determination information. There is. This makes it easier to control the update cycle of the first display content and the update cycle of the second display content individually and independently.

Feature E4. A means for changing the update cycle of one of the first display content and the second display content independently of the update cycle of the other (a function of executing the processing of step S1610 and step S1612 in the display CPU 72) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3.

According to feature E4, the update cycle of one of the first display content and the second display content is changed independently from the update cycle of the other, thereby changing the display mode of the change display in the predetermined mode in the predetermined individual image. It becomes possible to suitably realize diversification.

Feature E5. The display control means creates drawing data by setting image data in the setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and sends an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means. displaying an image on the display unit based on the output;
The predetermined individual image is displayed using first predetermined individual image data (band display image data 142) and second predetermined individual image data (light-on image data 143, light-off image data 144),
The first display content corresponds to the display content of an image displayed using the first predetermined individual image data in the predetermined individual image,
The second display content corresponds to the display content of an image displayed using the second predetermined individual image data in the predetermined individual image,
The first predetermined mode determining information includes, when setting the second predetermined individual image data in the setting storage means, the second predetermined individual image data is set in association with the first predetermined individual image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein information (tip position information) is set.

According to feature E5, even if the first display content and the second display content are independently controllable, the second predetermined individual image data may be displayed in a manner associated with the first predetermined individual image data. It becomes possible to easily perform settings in the setting storage means.

Feature E6. One of the first display content and the second display content is at least one of the size, shape, and color of the predetermined individual image;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the other of the first display content and the second display content is a type of image data for displaying the predetermined individual image.

According to feature E6, at least one of the size, shape, and color of the predetermined individual image and the type of image data for displaying the predetermined individual image can be independently and individually controlled.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features E1 to E6, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. Display means (design display device 41) having a display section (liquid crystal display section 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 203) that stores image data in advance;
a setting storage means (VRAM 204) in which the image data is set;
deriving means (display CPU 201) for deriving parameter information that determines a setting mode when setting the image data in the setting storage means;
Creating drawing data based on setting the image data in the setting storage means according to the parameter information derived by the deriving means, and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means. display control means (VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit based on the
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means displays predetermined types of image data (backmost image data 241, first background individual image image data 242, second background individual image image data 243, performance character image data 244). After displaying a predetermined type of image over a period on the front side based on setting in the setting storage means, displaying the predetermined type image on the rear side based on setting the predetermined type image data in the setting storage means. Equipped with a predetermined type control means (a function for executing setting processing for separate storage display in the VDP 205) that prevents it from being performed for a period of time,
Parameter information derived by the deriving means to be applied to the predetermined type of image data in the earlier period is stored in a predetermined storage area of a predetermined storage means (work RAM 202), and the predetermined storage area is in the later period. A gaming machine characterized in that the area is held as an area for storing parameter information of the predetermined type of image data.

According to feature F1, even if the display of a predetermined type of image using predetermined type of image data is interrupted, the predetermined storage area in which parameter information to be applied to the predetermined type of image data is stored is By being held as an area for storing the parameter information of the predetermined type of image data, a new process is added to secure the predetermined storage area when restarting the display of the predetermined type of image using the predetermined type of image data. There is no need to execute it. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load when restarting the display of a predetermined type of image using predetermined type of image data.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the deriving means updates the parameter information to be applied to the predetermined type of image data even in the latter period.

According to feature F2, the parameter information to be applied to the predetermined type of image data is updated even in the later period, so that the display of the predetermined type of image using the predetermined type of image data is completed when the later period ends. When restarting, the predetermined type is changed from the state when the content of the predetermined type image continues to change for the subsequent period according to the display pattern determined in chronological order with respect to the display state immediately before the start of the subsequent period. It becomes possible to resume displaying a predetermined type of image using image data.

Feature F3. The predetermined type control means is configured to control pre-created data (first separate saved image data 245, second separate saved image data 247) created based on setting the predetermined type image data in the setting storage means during the previous period. ) is used to create the drawing data in the latter period.

According to feature F3, it is possible to display a predetermined type of image even in the later period.

Feature F4. The predetermined type control means is configured to control the predetermined type based on setting the pre-created data and additional image data (image data 246 for additional individual images, effect image data 248) in the setting storage means in the latter period. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein drawing data is created.

According to feature F4, since additional image data is added as image data to be used in the later period, it is possible to make the display content more flashy. In addition, in the later period, pre-created data is used instead of the predetermined type of image data as the image data for displaying the predetermined type of image, so additional image data is added as the image data to be used. However, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature F5. The later period occurs when a predetermined start opportunity occurs in the earlier period,
The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, wherein the predetermined type control means creates the pre-created data before a situation where the predetermined start opportunity can occur in the preceding period.

According to feature F5, the pre-created data is created before a situation where the predetermined start trigger can occur, so compared to a configuration in which the pre-created data is created at the timing when the predetermined start trigger occurs, the pre-defined start trigger is It becomes possible to reduce the processing load at the timing when this occurs.

Feature F6. The predetermined type control means continues when the pre-created data is created before a situation where the predetermined start trigger can occur in the previous period but the predetermined start trigger does not occur by a branch timing. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the pre-created data is newly created in the previous period.

According to feature F6, since the pre-created data is newly created as needed, it is possible to use the pre-created data that was created at a timing closer to the timing when the pre-created data is actually used. Become.

Feature F7. Any one of features F3 to F6, characterized in that the predetermined type control means creates a plurality of types of the pre-created data in the previous period so that the content of the image displayed according to the pre-generated data is different. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature F7, by creating a plurality of types of pre-created data, it is possible to diversify the situations in which images are displayed using the pre-created data.

Feature F8. At least first pre-created data (second separate saved image data 247) and second pre-created data (first separate saved image data 245) are created as the pre-created data,
As the rear period, there is a first rear period and a second rear period that may occur after the first rear period,
The predetermined type control means includes:
a first pre-creation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3912 in the VDP 205) that creates the drawing data using the first pre-generated data in the first subsequent period;
a second pre-creation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3906 to S3909 in the VDP 205) that creates the drawing data using the second pre-created data in the second subsequent period;
The gaming machine according to feature F7, comprising:

According to feature F8, it is possible to use pre-created data suitable for each posterior period.

Feature F9. The first subsequent period occurs when a predetermined start opportunity occurs in the previous period,
The first pre-created data and the second pre-created data are created before a situation in which the predetermined start trigger can occur in the previous period,
As described in feature F8, the second pre-creation means newly creates the second pre-created data in the continued previous period if the predetermined start trigger does not occur in the previous period. gaming machines.

According to feature F9, if the first subsequent period does not occur, the second pre-created data is newly created before the second subsequent period occurs, so the second pre-created data is not actually used. It becomes possible to use the second pre-created data created at a timing closer to the timing to be used.

Feature F10. The display control means includes:
Arranging means for arranging object data that is three-dimensional information as the image data in a virtual three-dimensional space in the setting storage means (a function that executes the processing of steps S2602 to S2604 in the VDP 205);
a viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of steps S2605 to S2606 in the VDP 205);
Drawing setting means (processing of steps S2607 to S2612 in the VDP 205) that projects the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and creates the drawing data based on the data projected onto the projection plane. function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, characterized by comprising:

According to feature F10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features F1 to F10, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

Each of the inventions of the above feature group A to feature F group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that can suitably perform display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Comprising a first control means (main side MPU52) and a second control means (sound/light side MPU62, display CPU72, VDP76),
The first control means includes:
A grant determination means (a function for executing special figure special electric control processing in the main side MPU 52) that determines whether or not to grant a benefit to a player;
Information transmitting means (a function of executing the special figure special electric control process in the main side MPU 52) for transmitting predetermined correspondence information (variation command and type command) corresponding to the result of the provision determination;
Equipped with
The second control means
Content determining means (a function of executing the processing of step S404 and steps S406 to S408 in the sound and light side MPU 62) for determining the performance content of the unit performance (game performance) corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information;
performance execution control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) that controls the performance execution means (symbol display device 41) so that the unit performance corresponding to the performance content determined by the content determination means is executed;
Equipped with
The performance contents that can be determined by the content determining means based on the predetermined correspondence information of the same type include a first performance content whose duration period corresponds to a first duration period, and a first performance content whose duration period corresponds to a second duration period. A game machine characterized in that the game machine includes at least a second performance content.

According to feature G1, production contents with different durations of production can be selected from the same type of predetermined corresponding information, thereby making it possible to diversify the production contents, and processing for determining the production contents. It becomes possible to increase the degree of freedom in configuration.

Feature G2. Feature G1 is characterized in that the performance execution control means ends the unit performance when a duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information has elapsed, regardless of which performance content is determined by the content determination means. The game machine described.

According to feature G2, no matter which production content is determined, the unit production ends when the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information has elapsed, so the duration of production differs from the same type of predetermined correspondence information. Even if the content of the performance can be selected, the duration of the unit performance can be set to the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information.

Feature G3. The first control means includes a duration determining means (a function of executing special figure special electric control processing in the main side MPU 52) for determining the duration of the unit performance,
The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the predetermined correspondence information includes information that allows the second control means to specify the duration determined by the duration determination means.

According to feature G3, by determining the duration of the unit performance in the first control means, even if the execution control of the unit performance is performed in the second control means, the second control means can control the execution of the unit performance. It becomes possible for the first control means to grasp the duration of the unit performance without having to transmit information to the first control means. In this case, by having the configuration of feature G2 above, even if the configuration is such that production contents with different durations of production can be selected from the same type of predetermined corresponding information, the duration of the unit production can be changed to the first one. It becomes possible to set the duration determined by one control means.

Feature G4. The performance content determined by the content determining means is characterized in that the duration corresponding to the performance content is less than or equal to the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information that triggered the determination of the performance content. The gaming machine according to feature G2 or G3.

According to feature G4, it is possible to prevent an event in which the unit performance is ended due to the elapse of the duration of the unit performance during execution of the performance content determined by the content determining means.

Feature G5. The performance execution control means causes the performance execution means to perform, as the unit performance, a performance in which, after a fluctuating display of a picture is performed, the picture is held in a predetermined area and displayed on standby;
When the duration period of the performance content determined by the content determining means is shorter than the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information, means for extending the execution period of the standby display accordingly (step S504 in the sound-light side MPU 62). The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G4, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing processing.

According to feature G5, by extending the execution period of the standby display, the difference between the duration of the performance content determined by the content determination means and the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information is compensated for. This eliminates the need to significantly modify the performance content of the unit performance in order to compensate for the difference, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for compensating for the difference.

Feature G6. The content determining means includes:
A means (a function of executing the process of step S404 in the sound and light side MPU 62) for determining the performance content of the first performance range among the unit performances by executing a first lottery process;
A means (a function of executing the process of step S406 in the sound and light side MPU 62) for determining the performance content of the second performance range among the unit performances by executing a second lottery process;
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature G6, by executing the first lottery process and the second lottery process to determine the performance content of the unit performance, it becomes possible to irregularly determine the performance content of the unit performance. In this case, with the configuration of feature G1 above, performance contents with different durations of performance can be selected from the same type of predetermined correspondence information, so the degree of freedom in designing the first lottery process and the second lottery process is increased. It will be done.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features G1 to G6, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

Each of the inventions of the feature G group described above can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that can suitably perform effects such as display effects, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Display means (design display device 41) having a display section (liquid crystal display section 41a);
Display control means (for measurement display in the display CPU 72) that controls the display means so that measurement result information (number display image G31) corresponding to the number of measurement objects (obtained number of game balls) is displayed on the display section (a function of executing arithmetic processing for increasing display in the display CPU 72),
Equipped with
The display control means includes a change value changing means (step S2003, step S2007, step S2010 and step S2012 in the display CPU 72) that changes the change value of the value displayed in the measurement result information when updating the measurement result information. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function of executing the processing of step S2102 to step S2104 in the display CPU 72.

According to feature H1, measurement result information corresponding to the number of measurement targets is displayed on the display section, thereby making it possible for the player to recognize the number of measurement targets. In this case, when updating the measurement result information, the change value of the value currently displayed in the measurement result information is changed. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which measurement result information changes.

Feature H2. The display control means starts displaying the measurement result information when a measurement start opportunity occurs, and ends the display of the measurement result information for the measurement time when a measurement end opportunity occurs,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the change value changing means can change the change value within the range of one measurement.

According to feature H2, since the change value of the measurement result information can be changed within the range of one measurement, the manner in which the measurement result information changes even within the range of one measurement is diversified. becomes possible.

Feature H3. The display control means starts displaying the measurement result information when a measurement start opportunity occurs, and ends the display of the measurement result information for the measurement time when a measurement end opportunity occurs,
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the change value changing means can change the change value between one measurement time and another measurement time.

According to feature H3, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes in each measurement time.

Feature H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the change value changing means sets the change value to a value corresponding to a result of dividing the value finally displayed as the measurement result information by a predetermined value.

According to feature H4, it is possible to make the change value of the value corresponding to the measurement result information irregular according to the value finally displayed as the measurement result information.

Feature H5. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the change value changing means changes the change value according to a value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information.

According to feature H5, by changing the change value according to the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information, the change value in the value of the measurement result information can be changed in relation to the value to be reflected. It becomes possible to change it.

Feature H6. According to any one of features H1 to H5, the change value changing means sets the change value to a larger value as the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is larger. The game machine described.

According to feature H6, the larger the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information, the larger the change value becomes, thereby completing the reflection of the value to be reflected in the measurement result information. It becomes possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes while shortening the period required.

Feature H7. The display control means includes:
If the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is a value corresponding to an increase in the value to be measured, the value to be reflected is divided into multiple update timings and displayed in the measurement result information. a first reflecting means (a function that executes the processing of steps S2005 to S2013 in the display CPU 72),
If the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is a value corresponding to a decrease in the value to be measured, the value to be reflected is displayed in the measurement result information at one update timing. a second reflecting means (a function for executing the processing of step S2003 and step S2004 in the display CPU 72);
Equipped with
When the value to be reflected is reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information by the first reflecting means at a plurality of update timings, the change value changing means changes the value at each update timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, characterized in that the change value can be changed.

According to feature H7, when the value of the measurement target increases, it is possible to emphasize that the value of the measurement target is increasing by reflecting the value that should be reflected at multiple update timings. Therefore, when the value of the measurement target decreases, the value to be reflected is reflected at one update timing, making it possible to make the decrease in the value of the measurement target less noticeable. In this case, if the value of the measurement target increases, the change value at each update timing may change, so the measurement result information may change in a situation where it is emphasized that the value of the measurement target is increasing. It becomes possible to diversify the aspects.

Feature H8. Any one of features H1 to H7 characterized in that the measurement target is a difference between an increase in the number of game media available to the player and a decrease in the number of game media available to the player. 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature H8, when the difference between an increase and a decrease in the number of game media available to a player is displayed as measurement result information, the manner in which the measurement result information changes is diversified. becomes possible.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features H1 to H8, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

Each of the inventions of the feature H group described above can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that can suitably perform display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A performance execution means (symbol display device 41) that executes the performance,
Production control means (sound and light side MPU 62, display CPU 201, VDP 205) that controls the production execution means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The performance control means includes a time-based control means (on the sound and light side) that causes the performance execution means to start a special performance (special period performance) when a predetermined start corresponding time arrives and a start condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function of executing the processing of step S3010 and step S3011 in the MPU 62.

According to feature I1, by starting the special performance when a predetermined starting time has arrived, it is possible to perform a performance triggered by the arrival of the predetermined time. Furthermore, for example, it is possible to simultaneously start the same performance on a plurality of gaming machines installed in a gaming hall. In addition, it is not desirable to start the special effect from the viewpoint of processing load and ease of understanding of the game content, since the special effect is started when the corresponding start time is reached and the start conditions are met. It is possible to prevent a special performance from being started under certain circumstances.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the time corresponding control means starts the special performance after a preparation period has elapsed when the start corresponding time has arrived.

According to feature I2, since the special performance is started after the preparation period has elapsed when the corresponding start time has arrived, it is possible to set the start time of the special performance to a predetermined time. Further, it becomes possible to perform the processing necessary for executing the special performance in a distributed manner during the preparation period, and it becomes possible to distribute the processing load.

Feature I3. The performance control means includes an optional response control means (step S3208 in the sound and light side MPU 62) that causes the performance execution means to execute an optional response performance (game repeat performance) when an arbitrary opportunity occurs at an arbitrary timing. - a function to execute the process of step S3213),
The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein the preparation period is set as a period longer than the longest execution period among the execution periods of the optional response performance.

According to feature I3, since the preparation period is set to be longer than the longest execution period of the optional performance, the special performance cannot be started even if the start time has come in a situation where the optional performance is being executed. The optional response performance that is in progress will end before the timing for the execution is reached. As a result, it is possible to limit the execution status of the optional response effect to a predetermined situation when a special effect is started, and to prevent the occurrence of an event where the processing load becomes extremely high at the timing when a special effect is started. It is possible to prevent this.

Feature I4. The performance control means includes an optional response control means (step S3208 in the sound and light side MPU 62) that causes the performance execution means to execute an optional response performance (game repeat performance) when an arbitrary opportunity occurs at an arbitrary timing. - a function to execute the process of step S3213),
The optional response control means limits the performance content of the optional response performance to predetermined performance content when starting the optional response performance after the start response time and before the start condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature I3.

According to feature I4, it becomes possible to limit the performance content of the optional response performance to the predetermined performance content when the special performance is started. As a result, although it is possible to start the optional response effect after the start time and before the start of the special effect, the processing load at the timing when the special effect starts becomes extremely high. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of

Feature I5. The performance control means causes the performance execution means to execute a preparation performance (a performance during the preparation period) until the start time is reached and the start condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processes of step S2806, step S2807, step S3006, and step S3007 in the side MPU 62.

According to feature I5, by executing the preparation response performance, it becomes possible to make the player aware that a special performance will be executed from now on.

Feature I6. According to feature I5, the preparation response control means does not start the preparation response performance until the restriction condition is lifted when the start response time is reached and the restriction condition is satisfied. Game machine.

According to feature I6, if the limiting condition is satisfied, the preparation response performance is not started even if the start response time has come, so that the preparation response performance is not started in a situation that is unfavorable from the viewpoint of processing load, etc. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature I7. The gaming machine according to feature I6, wherein the preparation response control means causes, when the limiting condition is satisfied, a corresponding notification (display of the remaining time notification image G63) to be executed.

According to feature I7, it is possible to make the player aware that the preparation response performance and the special performance will be executed from now on even in a situation where the restriction condition is satisfied.

Feature I8. The performance control means includes an optional response control means (step S3208 in the sound and light side MPU 62) that causes the performance execution means to execute an optional response performance (game repeat performance) when an arbitrary opportunity occurs at an arbitrary timing. - a function to execute the process of step S3213),
When the start response time comes in a situation where the optional response performance is being executed, the preparation response control means determines that the limiting condition is satisfied and continues the preparation response performance until the optional response performance ends. The gaming machine according to feature I6 or I7, characterized in that the gaming machine is not started.

According to feature I8, it is possible to prevent the preparation response performance from being started during the execution of the optional response performance. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the processing load at the timing when the preparation response performance is started becomes extremely high.

Feature I9. The effect execution means is a display means having a display section (liquid crystal display section 41a),
When the preparation-related performance and another performance (game replay performance) are executed at the same time, the preparation-related performance is executed in a part of the display area, and the preparation-related performance is executed in another area of the display unit (section display). The gaming machine according to any one of features I5 to I8, wherein the other performance is executed in the area G66).

According to feature I9, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize each of the preparation-related performance and other performances.

Feature I10. The preparation response control means causes the production execution means to notify remaining time information (remaining time notification image G63) corresponding to the remaining time until the special production starts as the preparation production. The gaming machine according to any one of features I5 to I9.

According to feature I10, the player can recognize that the start of the special performance is approaching by checking the remaining time information.

Feature I11. The preparation response control means includes:
Regardless of the timing at which the preparation-compatible performance is started, the remaining time information is started to be displayed from a predetermined initial value and is updated until the remaining time information reaches a predetermined end value. (a function of executing the process of step S3404 in the display CPU 201);
means for changing the one-time update value of the remaining time information according to the timing at which the preparation-related performance is started (a function for executing the processing of step S3402 and step S3403 in the display CPU 201);
The gaming machine according to feature I10, comprising:

According to feature I11, it is possible to diversify the update mode of the remaining time information in relation to the timing at which the preparation response performance is started.

Feature I12. When the start corresponding time or a predetermined time after that time and before the start condition is satisfied, a predetermined time is emitted by a performance execution means (display light emitting unit 44, speaker unit 45) different from the performance execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I11, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for starting the performance (a function of executing the process of step S2801 in the sound and light side MPU 62).

According to feature I12, it is possible to reliably start a predetermined performance upon reaching the corresponding start time. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible to simultaneously start a predetermined performance in a plurality of gaming machines installed in a game hall, regardless of the performance execution status of the performance execution means in the plurality of gaming machines.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features I1 to I12, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

Each of the inventions of the above feature group I can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Further, a general configuration is such that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding pachinko machines, a lottery is held based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, and a fluctuating pattern is displayed on the display surface of the display device. A known configuration is known in which, when a winning result is obtained, a specific combination of symbols, etc. is finally displayed on the display screen, and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is entered. When the state shifts to the special game state, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on balls entering the ball entering device.

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to provide novel game content, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Display means (design display device 41) having a display section (liquid crystal display section 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Creating drawing data based on setting the image data in the setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means. display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit based on the display unit;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means includes:
Using the first still image data (first character image data 171) stored in advance in the display storage means, specific individual images (first pseudo moving image character G42, second pseudo moving image character G43, pseudo A first frame control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2204 to S2207 in the display CPU 72) for displaying a first frame image (first character image G41, first pseudo moving image G52) including the moving image character G51) )and,
A second frame image (second character image G48, second pseudo a second frame control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2217 to S2220 in the display CPU 72) for displaying the moving image image G53);
At an image update timing after the first frame image is displayed and before the second frame image is displayed, intermediate image data (effect Image data 172) is used to display an intermediate image (effect image G45, pseudo moving image effect image G54) that does not include the specific individual image. function) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature J1, a specific individual image is displayed between the update timing at which the first frame image including the specific individual image is displayed and the update timing at which the second frame image including the specific individual image is displayed. Intermediate images not included are displayed. As a result, even in situations where there is not enough image data to make the player recognize that a video of a specific individual image is being displayed, it is possible to display a video of a specific individual image by intervening images. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a video about the game is being displayed.

Feature J2. The first frame control means displays the first frame image in different display modes at a plurality of update timings by changing the setting mode of the first still image data in the setting storage section. The gaming machine according to feature J1.

According to feature J2, by using the first still image data, it is possible to create a situation in which the display mode is changed at a plurality of update timings while displaying a specific individual image.

Feature J3. The second frame control means is characterized in that the second frame image is displayed in different display modes at a plurality of update timings by changing the setting mode of the second still image data in the setting storage section. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2.

According to feature J3, by using the second still image data, it is possible to create a situation in which the display mode is changed at a plurality of update timings while displaying a specific individual image.

Feature J4. In a specific performance period, the intermediate image is displayed next to the first frame image, and the second frame image is displayed after the intermediate image,
The first still image data is used in a first period different from the specific presentation period,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the second still image data is used in a second period different from the specific performance period and the first period.

According to feature J4, an effect is executed in which a specific individual image is displayed in a specific effect period using first still image data used in the first period and second still image data used in the second period. Ru. This makes it possible to use the still image data in a plurality of situations, and it becomes possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the display storage means. In this case, by having the configuration of feature J1 above, even if the configuration uses the first still image data and the second still image data, it is possible to create a moving image for a specific individual image during a specific performance period. It becomes possible to make the player recognize that the display is being performed.

Feature J5. The predetermined portion of the specific individual image displayed in the second frame image is moved along a predetermined motion path with respect to the predetermined portion (predetermined portion G51a) of the specific individual image displayed in the first frame image. The first still image data and the second still image data are set to be displayed at a position on the forward side of the image,
According to any one of features J1 to J4, the intermediate image data is set so that the intermediate individual image (individual image G54a) displayed in the intermediate image is displaced according to the predetermined motion path. gaming machines.

According to feature J5, by displaying an intermediate image such that the intermediate individual image is displaced according to the motion path of a predetermined part in a specific individual image based on the first still image data and the second still image data, the first still image data Even if the display position of the predetermined part in the specific individual image based on the image data is far from the display position of the predetermined part in the specific individual image based on the second still image data, the predetermined part is displaced according to the predetermined motion path. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the player is playing the game.

Feature J6. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, wherein the first frame image and the second frame image are real images, and the intermediate image is a non-real image.

According to feature J6, even in a situation where there are few types of live-action images, by using non-live-action images, it is possible to give the player the impression that a moving image of a specific individual image is being displayed. Become.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features J1 to J6, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Display means (design display device 41) having a display section (liquid crystal display section 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 203) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
Equipped with
The display storage means includes:
First video data (A-angle first video data group 261) that allows a series of specific videos to be displayed by using the image data created by executing the decoding process;
Second moving image data (A-angle second video data group 262),
A game machine characterized in that it stores in advance.

According to the feature K1, since not only the first moving image data but also the second moving image data is provided, the first moving image data and the second moving image are used as objects of use depending on the timing at which the display start trigger occurs. It becomes possible to select any of the data. Thereby, by simply switching the moving image data to be used, it is possible to start displaying the specific moving image from the beginning of the specific moving image, and it is also possible to start displaying the specific moving image from the middle of the specific moving image.

Feature K2. The first moving image data includes a plurality of first unit moving image data (moving image data 271a) each having a different corresponding display period in the specific moving image,
The second moving image data includes a plurality of second unit moving image data (moving image data 271b) each having a different corresponding display period in the specified intermediate moving image,
Each of the second unit moving image data is a moving image that starts at a timing in the middle of a moving image that is displayed by using first unit moving image data in a corresponding order among the plurality of first unit moving image data. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the gaming machine is set as data to be displayed.

According to feature K2, it is possible to set many timings that allow the specific moving image to be started from the middle, and it becomes easier to start the specific moving image from the display content corresponding to the timing at which the display start opportunity occurs.

Feature K3. In the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data in corresponding order, the start timing of the moving image displayed by using the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data are determined. The amount of deviation in the update timing of the image between the start timing of the video displayed by using the image is the same for each combination of the first unit video data and the second unit video data in the corresponding order. or the gaming machine according to feature K2, characterized in that they are substantially the same.

According to feature K3, it is possible to easily design the timing at which the display of the moving image based on the first unit moving image data can be started and the timing at which the displaying of the moving image based on the second unit moving image data can be started. It will be done.

Feature K4. The first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data are data such that the number of image data created by executing the decoding process is the minimum number that can be set as moving image data. The gaming machine according to feature K2 or K3.

According to feature K4, it is possible to set many timings at which the display of a moving image based on the first moving image data can be switched and timings at which it is possible to switch to display a moving image based on the second moving image data. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the amount of moving image data that is read out at one time.

Feature K5. The display control means starts displaying the specific video using the first video data when a predetermined operation is performed by the player at a timing prior to a timing corresponding to the start of the specific video; When the predetermined operation is performed at a timing later than the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image, target switching means (steps in the display CPU 201) that starts displaying the specific intermediate moving image using the second moving image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of steps S4105 to S4117.

According to feature K5, even if a predetermined operation by a player occurs at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to start displaying a specific moving image from a situation corresponding to the timing at which the predetermined operation occurs.

Feature K6. The target switching means is configured such that the predetermined operation is performed at a timing after a timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image and before a timing corresponding to the start of the specific intermediate moving image. Also, if the predetermined operation is performed after a timing that is earlier than the period required to start using the second video data with respect to the timing corresponding to the start, the second video data The gaming machine according to feature K5, characterized in that the display of the specific intermediate video using is not started.

According to feature K6, it is possible to start displaying a specific moving image from a situation corresponding to the timing of occurrence of a predetermined operation within a range that allows smooth start of use of the second moving image data.

Feature K7. The display control means includes a target switching means (in the display CPU 201) that switches to a situation where another video is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed by the player in a situation where one of the plurality of types of video is being displayed. a function to execute the processing of steps S4105 to S4117),
The combination of the first moving image data and the second moving image data is provided as moving image data for displaying the first moving image among the plurality of types of moving images,
The display storage means includes:
third moving image data (first moving image data group 264 of angle B) that enables a series of predetermined moving images to be displayed by using the image data created by executing the decoding process;
Fourth moving image data (B angle second video data group 265),
is memorized in advance,
Features K1 to K6, characterized in that the combination of the third moving image data and the fourth moving image data is provided as moving image data for displaying the second moving image among the plurality of types of moving images. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature K7, it is possible to set many timings at which the video to be displayed can be switched between the first video and the second video.

Feature K8. The first moving image data and the third moving image data have the same timing at which a start image can be displayed during a predetermined presentation period,
The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the second moving image data and the fourth moving image data have the same timing at which a start image can be displayed during the predetermined performance period.

According to feature K8, when switching from one of the first moving image and the second moving image to the other, it is possible to start displaying the switching destination moving image from the display content corresponding to the switching source display content.

Feature K9. The gaming machine according to feature K7 or K8, wherein the first moving image and the second moving image are moving images in which special individual images are displayed at different angles.

According to feature K9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the display target is switched between a plurality of moving images with different display angles of special individual images.

Feature K10. Display means (design display device 41) having a display section (liquid crystal display section 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 203) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
Equipped with
The display storage means stores predetermined moving image data (various moving image data groups 261 to 269) that makes it possible to display a series of special moving images by using the image data created by executing the decoding process. ) is memorized in advance,
The predetermined moving image data includes a plurality of special unit moving image data (moving image data 271a to 273c) each having a different corresponding display period in the special moving image,
A game machine characterized in that the special unit moving image data is data such that the number of image data created by executing the decoding process is the minimum number that can be set as moving image data.

According to feature K10, it is possible to set many timings at which switching to display of a moving image based on predetermined moving image data is possible. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the amount of moving image data that is read out at one time.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features K1 to K10, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

Each invention of the feature J group and the feature K group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that can suitably perform display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

Below, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature will be shown.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

A reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a plurality of symbols, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after the display is stopped or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a bonus is given to a player according to the symbols after the stoppage.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 41... Symbol display device, 41a... Liquid crystal display part, 44... Display light emitting part, 45... Speaker part, 52... Main side MPU, 62... Sound and light side MPU, 72... Display CPU, 74... Memory module , 76...VDP, 82a...First frame area, 82b...Second frame area, 122...Character stop table, 123...Character movement table, 124...Background table, 125...Linkage flag, 132...Decoded image data , 142... image data for band display, 143... image data for lighting, 144... image data for turning off, 145... table for band display, 146... table for blinking display, 171... image data for first character, 172... effect image Data, 173... Image data for second character, 201... Display CPU, 202... Work RAM, 203... Memory module, 204... VRAM, 205... VDP, 211... VRAM, 211a... Texture area, 211b... Video data area , 241... Image data for the backmost image, 242... Image data for the first background individual image, 243... Image data for the second background individual image, 244... Image data for the production character, 245... First separate saved image data , 246...Image data for additional individual images, 247...Second separate saved image data, 248...Effect image data, 261-269...Video data group, 271a-273c...Video image data, 282...Special video data, 284 ...still image data, G4...character for loop display, G5...background for loop display, G11...character for group display, G22...validity period image, G24...band image, G25...blinking image, G31...number display image, G41... Image for first character, G42...Character for first pseudo animation, G43...Character for second pseudo animation, G45...Effect image, G48...Image for second character, G51...Character for pseudo animation, G51a...Predetermined part, G52 ...Image for first pseudo moving image, G53... Image for second pseudo moving image, G54... Effect image for pseudo moving image, G54a... Individual image, G63... Remaining time notification image, G66... Section display area, T10... Execution for acceleration period Target table, T11...Execution target table for the first high speed period, T12...Execution target table for the first low speed period.

Claims (1)

a display means having a display section;
Display control means for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a gaming machine equipped with
First mode determination information in which first mode information that determines the display mode of the first type image is set in chronological order, and second mode information that determines the display mode of the second type image is set in chronological order. and information storage means for storing in advance second mode determining information,
When simultaneously displaying the first type image and the second type image on the display section, the display control means determines a display mode of the first type image according to the first mode determination information, and displays the first type image in accordance with the first mode determination information. comprising simultaneous display control means for determining a display mode of the second type image according to information for determining two modes ;
The simultaneous display control means
When starting to display the first type image according to the first aspect determining information, start information is set in a start information storage means, and displaying the first type image according to the first aspect determining information. means for erasing the start information from the start information storage means when terminating the process;
means for displaying the second type image according to the second mode determining information when the start information is set in the start information storage means;
Equipped with
The first mode determining information is information in which the first mode information for displaying the first type image in a first variation mode is set in chronological order,
The information storage means stores in advance third mode determining information in which information for displaying the first type image in a variation mode different from the first variation mode is set in chronological order. A gaming machine featuring:

Images